Skip to main content

Full text of "Path Of Ramana Maharshi Collection"

See other formats


JUL  9a*** 


Selections  from 

The  Mountain  Path 
and 

The  Call  Divine 


Sri  Ramanasramam 

Tiruvannamalai 
2002 


©  Sri  Ramanasramam 


First  Edition        :  2002  (1000  copies) 

ISBN  No:  81-88225-49-5 

Price:  Rs. 
CC  No:  1009 

Published  by 

V.S.  Ramanan 

President,  Board  of  Trustees 

Sri  Ramanasramam 

Tiruvannamalai  606  603 

Tamil  Nadu 

INDIA 

Tel:  91-4175-37292 
Fax:  91-4175-37491 
Email:  alagamma@vsnl.com 

Website:  www.ramana-maharshi.org 


Designed  and  typeset  at 
Sri  Ramanasramam 

Printed  by 

Kartik  Offset  Printers 
Chennai  600  015 


Foreword 


Like  the  previous  volumes  Fragrant  Petals  and  Surpassing 
Love  and  Grace,  The  Silent  Power  contains  selections  from  The 
Mountain  Path  and  The  Call  Divine.  Besides  the  writings  on 
Sri  Maharshi  and  his  beloved  Arunachala,  a  few  other  interesting 
articles  on  various  topics  have  been  included. 


1 1 ruvann  am  alai 
15  February  2002 


V.S.  Ramanan 

Publisher 


Contents 


Foreword  ...         .         .  iii 

Part  I 

Arunachala  —  Lucia  Osborne  .....  1 
Arunachala's  True  Shape — Aquarius  .  .  .  .10 
The  Cult  of  the  Hill  —  Kenneth  Grant  .         .         .  .12 

Part  II 

Sab  Jan,  Sri  Maharshi's  Classmate  —  "SEIN"  .  .  .19 
Krishnaprem  and  Maharshi — Marie  B.  By les  ...  25 
A  Perfect  Image  of  the  Life  Divine  —  K.  Ramachandra  .  28 
A  Talk  with  Sri  Ramana  Maharshi  —  Pryns  Hopkins   .         .  31 

Ramana  Reminiscences 

—  I  Arthur  Osborne          .....  34 

—  II  Dr.  Hafiz  Syed   38 

—  Ill  ProfB.L.  Atreya   42 

—  IV Anonymous             .....  45 

—  V Anonymous              .....  47 

—  VIOMSadhu    48 

—  VII  Anonymous           .....  49 

—  VIII  Varadachari          .....  50 

—  IX  Maurice  Frydman    .         .         .         .  .51 

—  XSwami  Madhavananda       .         .         .  .52 

—  XIKRK  Murthy   53 

—  XII /.  Suryaprakasa  Rao .....  56 

—  XIII K  K.  Nambiar   57 

—  XIV RT.  Muthuswami  .....  58 

—  XV  N.N.  Rajan   60 

—  XVI  Madhavi  Ammal  .....  65 


Recollections  —  K.R.K.  Murthy  .....  67 
Our  Natural  State — A 'Pilgrim  .         .         .  .69 

A  Spiritual  Torch  —  PaulBrunton  .  .  .  .73 
Bhagavan  Treated  for  Eczema  —  T.K.S.  ...  77 

Sri  Ramana  —  Major  A.  W.  Chadwick  .  .  .  .81 
Sri  Bhagavan  and  the  Mother's  temple — Major  A.  W.  Chadwick  83 
The  Immutable  Atmosphere  —  N.  O.  Mehta  ...  85 
Bhagavan  Ramana  Maharshi  as  seen  by  a  Bengali  Devotee 

— Jagannath  Chattopadhyaya  .  .  .  .90 
Remembering  Ramana 

—  I  Miracles  and  Bhagavan  —  N.  N.  Rajan     .         .  92 

—  II  His  Divine  Excellence  —  N.  N.  Rajan  .  .  93 
The  Fortunate  Boy  —  "SEIN"     .....  96 

Lest  We  Forget  ... 

—  I  Dr.  V.  Srinivasa  Rao    .....  99 

—  II  G.  Lakshmi  Narasimham  .  .  .  .101 
How  I  Came  to  Bhagavan 

—  IRodaMacIver  .         .         .         .  .104 

—  II M.  S.  Nagarajan       .         .         .         .  .106 

—  III  A  Seeker   108 

Bhagavan's  Solicitude  for  Devotees  —  Kunju  Stoami  .         .  112 

Reminiscences 

—  I  A.  Venkateswara  Sarma  andSmt.  Sala        .         .  115 

—  II M.  S.  Nagarajan  .  .  .  .  .117 
How  I  Came  to  the  Maharshi 

—  I  Swami  Paresananda    .         .         .         .  1 20 

—  WSunyata  .....  123 

—  Ill  Satya  Narayan  Tandon  .  .  .  .125 
Awareness  Absolute — Visvanatha  Swami  .  .  .128 
Sri  Bhagavan's  Bodily  Health  —  K.  Lakshmana  Sarma  .  133 
Treatment  to  Sri  Bhagavan  -  An  Account  —  Dr.  Shankar  Rao  135 


The  End  was  Peaceful  —  Lt.  Col.  P.  V.  Karamchandani  .  1 42 
Aradhana  Day 

—  I  Major  Chadwick        .         .         .  .  146 

—  UMouniSadhu  .  .  .  .  .148 
Bhagavan  is  Everywhere  —  S.  G.  Devaraj  .  .  .151 
Bhagavan  Sri  Ramana  is  Personally  Present  Here 

—  Swatantra  .  .  .  .  .153 
How  I  Came  to  Bhagavan  —  Muhammad Abdulla  .  .155 


Ramana's  Universal  Philosophy  —  Dr.  M.  HafizSyed 

—  I  Ramana  Maharshi's  Spiritual  Philosophy  of  Life  .  .158 

—  II  Testimony  of  Islam  to  Bhagavan's  Life  and  Teachings  164 


Bhagavan  Sri  Ramana,  The  Light  Divine 

—  Dr.  T.M.P.  Mahadevan          .         .  .  .169 
Sri  Ramana:  A  Pure  Channel  for  a  Higher  Power 

—  Paul Brunton              .         .         .  .  .183 

Part  III 

The  Eternal  Now  —  Major  A.  W.  Chadwick     .  .  .189 

There  is  Nothing,  Be!  — Major  A.  W.  Chadwick  .  .197 

Uniqueness  of  Bhagavan  —  Dr.  T.M.P.  Mahadevan  .  .201 

The  Miraculous  and  Supernatural  —  Marie  B.  Byles  .  .  208 

An  Angry  Prayer — Jean  Butler    .         .         .  .  .212 

An  Incarnate  Abbot  Explains       .         .         .  .  .216 

Zen  Stories  .  .  .  .  .221 
The  Story  of  Lila  .....  223 
Appendix                               .....  227 


PARTI 

On  Arunachala 


Arunachala 


Lucia  Osborne 

"Arunachala!  Thou  art  the  inner  Self  who  dances  in 
the  Heart  as  T.  Heart  is  Thy  name,  O  Lord!"  (Five  Stanzas 
to  Sri  Arunachala,  verse  2.) 

IN  THE  PURANAS  Arunachala  is  referred  to  as  the  oldest 
Hill  on  earth  and  is  regarded  as  the  heart  of  the  Universe. 
Scientists  have  also  pointed  out  the  eastern  ghats  of  the  Deccan 
plateau  as  the  oldest  land.  Arunachala  has  many  names:  Arunagiriy 
Sonagiri,  Sudarsanagiri,  Annamalai,  to  mention  but  a  few  and 
is  also  referred  to  as  the  Tejolingam  —  the  lingam  of  effulgence 
—  which  is  the  formless  emblem  of  Siva. 

The  form  of  the  Hill  is  said  to  resemble  Sri  Chakra,  the 
emblem  of  the  Cosmos  with  its  substratum,  and  shaktas  regard 
this  Hill  as  Sri  Chakra  itself.  Bhagavan  took  an  active  part  in 
the  installation  of  Sri  Chakra  in  the  temple  dedicated  to  the 
mother. 

Devotees  of  Siva  consider  this  divine  Hill  as  the  form  of 
Siva,  who  appeared  in  the  midst  of  Brahma  and  Vishnu  as  a 
column  of  fire  without  beginning  or  end  in  order  to  dispel 
their  ignorance.  Both  failed  to  realise  his  presence  by  their 
physical  efforts.  This  signifies  the  inability  of  mind  or  intellect 
to  go  beyond  itself.  Arunachala  is  traditionally  identified  with 
Sudarsana  (a  form  of  the  chakra  or  discus  of  Vishnu).  In  the 


2 


form  of  a  deity,  Sudarsana  appears  in  a  fierce  aspect,  armed 
with  weapons  of  destruction.  When  a  seeker  penetrates  beyond 
the  semblance  of  the  terrible,  while  struggling  to  overcome  what 
seems  terrible  in  himself  —  namely,  the  dark  downward 
propensities  of  his  own  psyche  —  grace  reveals  itself  as  love  and 
compassion.  This,  according  to  Dr.  Mees,  an  authority  on 
symbolism,  is  the  etymology  of  Sudarsana  which  aims  at  the 
destruction  of  these  propensities,  so  as  to  reveal  love  and  beauty. 

Many  saints  and  sages  have  sung  and  composed  songs  in 
praise  of  Arunachala  and  its  import,  and  some  have  attained 
enlightenment  here.  Shankara  also  seems  to  have  visited 
Arunachala.  In  one  of  his  compositions  he  calls  this  Hill  'Meru 
and  says,  like  Bhagavan,  that  Sidddha  Purushas  are  found  here. 
Saint  Namasivaya  lived  in  one  of  the  caves,  which  is  still  called 
by  his  name.  His  disciple  has  written  the  well-known  Annamalai 
Venba,  a  hymn  in  praise  of  Arunachala.  Another  well-known 
Saiva  saint,  Virupaksha,  also  lived  in  a  cave  higher  up  on  the 
slope.  It  is  said  to  be  in  the  shape  of  OM  —  and  some  devotees 
have  heard  there,  the  sound  of  OM  in  silent  meditation.  The 
saint  s  tomb  is  also  there  and  this  cave  bears  his  name.  Bhagavan 
spent  seventeen  years  in  it  and  later  moved  up  to  Skandashram 
where  a  trickle  of  water  changed  overnight  to  a  perennial  stream 
whose  water,  like  that  of  the  Ganges,  does  not  deteriorate  with 
time.  Arunagirinathar,  another  notable  saint,  is  also  celebrated 
for  his  songs  of  praise  after  he  received  illumination  through 
the  grace  of  Muruga  in  the  Arunachala  temple. 

When  mention  was  made  one  day  of  the  tank  adjoining 
the  Ashram  being  called  AgastyaThirtam,  the  Maharshi  was  asked 
if  that  sage  ever  visited  the  Hill.  Bhagavan  remarked  "Yes,  of 
course,  everyone  must  come  here  eventually",  meaning  that 
everyone  must  eventually  return  to  the  source  —  Arunachala. 


3 


Sages  have  said  that  one  can  attain  salvation  by  being  born 
in  Tiruvarur,  by  dying  in  Benares,  by  worshipping  in 
Chidambaram  and  by  merely  thinking  of  Arunachala.  "So 
worship  Arunachala  of  shining  golden  lustre  for  mere 
remembrance  of  Him  ensures  deliverance,"1  Bhagavan  also 
affirms. 

Bhagavan  mentioned  that  the  Hill  is  one  of  light. 
Sometimes  one  can  see  manifestations  of  lights  on  the  Hill. 
In  the  early  years,  a  French  devotee,  Sujata  Sen,  once  spent 
the  night  on  the  Hill  in  protest  against  an  order  of  the 
management  not  allowing  women  devotees  to  remain  in  the 
Ashram  after  dark.  This  was  the  most  wonderful  time  for  many 
devotees  when  Bhagavan  used  to  sit  with  them  for  an  hour  or 
so  in  radiant  silence.  Sujata  dwelt  on  her  grievance  one- 
pointedly.  Next  morning  she  told  me  that  she  was  taken  inside 
the  Hill  and  found  a  whole  world  in  it,  which  she  described.  I 
did  not  pay  much  attention  to  this,  dismissing  it  as  a  dream  or 
imagination.  Strangely  enough  many  years  later,  in  1970  to 
be  precise,  another  devotee,  Mr.  S.  N.  Tandon,  had  a  similar 
experience  which  he  described  in  detail  in  the  April  1970  issue 
of  The  Mountain  Path  in  1970,  that  year.  It  is  reminiscent  of 
Dante's  inferno,  leading  by  stages  to  light,  in  which  all 
manifestation  disappears  in  the  feeling  of  pure  I-Am-ness. 

Sri  Visvanatha  Swami,  who  from  his  adolescence  spent  many 
years  with  Bhagavan,  shares  with  us  the  following  account. 
Bhagavan  said  to  him  one  day  in  the  early  twenties,  "Innumerable 
are  the  visions  I  have  had  of  this  Hill,  Arunachala.  I  have  seen 
beautiful  groves  of  trees  and  fine  palaces  inside  it.  Once  I  saw  a 
large  tank  and  a  big  congregation  of  rishis  and  yogis  seated  on  a 


Five  Hymns  on  Arunachala. 


4 


wide  plain  around  it.  Every  face  was  familiar  and  so  were  the 
surroundings.  A  dais  was  there  and  I  went  up  and  sat  on  it  with 
my  right  hand  held  up  in  Chin-mudra.  It  seemed  my  usual  place 
and  my  usual  pose."  Chin-mudra  is  a  pose  in  which  the  right 
hand  is  held  up  with  the  thumb  and  forefinger  joined  and  the 
three  remaining  fingers  straight  up.  It  is  the  pose  of  Dakshinamurti. 
It  denotes  the  unity  of  the  individual  with  Brahman,  the 
transcendental  Reality  beyond  the  three  gunas. 

It  is  said  in  the  puranas  that  a  Siddha  Purusha,  the  ancient 
teacher  in  the  form  of  an  eternal  youth,  is  present  higher  up  on 
one  of  the  slopes  seated  under  an  enormous  banyan  tree, 
diffusing  his  spiritual  radiance  in  silence. 

In  the  early  days  Bhagavan  used  to  roam  a  good  deal 
on  the  Hill.  One  day  he  found,  in  a  dried  up  watercourse,  a 
banyan  leaf  of  such  enormous  size  that  it  set  him  wondering 
what  tree  could  produce  such  a  leaf.  Proceeding  further  he 
saw  from  a  distance  a  huge  banyan  tree  growing  on  what 
looked  like  sheer  rock.  Going  closer,  Bhagavan  inadvertently 
put  his  foot  in  a  hornet  s  nest  and  did  not  withdraw  it  until 
the  hornets  appeased  their  anger  for  being  disturbed,  by  badly 
stinging  his  leg. 

Bhagavan  did  not  go  near  the  tree  but  returned  to  his 
abode.  Subsequently  he  firmly  discouraged  devotees  from  trying 
to  find  the  place  saying  that  it  was  inaccessible  and  not  advisable 
for  them  to  do  so.  "It  is  impossible.  I  know  it!"  he  told  them, 
"For  there  shall  no  man  see  Me  and  live."  (Exodus  33,  20). 

The  finite  ego  must  die  before  it  can  behold  and  merge 
with  infinity.  Once  a  whole  group  of  devotees,  obviously 
unaware  of  Bhagavan s  injunction,  set  out  to  locate  the  place 
but  they  found  themselves  in  such  distress  that  all  they  could 
pray  for  was  to  be  able  to  return  safely! 


5 


Any  endeavour  to  write  about  Arunachala  is  like  painting 
the  lily'  —  to  borrow  an  apt  expression.  It  is  impossible  to 
present  it  better  or  more  clearly  than  Bhagavan  himself  and  in 
this  case  there  is  no  distinction  between  them.  Arunachala  in 
the  form  of  Bhagavan  speaks  about  himself!  Like  Bhagavan,  the 
Hill  comes  to  life  and  can  appear  to  us  as  the  beloved  of  our 
heart  as  an  indescribable  tenderness.  What  could  be  nearer  and 
dearer  than  one's  own  Self,  Arunachala? 

"O  nectar  springing  up  in  the  heart  of  devotees  ....  haven 
of  my  refuge.  .  ."  (Arunachala  Padikam). 

"The  one  Self,  the  sole  Reality  alone  exists  eternally.  When 
even  the  youthful  teacher  of  ancient  times,  Dakshinamurti, 
revealed  it  through  speechless  eloquence,  who  else  could  convey 
it  by  speech?"  (Ekatma  Panchakarn) . 

Bhagavan  explained  that  the  Universe  is  like  a  painting  on 
a  screen,  that  screen  being  the  red  Hill,  Arunachala.  That  which 
rises  and  sinks  is  made  up  only  of  what  it  rises  from.  The  finality 
of  the  Universe  is  Arunachala.  Meditating  on  Arunachala  or 
the  Self,  there  is  a  vibration  T.  Tracing  the  source  of  T,  the 
primal  'I-I'  alone  remains  and  it  is  inexpressible.  The  very  first 
sloka  in  the  Marital  Garland  of  Letters  expresses  this  tersely: 
"Arunachala!  Thou  dost  root  out  the  ego  of  those  who  meditate 
on  Thee  in  the  Heart,  O  Arunachala!" 

Bhagavan,  who  scarcely  ever  gave  advice  to  devotees  unless 
asked,  wholeheartedly  approved  and  encouraged  their  going 
round  the  Hill  as  conducive  and  very  beneficial  to  progress  in 
sadhana.  He  himself  set  an  example  by  doing  giripradakshina 
countless  times.  Worship  is  expressed  by  going  around  the  object 
of  worship  in  silent  remembrance  or  singing  bhajans  —  and 
not  giving  way  to  stray  thoughts.  One  usually  goes  barefoot. 
The  most  auspicious  times  are  full-moon  days,  Sivaratri  (the 


6 


night  of  Siva)  and  Kartikai,  the  night  when  the  beacon  is  lit  on 
top  of  the  Hill.  It  is  said  that  the  pilgrim  is  accompanied  by  an 
invisible  host  of  siddhas  and  rishis.  On  festival  days,  the  stream 
of  pilgrims  in  white  and  brightly  coloured  clothes  resembles 
garlands  of  flowers,  strewn  around  Arunachala,  wafting  their 
scent  in  the  way  of  bhajans. 

Among  the  many  holy  places  in  India,  representing 
different  modes  of  spirituality,  Arunachala  stands  out  as  the 
centre  of  the  most  direct  path,  guided  by  the  silent  influence  of 
the  guru.  It  is  the  centre  and  the  path  where  physical  contact 
with  the  guru  is  not  necessary.  The  silent  teaching  acts  and  speaks 
directly  to  the  Heart.  There  was  something  essentially  immutable 
and  rocklike  in  Bhagavan,  although  he  had  a  thousand  faces. 
He  spoke  and  explained  when  asked,  but  his  greatest  and  most 
inspiring  teaching  was,  like  the  Hill,  like  Dakshinamurti,  given 
in  silence.  Through  Bhagavan,  the  immense  potentiality  for 
spiritual  regeneration  inherent  in  Arunachala,  with  which  he 
identified  himself,  was  brought  to  life  and  into  focus. 

The  benedictory  verse  adopted  as  an  auspicious 
introduction  to  the  Five  Hymns  to  Sri  Arunachala  was  rather 
puzzling  as  it  was  not  clear  who  actually  wrote  those  words  "the 
Paramatman,  who  is  the  same  as  Arunachala  or  Ramana."  Sri  T. 
P.  Ramachandra  Iyer,  one  of  the  oldest  devotees,  who  gave  up 
his  practice  as  a  lawyer  to  serve  Bhagavan,  was  consulted  and  so 
was  Sri  Visvanatha  Swami.  Their  account  of  the  matter  is  that 
one  day,  when  Bhagavan  went  out  of  Virupaksha  Cave  for  his 
usual  morning  walk,  one  Amritanatha  Yati  put  on  Bhagavans 
seat  a  piece  of  paper  on  which  he  told  in  a  Malayalam  verse,  of 
his  great  longing  to  know  who  Bhagavan  really  was,  "Are  you 
the  manifestation  of  Lord  Vishnu,  or  Siva,  or  the  great 
grammarian  Vararuchi,  or  the  greatest  oiyatis  (renunciates)?" 


7 


His  question  was  couched  in  classic  form  and  script.  When 
he  returned  a  little  later  to  the  cave,  he  found  Bhagavan  already 
back  from  his  walk.  On  the  reverse  of  the  piece  of  paper  was 
Bhagavans  reply,  also  in  verse  and  Malayalam  script,  rendered 
with  mastery.  On  reading  it,  Amritanatha  Yati  felt  shaken  and 
in  all  humility  fell  at  Bhagavans  feet  "like  a  tall  coconut  tree 
cut  even  at  the  base",  to  use  his  own  words. 

The  reply  was  as  follows:  'In  the  lotus-shaped  Heart  of  all, 
beginning  with  Vishnu,  there  shines  as  absolute  Consciousness 
the  Paramatman  who  is  the  same  as  Arunachala-Ramana.  When 
the  mind  melts  with  love  of  Him  and  reaches  the  inmost  recess 
of  the  Heart  wherein  He  dwells  as  the  beloved,  the  subtle  eye 
pure  intellect  opens  and  He  reveals  Himself  as  pure 
Consciousness." 

"Through  the  potent  grace  of  Bhagavan",  wrote  Osborne 
"the  path  of  Self-enquiry  was  brought  within  the  competence 
of  men  and  women  of  this  age,  was  indeed  fashioned  into  a 
new  path  that  can  be  followed  in  the  conditions  of  the  modern 
world  with  no  form  or  ritual  ....  This  creation  of  a  new  path 
to  suit  the  needs  of  the  age  has  made  Arunachala  the  spiritual 
centre  of  the  world.  More  than  ever,  now  that  he  has  shed  his 
physical  body  and  is  one  with  Arunachala,  the  grace  and 
guidance  that  emanates  from  him  to  those  who  turn  to  him 
and  seek  his  aid  is  centred  outwardly  at  Arunachala,  to  which 
many  are  drawn,  both  those  who  were  disciples  of  Bhagavan  in 
his  lifetime  and  those  who  have  come  later." 

As  in  the  lifetime  of  Bhagavan,  so  also  now  one  can  turn 
and  speak  to  Arunachala-Ramana  far  more  effectively  than  in 
one's  own  words,  by  repeating  an  appropriate  verse  chosen  from 
the  Five  Hymns  to  Arunachala  which  Bhagavan  wrote  on  behalf 
of  his  disciples  from  whom  he  was  not  separate.  The  individual, 


8 


being  only  a  mode  of  absolute  Consciousness,  struggles  against 
his  finitude  to  regain  his  primordial  state  of  absolute  freedom 
through  grace.  These  verses  come  from  the  devotees'  own  heart: 

"Even  when  the  thieves  of  the  five  senses  break  in  upon 
me,  art  Thou  not  still  in  my  Heart,  O  Arunachala?" 

"On  seeking  Thy  real  Self  with  courage  I  lost  my  moorings. 
Have  mercy  on  me,  O  Arunachala!" 

"Unless  Thou  extend  Thy  hand  of  grace  in  mercy,  I  am 
lost,  O  Arunachala!" 

"Unlovable  I  am  to  look  at  now,  yet  ornament  me  with 
Thy  grace  and  then  regard  me,  O  Arunachala!" 

"Thou  hast  administered  the  drug  of  confusion  to  me,  so 
must  I  be  confounded!  Shine  Thou  as  grace,  the  cure  of  all 
confusion,  O  Arunachala!" 

"Lord!  Who  art  Consciousness  itself  reigning  over  the 
sublime  Sonagiri,  forgive  the  grievous  wrongs  of  this  poor  self, 
and  by  Thy  gracious  glance  benignant  as  the  rain  cloud,  save 
me  from  being  lost  once  more  in  the  dreary  waste,  or  else  I 
cannot  ford  the  grim  (stream  of  universal)  manifestation." 

"Lord!  Deign  to  ease  me  in  my  weariness  struggling  like  a 
deer  that  is  trapped.  Lord  Arunachala!  What  can  be  Thy  will?" 

"O  pure  One!  If  the  five  elements,  the  living  beings  and 
every  manifest  thing  is  nothing  but  Thy  all-embracing  light, 
how  then  can  I  alone  be  separate  from  Thee  ..." 

Bhagavan  has  given  many  indications  of  his  continued 
presence.  Ever-present,  all-pervading,  where  could  he  go? 
Outwardly  manifested  and  visible  as  the  Hill,  he  will  remain 
here  always,  guiding  as  before.  "Only  the  body  travels  the  Self 
just  is",  Bhagavan  used  to  say.  His  body  travelled  and  disappeared. 
He  just  is  as  he  always  has  been  and  the  visible  support  of  grace 
is  Arunachala.  It  is  a  great  blessing  to  be  able  to  come  here,  to 


9 


stay  here.  After  many  years,  every  day  still  seems  like  a  gift. 
One  cannot  help  feeling  the  living  presence,  radiation  and 
powerful  spiritual  help  accorded  to  those  who  seek  it,  and  above 
all  are  humble  enough  to  surrender  to  this  influence  of  faith! 

"The  Hill  which  draws  to  itself  those  who  are  rich  mjnana 
tapas  (those  who  are  ever  intent  on  gaining  wisdom)  is  this 
Arunachala"  (AnnamalaiVenba). 


10 


Arunachala's  True 

Shape 

Aouarius 

From  every  angle  Arunachala presents  a  different  aspect. 
But  the  Sivalinga,  representing  the  Hill,  symbolises  its  true 
shape,  that  of  the  formless  including  all  forms. 

A  RUNACH ALA  IS  RAMANA.  Every  true  devotee  of  Sri 
ijL  Bhagavan  comes  to  feel  this  to  be  true.  Arunachala  is  an 
insentient  Hill  while  Sri  Ramana  was  a  sentient  human  being. 
How  could  they  be  the  same,  we  ask,  except  perhaps  in  a 
metaphysical  sense?  But  do  we  know  what  Arunachala  is  like 
even  in  the  physical  sense? 

I  approach  Arunachala  generally  by  bus  from  the  east  as  I 
come  to  Tiruvannamalai  from  Madras.  Arunachala  becomes 
visible  from  about  ten  miles  away.  At  first  it  is  only  a  vague 
cloudlike  shape  but  as  I  come  nearer  it  becomes  clearer.  It 
assumes  the  form  of  an  irregular  cone  somewhat  longish  at  the 
base  with  a  curved  spur  on  its  northern  side. 

This  shape  lasts  only  until  I  come  to  the  temple  of 
Arunachaleswara.  It  changes  gradually  when  I  proceed  to  the  Ashram 
and  finally  when  I  reach  the  Ashram  it  assumes  the  beautiful  shape 
which  is  familiar  to  all  devotees  of  Sri  Bhagavan.  It  reminds  me  of 
Mount  Kailas  as  it  looks  in  the  familiar  photographs  of  that  sacred 
mountain.  Others  have  also  noticed  this  resemblance. 


11 


I  have  seen  Arunachala  not  only  from  these  two  angles 
but  also  from  numerous  other  angles  too.  While  going  round 
the  Hill  on  the  holy  circuit  it  looks  different  from  each  spot. 

Names  like  the  'five-faced  Arunachala  and  the  'four-faced 
Arunachala  have  been  given  to  those  aspects  in  which  it  appears 
to  possess  five  peaks  or  four  peaks.  When  one  comes  to  the 
northern  side  the  appearance  changes  completely.  It  becomes 
more  rugged  and  massive.  Arunachala  has  many  faces  and  many 
shapes.  From  every  angle  it  presents  a  different  aspect,  reminding 
us  of  the  ever  changing  flux  of  creation,  the  motionless  dance 
of  Arunachala-Siva  whose  unity  penetrates  all  diversity! 

Every  true  devotee  of  Siva  believes  that  Arunachala,  the 
Hill,  is  Siva  himself  or  a  huge  Siva  linga  in  the  form  of  the  Hill. 
The  puranas  elaborate  this.  That  is  why  one  walks  round  it 
barefoot  reverently  all  the  eight  miles  of  the  way.  Siva  linga  is 
simply  an  emblem  of  Siva,  in  its  manifest  form  as  the  Hill  and 
the  linga  of  fire  without  beginning  or  end,  as  mentioned  in  the 
well  known  story  of  its  first  appearance,  symbolises  its 
unmanifest  transcendence.  Thus  Siva  is  rupa  (with  form)  and 
arupa  (without  form).  He  has  many  forms  and  at  the  same  time 
can  reveal  himself  as  formless. 

"When  I  approach  regarding  Thee  as  having  form,  Thou 
standest  as  a  Hill  on  earth.  If  (with  the  mind)  the  seeker  looks 
for  Thy  (essential)  form  as  formless,  he  is  like  one  who  travels 
the  earth  to  see  the  (ever-present)  ether.  To  dwell  without  thought 
upon  Thy  (boundless)  nature  is  to  lose  one  s  (separate)  identity 
like  a  doll  of  sugar  when  it  comes  in  contact  with  the  ocean  (of 
nectar)  and  when  I  come  to  realize  who  I  am,  what  else  is  this 
identity  of  mine  (but  Thee),  O  Thou  Who  standest  as  the 
towering  Aruna  Hill?"1 

1  Arunachala  Ashtakam,  verse  3. 


12 


The  Cult  of  the  Hill 


Kenneth  Grant 

OF  THE  OUTER  symbol  of  Sri  Arunachala  on  earth,  Lord 
Siva  says,  "Meditate  on  the  fact  that  in  the  heart  of  the  Hill 
surges  the  spiritual  glory,  within  which  the  whole  world  is  contained." 

It  is  in  fact  this  holy  Hill  —  the  Mount  Kailas  of  the  south 
and  the  very  embodiment  of  Siva  —  that  is  the  manifest  and 
visible  guru  of  Bhagavan  Sri  Ramana  Maharshi. 

It  behoves  us  therefore  to  remember,  that  now  the  beloved 
master  is  not  with  us  any  more  in  the  fleshy  garments  of  frail 
humanity,  this  holy  guru  is  nonetheless  visible  and  accessible  to 
all  those  whose  eyes  are  opened  to  the  spiritual  glories  which 
Siva  describes  as  surging  within  its  mysterious  heart. 

Here  is  the  tangible  focus  of  that  tremendous  spiritual 
energy,  which  burned  with  unabated  strength  in  the  form  of 
Ramana;  thus  is  this  symbol  supremely  sanctified  for  us  today 
by  the  certainty  of  liberation,  which  Bhagavan  himself  taught 
was  the  reward  of  the  unflinching  surrender  of  the  ego  in  the 
flames  of  its  all  consuming  embrace. 

Those  who  feel  disturbed  within  themselves  at  the  great 
loss  of  the  body  of  Bhagavan,  should  instantly  direct  their  minds 
to  the  contemplation  of  the  'Hill  of  the  Holy  Beacon',  which 
—  Bhagavan  has  told  us  —  only  waits  to  respond  eagerly  and 
tenderly  to  even  our  weakest  yearnings  towards  It. 


13 


In  his  article  called  'Physical  Supports  of  Grace',  Arthur 
Osborne  says  that  the  Hill  called  Arunachala  is  verily  the  greatest 
of  physical  supports,  for  did  it  not  bear  upon  its  sacred  surface 
the  earthly  tabernacle  which  was  the  physical  form  of  Bhagavan? 

Yet  for  those  who  are  unable  to  live  within  sight  of  the 
earthly  Arunachala,  there  need  be  no  regrets,  for  the  Hill  itself 
is  but  a  thought-construction  same  as  any  other.  If  we  would 
grasp  the  inner  significance  veiled  by  the  'dull',  outer  form  of 
its  simple  contours,  we  must  search  within  the  heart,  and  establish 
contact  with  that  regionless  bliss,  void  of  all  conceptions  which 
the  mind  is  capable  of  formulating.  For  Arunachala  is  the  symbol 
of  the  void  nature  of  the  Self  manifesting  in  so  simple  a  shape 
as  the  'Hill  of  the  Holy  Beacon . 

This  is  the  form  of  Ramana,  which  lasts  longer  than  the 
human  garment  that  he  wore  for  our  sake.  But  as  long  as  the 
world  appearance  lasts  for  each  aspirant,  so  will  endure  the  Hill, 
to  symbolise  to  us  the  perfect  void,  the  all  full  Self  that  lies  as 
the  heart  in  the  spaceless  and  timeless  eternity. 

Sri  Ramakrishna  Paramahamsa  said, 

"Is  Kali,  my  divine  mother,  of  a  black  complexion?  She 
appears  black  because  she  is  viewed  from  a  distance,  but  when 
intimately  known  she  is  no  longer  so.  The  sky  appears  blue  at  a 
distance  but  look  at  it  close  by  and  you  will  find  that  it  has  no 
colour.  The  water  of  the  ocean  looks  blue  at  a  distance,  but 
when  you  go  near  and  take  it  in  your  hand,  you  find  that  it  is 
colourless." 

And  so  it  is  with  the  'Hill  of  the  Holy  Beacon ;  go  near  to  it 
in  spirit  and  it  is  without  shape,  without  colour,  without  attributes 
of  any  kind.  It  is  only  distance  which  lends  it  the  illusory  qualities 
it  seems  to  possess.  Really,  we  impress  the  void  —  It  essentially  is 
with  the  attributes  we  seem  ourselves  to  possess  and  then  we 


14 


imagine  seeing  what  is  not  truly  there.  Thus  it  is  our  attributes 
we  have  to  slough  if  we  would  come  close  to  the  sacred  symbol 
and  know  its  real  significance,  and  our  everyday  life  can  help  us 
insofar  as  we  regard  all  things  that  occur  to  us  in  a  new  light. 
For  instance,  instead  of  viewing  circumstances  and  conditions 
as  isolated  phenomena  occurring  to  us  for  no  reason  at  all,  we 
should  strive  to  regard  each  event  as  a  stone  upon  the  slopes  of 
Arunachala;  each  trivial  repetition  of  which  event  constitutes  at 
last  that  sacred  mount  of  the  spirit'  which  is  our  true  nature. 
Thus  we  can  worship  Sri  Bhagavan  in  and  through  our  ordinary 
mundane  life.  It  is  merely  a  matter  of  re-orientation  and 
determination  to  accept  as  deeply  significant  in  a  spiritual  way 
all  the  seemingly  trite  and  disconnected  incidents  which 
constantly  occur  to  us.  Yet  is  this  but  a  preliminary  to  the  final 
process  of  knowing  Truth  as  it  really  is?  For  when  Arunachala 
has  been  thus  truly  built  into  the  fabric  of  our  hearts,  we  shall 
need  to  view  each  separate  part  no  longer  as  a  separate  stone  of 
the  divine  edifice,  but  as  the  structure  entire  in  its  sublimely 
simple  shape  of  the  'holy  Hill'.  And  then,  entering  into  the 
heart  thereof  with  understanding,  we  shall  know  the  whole  as 
the  embodiment  of  that  spirit  of  grace  and  compassion  which 
eternally  enlightens  our  hearts. 

In  this  way  it  is  possible  for  the  less  advanced  of  us  to 
perform  a  spiritual  discipline  while  living  in  the  world  even 
though  far  removed  from  the  outer  symbol  of  divine  grace 
in  Tiruvannamalai. 

It  is  only  when  we  realise  that  it  is  we  who  clothe  the 
formless  Arunachala  with  form,  because  we  view  it  with  the 
eyes  of  the  body,  that  we  shall  begin  to  search  within  our  hearts 
for  the  formless  Reality  which  that  form  veils.  Until  then,  we 
shall  not  penetrate  and  comprehend  this  miracle,  nor  shall  we 


15 


understand  why  Bhagavan  Sri  Ramana  made  no  difference 
between  his  human  form  and  his  Hill  form.  It  is  the  guru  in 
hill  form  who  is  an  everlasting  beacon  of  hope  for  those  who 
inhabit  the  earth  (or  body).  As  soon  as  the  body  is  dissolved 
into  a  shining  mist,  so  also  does  the  guru  s  Hill  form  dissolve, 
and  we  are  no  longer  deluded  by  other  concepts  such  as  our 
own  form  or  the  Hill  form  —  for  these  twain  are  no  more. 
The  underlying  Reality  shines  forth  as  the  pure  and  perfect 
void,  conceptless  and  ever  blissful. 

As  an  aid  to  the  realisation  of  this,  it  may  help  the  devotee 
—  if  he  be  remote  from  the  physical  sight  of  the  Hill  —  to 
create  a  mental  picture  thereof  and  endeavour  through  such  a 
mandala  to  pervade  the  Hill  and  become  one  with  it.  Certain 
physical  supports,  such  as  a  mound  of  actual  stones  taken  from 
the  Hill  itself,  may  further  the  project  and  intensify  the 
concentration,  and  also  link  the  devotee  in  some  subtle  manner 
with  the  focus  of  spiritual  peace  abiding  in  Tiruvannamalai. 

Yet  all  this  is  of  no  avail  if  it  be  not  always  borne  in  mind 
that  these  accessories  are  but  props  for  exalting  the 
consciousness  to  the  pitch  necessary  for  contacting  the  subtle 
emanations  of  grace,  which  spring  from  the  spaceless 
Arunachala  Siva,  whose  eternal  abode  is  the  Heart.  For,  all 
takes  place  in,  and  is  supported  by,  the  void,  of  which  the  Hill 
itself  is  the  perfect  and  singular  symbol. 


eg  so 


PART  II 

On  Bhagavan 


19 


Sab  Jan,  Sri  Maharshi's 

Classmate 

"SEIN" 

BHAGAVAN  SRI  RAMANA  MAHARSHI  emphasised 
several  times  that  the  holy  Hill  Arunachala  is  the  heart  of 
the  world  and  the  most  ancient  and  oldest  of  hills.  He  also  used 
to  say  that  it  is  a  natural  Sri  Chakra  and  that  from  each  angle  it 
has  a  different  appearance.  That  is  why  it  is  a  Siva  linga  with 
form  and  without  form.  From  every  direction  it  presents  itself 
in  a  different  majestic  posture. 

And  so  also  I  always  like  to  see  Sri  Maharshi  from  different 
angles  and  enjoy  the  differences  in  his  appearances!  In  respect 
of  his  teachings,  movements  in  the  Ashram,  like  assisting  in  the 
kitchen,  catering  to  the  needs  of  devotees  and  even  dumb 
animals,  devotees  know  Bhagavan  to  be  more  as  one's  own  father 
and  mother  and  God  incarnate,  than  as  Tatwama  Sivaroopa. 
His  greatness  as  an  intimate  friend  of  a  classmate  of  his  is 
portrayed  here  truly  revealing  his  loving  heart. 

When  young  Venkataraman  (of  Tiruchuzhi)  was  reading 
in  Madurai  in  the  American  Mission  High  School,  in  his  4th, 
5th  and  6th  forms,  he  was  closely  associated  with  one  Muslim 
boy,  whom  he  chose  as  his  intimate  friend.  Venkataraman  was 
very  fond  of  this  young  Muslim,  whom  he  addressed  as  Sab 
Jan.  His  real  name  is  M.  Abdul  Wahab. 


20 


Mr.  Wahab,  now  a  retired  police  inspector,  nearing  eighty, 
unable  to  see  or  hear  properly,  is  living  with  his  son  at  Neyveli. 
Upon  hearing  this,  I  went  there  to  meet  with  him.  He  welcomed 
me  very  kindly  and  I  was  amazed  at  the  serenity  of  his  face.  I 
requested  him  to  tell  me  something  about  Bhagavan  in  his  school 
days.  His  talks  on  the  Maharshi  gave  me  a  thrilling  experience 
and  enabled  me  to  visualise  with  the  mind  s  eye,  the  intimate 
friendship  that  he  enjoyed  with  Venkataraman,  later  to  be  known 
as  the  great  Sri  Ramana  Maharshi. 

When  I  asked  him  to  describe  the  depth  of  their  friendship, 
Mr.  Wahab  recalled  his  happy  past  and  jumped  with  joy  saying, 
"We  were  inseparable  mates."  This  Muslim  enjoyed  such  privilege 
with  young  Venkataraman.  He  began  to  tell  me  of  his  past  happy 
days  that  he  was  fortunate  enough  to  spend  with  him. 

"Venkataraman  was  very  learned  in  Tamil  and  he  stood 
first  in  the  class.  When  the  teacher  wanted  to  refer  to  some 
portion  in  the  text  book  he  used  to  ask  Venkataraman  to  quote 
and  Venkataraman  used  to  do  it  with  remarkable  clarity.  He 
was  particularly  well-versed  in  Nannool  Soothram  (Aphorisms 
of  Tamil  Grammar).  Our  Tamil  Pandit,  Mr.  John  Balakrishnan, 
was  very  fond  of  him.  His  knowledge  of  Tamil  was  really 
remarkable  and  that  of  Tamil  Grammar  very  exact. 

"But  Venkataraman  was  not  very  good  in  English,  in  the 
sense  that  he  was  not  an  expert  in  that  subject.  In  other  subjects 
also  he  was  above  average.  But  in  general,  he  was  not  much 
interested  in  his  school  books.  He  was  very  fond  of  playing 
games  and  among  games  he  was  an  expert  in  football.  He  used 
to  encourage  me  to  join  him  in  playing  the  game,  saying  that 
he  would  teach  me  how  to  play.  We  used  to  play  together  in  the 
same  team  and  I  was  particular  only  to  be  with  Venkataraman. 
As  was  usual  in  those  days,  in  Brahmin  families  they  did  not 


21 


encourage  the  boys  taking  part  in  games,  so  Venkataraman's 
relatives  did  not  like  his  playing  games. 

"Once  when  we  were  playing  football,  Venkataraman, 
while  defending  against  the  attacks  of  the  opposing  players, 
received  a  severe  knock  on  his  right  leg,  which  immediately  got 
swollen.  He  was  frightened  and  had  to  return  home  and  I  carried 
him  to  a  hospital  and  had  some  medicine  applied  and  brought 
his  leg  to  normal  condition.  He  was  very  happy  and  thanked 
me  for  the  timely  help. 

"Even  as  a  student  he  was  very  religious.  Every  Saturday 
and  Sunday  he  would  go  to  Tiruparankunram  and  go  round 
the  Subramania  Swamy  Temple  with  fervent  religious  ecstasy. 
He  used  to  take  me  several  times  with  him  and  make  me  go 
around  the  temple  saying,  'Gods  creation  is  alike  and  there  is 
no  difference  in  creation.  God  is  the  same,  the  apparent 
differences  in  Gods  are  created  by  man'.  In  the  company  of 
Venkataraman  I  never  felt  any  difference  between  a  mosque 
and  the  Subramania  Swamy  temple. 

"This  instruction  of  his  really  implanted  in  me  a  better 
understanding  of  the  secret  approach  to  religion  and  thenceforth 
I  never  felt  any  difference  between  a  Hindu  God  and  any  other 
God.  It  is  quite  possible,  in  fact,  I  am  very  certain,  that  because 
of  such  an  universal  outlook  implanted  in  me  by  Venkataraman 
in  those  days,  in  my  later  days  I  could  become  an  ardent  devotee 
of  Sri  Varadaraja  Perumal  of  Kancheepuram,  who  actually 
enveloped  me  in  his  divine  rapture.  I  had  visions  of  Varadaraja 
Perumal  in  dreams  and  they  proved  to  be  of  great  help  to  me." 

When  I  asked  him  in  what  manner,  he  said,  "For  12  years 
I  was  able  to  partake  actively  in  the  Garuda  seva  of  Sri  Varadaraja 
Perumal  by  giving  a  shoulder  to  lift  the  deity  of  Perumal,  while 
going  in  procession  in  the  streets  of  Kancheepuram,  which  I 


22 


regard  even  today  as  the  greatest  privilege  and  boon.  There 
arose  some  complication  also  since  some  Vaishnavites  objected 
to  my  carrying  the  deity  since  I  was  a  Muslim  and  that  was 
settled  amicably  later.  This  service  of  12  years  to  Varadaraja 
Perumal  made  me  cling  to  him  closer  and  closer. 

"Once  when  I  was  on  duty  in  Kuppam  I  received  a 
telegram  that  my  wife,  of  whom  I  was  extremely  fond,  had  had 
an  abortion  and  I  was  greatly  worried  that  she  would  die.  The 
same  night  Sri  Varadaraja  Perumal  appeared  in  my  dream  and 
assured  me  that  my  wife  was  all  right  and  I  need  not  worry. 
When  I  returned  to  Tirupathur  she  was  in  normal  condition. 
Her  recovery  was  the  grace  of  Sri  Perumal." 

Mr.  Wahab  then  spoke  about  Venkataraman: 

"Suddenly  Venkataraman  disappeared  and  it  was  a  shock 
to  me  that  he  did  not  even  tell  me  about  his  running  away 
from  his  home.  His  disappearance  made  his  mother  terribly 
sorrow-stricken.  While  I  refer  to  his  home  and  his  mother,  1 
can  not  but  mention  the  kindness  and  love  with  which  mother 
Alagammal  used  to  receive  me. 

"Some  Saturdays  and  Sundays  he  would  go  to  Tiruchuzhi 
to  be  with  his  mother  and  kith  and  kin.  I  would  also  go  there 
to  see  him.  Mother  Alagammal  would  immediately,  with  all 
affection,  tell  Venkataraman  of  my  arrival  saying,  'Your  dear 
Muslim  friend  has  come.'  She  had  a  wonderful  face  beaming 
with  nobility.  Every  time  she  gave  me  a  very  good  reception 
and  used  to  give  me  whatever  eatables  were  prepared  at  home. 
If  by  chance  1  did  not  turn  up  for  one  weekend,  she  used  to 
enquire  about  my  absence  and  give  Venkataraman  the  eatables 
saying:  'Give  these  to  your  Muslim  friend'.  I  could  never  forget 
the  maternal  love  of  Alagammal  and  her  kindness  to  me,  even 
though  I  was  a  Muslim."  (Muslims  were  regarded  by  caste 


23 


Brahmins  as  untouchables  in  those  days.  They  were  despised 
and  treated  with  contempt.) 

I  asked  Sab  Jan,  "When  did  you  know  of  the  whereabouts 
of  Sri  Maharshi?" 

He  said,  "I  was  enlisted  in  the  police  department  and  in 
1903  in  one  of  the  medical  shops  at  Uttaramerur,  I  was  surprised 
to  see  a  portrait  of  Venkataraman  but  completely  different  in 
appearance.  I  was  anxious  to  know  how  the  shop  man  happened 
to  possess  the  photo  of  my  classmate.  Then  I  was  told  that  this 
was  the  'Brahamana  Swamy'  living  in  Tiruvannamalai  and  that 
the  Swamy  was  in  mounam  then. 

"I  was  very  eager  to  meet  Venkataraman  and  at  last  after 
several  months  of  strenuous  efforts,  I  was  able  to  come  to  Sri 
Ramanasramam,  the  abode  of  Sri  Maharshi,  my  dear  friend  of 
those  earlier  days.  I  entered  it  and  was  taken  in  by  a  cowherd 
woman  who  was  supplying  milk  to  Bhagavan.  I  introduced  myself 
as  his  classmate  'Sab  Jan  (but  his  facial  expression  clearly  showed 
that  he  had  at  once  recognised  me  and  that  my  introduction  was 
not  at  all  necessary)  and  he  was  pleased  to  receive  me  although  he 
did  not  speak.  He  simply  nodded  his  head  with  a  radiant  face.  I 
was  thrilled  to  meet  my  classmate  as  a  swamy  for  he  was  all  the 
more  beautiful  and  resplendent,  with  a  mark  of  saintliness. 

"Again,  I  went  there  when  I  was  the  Inspector  of  Police  at 
Tirupathur.  I  was  very  sad  then,  since  my  father  had  passed  away 
but  Bhagavan  showed  me  his  mother's  tomb,  which  consoled 
me.  I  understood  from  Bhagavans  action  that  death  is  inevitable 
as  far  as  the  body  is  concerned  and  that  no  one  was  ever  born  or 
died.  He  was  so  kind  and  offered  something  to  eat  and  asked  me 
to  stay  for  a  couple  of  days  but  I  could  not,  since  I  was  on  duty. 
After  that  I  went  to  see  him  several  times  and  on  all  occasions  he 
showed  special  attention  to  me  and  introduced  me  to  whoever 


24 


was  present  on  the  occasion  with  deep  love  and  kindness.  He 
used  to  make  me  sit  by  his  side  while  taking  food  in  the  dining 
hall,  which  later  I  came  to  know  was  quite  unusual  with  him. 

"A  sudden  change  took  place  in  me.  I  was  transformed 
into  a  devotee  of  Bhagavan  from  being  a  friend  of 
Venkataraman.  This  inward  change  brought  about  by  Sri 
Maharshi  is  the  greatest  boon  he  has  showered  on  me.  He  showed 
his  greatness  once  through  a  dream  in  which  he  showed  signs  of 
my  wife  passing  away  and  in  a  mysterious  way  consoled  me  and 
prepared  me  for  the  shocking  incident.  It  did  take  place  very 
soon  and  my  beloved  wife  passed  away  as  predicted  and  by  the 
grace  of  Sri  Maharshi  it  did  not  affect  me  very  much.  This 
attitude  of  detachment  is  itself  the  grace  of  Bhagavan. 

"In  1950,  on  1 4th  April,  the  memorable  day  of  his  Brahma 
Nirvana,  it  so  happened  that  even  though  it  would  have  been 
absolutely  impossible  for  me  to  come  to  Tiruvannamalai,  as  I 
was  on  duty  at  a  place  far  away,  I  had  the  opportunity  of  visiting 
the  Ashram.  In  the  day  time  I  could  not  take  my  food  due  to 
lack  of  time  during  travel  to  go  to  a  hotel  and  take  food. 

"I  paid  my  homage  to  my  friend  and  guru  who  left  his  mortal 
coil  that  night,  but  whose  presence  still  pervaded  his  abode.  I  was 
in  deep  mourning.  Then  someone  asked  me  to  take  food  since  I 
looked  fatigued  and  tired  and  it  was  late  in  the  night.  I  flady  refused 
saying, '  1  am  going  to  fast  the  whole  day  as  an  act  of  reverence  and 
homage  to  my  intimate  friend  and  revered  guru."' 

I  thanked  Mr.  Wahab  and  took  leave  of  him  with  great 
reverence  as  the  classmate  of  Bhagavan  who  did  not  stop  at  being 
a  classmate  but  went  further  and  understood  Venkataraman  as 
Bhagavan  Sri  Ramana  Maharshi,  the  Maha  Guru.  * 


*  Sri  Wahab  has  passed  away  since  the  article  was  written. 


25 


Krishnaprem  and 
Maharshi 

Marie  B.  Byles 

(An  English  professor  in  the  purvasrama,  Sri  Krishnaprem 
was  an  orthodox  devotee  of  Krishna  and  as  such  had  no  intention 
to  follow  Self  Enquiry.  Yet  he  had  a  striking  experience  of  the 
significance  of  the  question,  'Who  am  I?',  when  he  visited 
Bhagavan  for  his  blessings.) 

SRI  KRISHNAPREM,  formerly  Professor  Ronald  Nixon 
from  Cambridge  in  England,  had  taught  literature  at 
Varanasi  and  Lucknow  universities  before  he  gave  up  the  life  of 
the  world,  donned  the  gerua  robes  and  became  a  sannyasin.  He 
took  as  his  guru  the  saintly  woman  Yashoda  Mai  who  had  been 
a  leader  of  Indian  social  life  before  she  became  a  sannyasini  and 
established  an  ashram  at  Mirtola,  about  eighteen  miles  from 
Almora  in  the  Himalayas.  Here  Krishnaprem  took  up  his  abode, 
soon  performing  the  Vaishnava  rituals  in  the  temple,  and,  when 
the  Brahmin  cook  left,  doing  the  cooking  also.  When  Yashoda 
Mai  died  in  1945  he  was  left  in  charge  of  the  ashram,  though  he 
handed  over  the  management  to  another  in  1955,  ten  years 
before  his  own  death. 

He  was  an  orthodox  Vaishnava  and  worshipper  of  Lord 
Krishna,  that  is,  of  the  personal  aspect  of  the  Supreme,  and  the 


26 


last  thing  that  would  have  entered  his  head  would  have  been  to 
find  his  goal  through  asking  the  question,  'Who  am  I?'  However 
he  regarded  Maharshi  as  a  living  shining  light  of  India  and 
because  of  this  in  1948,  he  made  the  long  journey  from  Almora 
to  the  south  to  receive  his  blessing.  The  story  of  his  visit  is  told 
by  his  friend,  Dilip  Kumar  Roy,  in  his  book  about  him.  And  as 
I  do  not  seem  to  remember  having  read  about  this  visit 
elsewhere,  others  may  find  it  as  illuminating  as  I  do. 

He  entered  the  room  where  Maharshi  was  reclining  with 
devotees  before  him,  and  sat  down  among  them  to  meditate. 
As  soon  as  he  did  so,  he  heard  a  voice  saying  over  and  over 
again,  'Who  are  you?  Who  are  you?  Who  are  you?'  He  tried  to 
ignore  it  but  eventually  he  replied  silently,  'I  am  Krishna's 
servant.'  The  voice  still  went  on  relentlessly.  The  question 
changed  to,  'Who  was  Krishna?'  He  answered,  'Nanda's  son', 
and  formulated  various  other  answers,  'He  is  an  Avatar,  the 
One-in-all,  the  resident  in  every  heart'.  The  voice  continued 
asking  the  former  question.  He  became  very  disturbed,  and 
finally  he  rose  and  left  the  room.  He  returned  and  the  voice 
continued  as  before.  Silently  he  prayed  to  Radha  for  guidance, 
but  she  shook  her  head.  Then  the  answer  was  revealed,  but  how 
we  are  not  told! 

In  the  morning  he  again  sat  down  with  the  other  devotees. 
Maharshi  gave  him  a  lightning  glance  and  smiled  at  him.  He 
closed  his  eyes,  then  on  a  sudden  impulse  he  found  himself 
silently  asking  Maharshi  his  own  question,  'Who  are  you?' 
Something  made  him  open  his  eyes.  Maharshi's  couch  was  empty, 
there  was  no  Maharshi  on  it.  He  closed  his  eyes  again  but  in  a 
moment  opened  them.  Maharshi  was  reclining  in  his  usual  place 
and  he  gave  a  fleeting  smile  and  meaningful  glance,  after  which 
he  looked  away.  Maharshi  did  not  ask  Krishnaprem  to  cease 


27 


from  worshipping  Lord  Krishna  and  surrendering  all  to  him. 
He  never  did  this,  there  are  different  ways  for  different 
temperaments.  Some  will  perhaps  be  more  direct  than  others, 
but  in  the  end  all  will  find  the  same  answer,  and  that  vacant 
couch  gives  the  answer  better  than  all. 

And  this  is  what  I  was  taught  when  invisible  cords  drew 
me  to  the  Maha  Bodhi  Meditation  Centre  near  Mandalay  in 
Burma.  I  was  told  there,  that  many  are  the  ways  of  learning 
Vipasana  or  insight  meditation,  but  that  all  end  up  with  the 
experience  of  phyit pyet  (come-  go  or  ceaseless  change)  or  the 
end  of  T  and  mine'  and  'me'  —  you  are  not  the  worrying 
thoughts  that  disturb  you,  you  are  not  the  mind,  you  are  not 
the  body.  What  are  you  then?  phyit  pyet.  Whatever  is  your  way 
or  my  way,  it  is  always  helpful  to  understand  and  appreciate  the 
ways  of  others,  as  for  example  that  of  Krishnaprem,  who  found 
that  ultimately  all  faded  away  and  there  was  only  Krishna. 


28 

A  Perfect  Image 
of  the  Life  Divine 

K.  Ramachandra 

SAINTS  AND  SAGES  are  the  salt  of  the  earth.  They  are  the 
saviours  of  humanity.  They  are  the  sustainers  of  society.  Philo 
remarks,  "Households,  cities,  countries  and  nations  have  enjoyed 
great  happiness,  when  a  single  individual  has  taken  heed  of  the 
good  and  beautiful.  Such  men  not  only  liberate  themselves, 
they  fill  those  they  meet  with  a  free  mind." 

In  all  sects  of  Hinduism,  the  worship  of  saints  and  sages 
forms  an  important  feature.  In  the  galaxy  of  spiritual  giants  of 
modern  India,  a  great  Sage  answering  to  the  description  of  Philo 
in  a  supreme  way  is  Bhagavan  Sri  Ramana,  popularly  known  to 
the  world  as  'Maharshi'.  He  stayed  at  Tiruvannamalai  in  South 
India  for  over  fifty  four  years  and  attained  Mahasamadhi  in 
April  1950. 

His  teachings  have  a  unique  appeal  to  thinkers  of  both 
east  and  west.  He  was  considered  as  the  living  embodiment  of 
God-centred  life,  a  perfect  image  of  the  life  divine  in  the  mirror 
of  human  existence.  In  the  words  of  the  world-renowned 
psychoanalyst,  Dr.  Carl  Jung,  "Sri  Ramana  is  a  true  son  of  the 
Indian  earth.  He  is  genuine,  and  in  addition  to  that,  something 
quite  phenomenal.  In  India,  he  is  the  whitest  spot  in  a 
white  space." 


29 


The  Maharshi  was  not  one  of  those  teachers  who  tried  to 
make  an  impression  on  his  devotees  and  others  by  mystifying 
matters.  Nor  did  he  utilise  any  of  the  psychic  powers  to  attract 
the  curiosity-seekers  and  miracle-mongers.  His  method  was 
direct.  He  disclosed  the  truth  in  the  simplest  possible  language, 
as  realised  and  lived  by  him.  He  spoke  very  little,  but  in  his 
look  there  was  not  only  love  and  compassion,  but  a  subtle 
spiritual  vibration  which  went  deeper  into  the  heart  of  the  visitor. 

He  regarded  nothing  as  alien,  none  as  other,  no  event  as 
undesirable.  He  thought  of  others  in  the  same  way  as  he  thought 
of  himself.  Love  and  love  alone  influenced  his  relationship  with 
others.  His  teaching  through  mouna  or  silence  was  difficult  to 
be  understood  by  the  average  person.  Once  a  visitor  from  the 
west  put  the  question  to  him  as  to  why  he  was  staying  at  one 
spot  for  years  together,  without  moving  about  and  preaching 
to  people  the  truth  he  had  realised.  The  Maharshi  gave  his 
characteristic  reply  as  follows: 

"How  do  you  know  that  I  am  not  doing  it?  Does  preaching 
consist  in  mounting  a  platform  and  haranguing  the  people 
around?  Preaching  is  simple  communication  of  knowledge.  It 
can  really  be  done  in  silence  only.  What  do  you  think  of  a  man 
who  listens  to  a  sermon  for  an  hour  and  goes  away  without 
having  been  impressed  by  it,  so  as  to  change  his  life?  Compare 
him  with  another  who  sits  near  a  holy  presence  and  goes  after 
some  time  with  his  outlook  on  life  totally  changed.  Which  is 
better,  to  preach  loudly  without  effect  or  to  sit  silently  sending 
out  inner  force?"  On  another  occasion,  answering  a  similar 
question  by  an  Indian  devotee,  he  remarked, 

"  Vivekananda  was  perfectly  right  when  he  said  that  if  you 
thought  a  good  thought  in  a  cave  it  would  have  repercussions 
on  the  whole  world." 


30 


So,  let  us  meditate  in  silence  on  Bhagavan  Sri  Ramana. 
Though  he  has  given  up  his  physical  body,  his  presence  is  felt  by 
thousands  as  before.  It  is  not  confined  to  Tiruvannamalai.  It 
never  was.  But  the  hall  where  he  sat  for  years  has  a  special 
attraction.  Visitors  come  there  even  today  from  the  four  corners 
of  the  globe. 


31 


A  Talk  with 
Sri  Ramana  Maharshi 

Pryns  Hopkins 

IN  AS  MUCH  AS  India  is  notoriously  the  most 
metaphysically  minded  of  all  countries,  it  was  natural  that  I 
should  seek  discussions  in  this  field. 

Ever  since  I  had  read  Paul  Bruntons  A  Search  in  Secret 
India,  I  had  been  keen  to  visit  Ramana  Maharshi,  the  sage  whom 
Brunton  found  most  impressive  of  all  those  he  sought  out.  Soon 
after  my  arrival  at  his  Ashram,  I  bade  one  of  the  two  men  who 
mainly  ministered  to  him  to  inquire  whether  I  might  ask  two 
questions.  Accordingly,  I  was  requested  to  take  my  seat  in  front 
of  the  group  of  visitors  and  an  interpreter  sat  next  to  me 
(although  Maharshi  usually  gets  queries  directly  through  English) 
and  was  invited  to  present  my  question. 

The  first  of  these  questions  was:  "If  it  is  true  that  all  the 
objective  world  owes  its  existence  to  the  ego,  then  how  can  that 
ego  ever  have  the  experience  of  surprise  as  it  does,  for  example, 
when  we  stub  our  toe  on  an  unseen  obstacle?" 

Sri  Bhagavan  answered,  that  the  ego  is  not  to  be  thought  of 
as  antecedent  to  the  world  of  phenomena,  but  that  both  rise  or 
fall  together.  Neither  is  more  real  than  the  other,  only  the  non- 
empirical  Self  is  more  real.  By  reflecting  on  the  true  nature  of  the 
Self,  one  comes  at  length  to  undermine  the  ego  and  at  the  same 


32 


time,  material  obstacle  and  stubbed  toe  are  equally  unreal  and  to 
dwell  in  the  true  reality  which  is  beyond  them  all.' 

He  then  went  on  to  outline  that  we  only  know  the  object 
at  all  through  sensations  derived  from  it  remotely.  Moreover, 
that  physicists  had  now  shown  that  in  place  of  what  we  thought 
to  be  a  solid  object  there  are  only  dancing  electrons  and  protons. 

I  replied  that  while  we  had,  indeed,  direct  knowledge  only 
of  sensations,  we  know  less,  for  all  that  knowledge  about  the 
objects  which  gave  rise  to  the  sensations,  about  which  knowledge 
was  checked  continually  by  making  predictions,  acting  on  them 
and  seeing  them  verified  or  disproved.  Furthermore  (here  I  went 
on  to  my  second  query),  "If  the  outer  phenomena  which  I  think 
I  perceive  have  no  reality  apart  from  my  ego,  how  is  it  that 
someone  else  also  perceived  them?  For  example  not  only  do  I 
lift  my  foot  higher  to  avoid  tripping  over  that  stool  yonder,  but 
you  also  raise  your  foot  higher  to  avoid  tripping  over  it  too.  Is 
it  by  a  mere  coincidence  that  each  of  us  independently  has  come 
to  the  conclusion  that  a  stool  is  there?" 

Sri  Maharshi  replied  that  the  stool  and  our  two  egos  were 
created  by  one  another  mutually.  While  one  is  asleep,  one  may 
dream  of  a  stool  and  of  persons  who  avoided  tripping  over  it 
just  as  persons  in  waking  life  did,  yet  did  that  prove  that  the 
dream  stool  is  any  more  real.  And  so  we  had  it  back  and  forth 
for  an  hour,  with  the  gathering  very  amused,  for  all  Hindus 
seem  to  enjoy  a  metaphysical  contest. 

During  that  afternoons  darshan  I  again  had  the  privilege 
of  an  hour  s  talk  with  Maharshi  himself.  Observing  that  he  had 
given  orders  to  place  a  dish  of  food  for  his  peacock,  I  asked, 
"When  I  return  to  America  would  it  be  good  to  busy  myself 
with  disseminating  your  books  to  the  people  just  as  you  offer 
this  food  to  the  peacocks?"  He  laughed  and  answered  that  if  I 


33 


thought  it  good  it  would  be  good,  but  otherwise  not.  I  asked 
whether,  quite  apart  from  whatever  I  thought,  it  wasn't  useful 
to  have  pointed  out  a  way  to  those  who  were  ripe  for  a  new 
outlook.  He  countered  with  "Who  thinks  they  are  ready?" 

The  Maharshi  went  on  to  say  that  the  essential  thing  is  to 
divorce  our  sense  of  self  from  what  our  ego  and  our  body  are 
feeling  or  doing.  We  should  think  "Feelings  are  going  on,  this 
body  is  acting  in  such  and  such  a  manner",  but  never  "I  feel,  I 
act."  What  the  body  craves  or  does  is  not  our  affair. 

I  then  asked,  "Have  we  then  no  responsibility  at  all  for  the 
behaviour  of  our  ego?" 

He  replied,  "None  at  all.  Let  it  go  its  own  way  like  an 
automaton." 

"But",  I  objected,  "you  have  told  us  that  all  the  animal 
propensities  are  attributes  of  the  ego.  If  when  a  man  attains 
jivanmukti  he  ceases  to  feel  responsibility  for  the  behaviour  of 
his  ego  and  body,  wont  they  run  amok  completely?"  I  illustrated 
my  point  with  the  story  of  Dr.  Jekyll  and  Mr.  Hyde. 

Maharshi  replied,  "When  you  have  attained  jivanmukti, 
you  will  know  the  answer  to  those  questions.  Your  task  now  is 
not  to  worry  about  them  but  to  know  the  Self." 

But  I  am  forced  to  doubt  the  whole  theory  unless  it  explains 
away  this  discrepancy.  "Here  before  us  is  the  Maharshi  who  has 
attained  jivanmukti,  and  so  withdrawn  from  all  responsibility 
for  the  conduct  of  his  ego  and  the  body  we  see  before  us.  But 
though  he  declares  them  to  be  the  seat  of  all  evil  propensities, 
his  ego  and  body  continue  to  behave  quite  decorously  instead 
of  running  wild.  This  forces  me  to  suspect  that  something  in 
the  hypothesis  is  incorrect." 

He  answered,  "Let  the  Maharshi  deal  with  that  problem  if 
it  arises  and  let  Mr.  Hopkins  deal  with  who  is  Mr.  Hopkins." 


34 


Ramana 
Reminiscences 

I 

Arthur  Osborne 

ONCE  AGAIN  PEOPLE  throng  together  from  all  parts 
of  India  for  the  jayanti  of  Bhagavan  Sri  Ramana  Maharshi 
at  Tiruvannamalai,  at  the  foot  of  the  sacred  mountain  of 
Arunachala.  Men  and  women,  young  and  old,  from  the  town 
dweller  in  coat  and  trousers,  to  the  old-  world  type  of  sadhu,  all 
alike  irrespective  of  wealth  and  caste  and  from  beyond  India 
also.  America,  France,  England,  Holland,  Poland,  Iraq,  Ceylon, 
all  are  represented.  The  Maharshi,  tall,  white-haired,  golden- 
hued,  frail  now  beyond  his  years,  goes  through  his  daily  routine 
unperturbed,  unselfconscious  because  completely  Self-conscious. 
Being  unperturbed  does  not  mean  being  indifferent.  Never  was 
a  face  so  alive,  so  responsive.  From  the  rocklike  gravity  of 
samadhi  to  free  laughter  or  amused  smile;  the  gracious 
recognition  of  a  devotee  drawn  here  again,  a  smile,  a  look  of 
compassionate  understanding  that  enters  the  heart  and  makes 
an  impression  never  to  be  forgotten.  Nevertheless,  many  are 
puzzled  about  the  Maharshi. 


35 


They  ask,  is  he  always  in  samadhP.  Is  it  true  that  he  will 
not  answer  questions?  Will  he  give  advice?  What  kind  of  sadhana 
does  he  enjoin?  Is  it  any  use  for  ordinary  people  to  go  there?  I 
will  try  to  answer  these  questions  as  well  as  I  can. 

The  supreme  and  final  state  of  samadhi  is  Sahaja  samadhi 
which  does  not  imply  any  trance  or  any  oblivion  to  what  we 
ignorant  ones  call  the  'outer  world'.  There  is  no  going  backward 
and  forward  between  the  trance  state  and  the  mental  state,  the 
inner  and  the  outer.  His  consciousness  embraced  both  constantly 
without  distinction  and  without  effort.  That  is  why  the  Maharshi 
seems  so  natural,  so  simple  and  human  in  his  ways,  why  he 
laughs  and  talks  freely  and  shows  interest  in  all  that  goes  on 
around  him.  He  is  gracious  to  all,  responds  to  all.  There  is  no 
aloofness,  except  the  indefinable  grandeur,  the  awe  that  a  devotee 
feels  in  his  heart. 

He  does  not  expound  doctrine  unless  asked,  but  when 
asked,  he  answers  all  sincere  questions  graciously  and  often  at 
length.  The  widespread  idea  that  he  will  not  answer  questions 
perhaps  comes  from  his  own  saying  that  he  teaches  in  silence. 
But  that  only  means  that  the  real  teaching  is  the  silent  influence 
on  the  heart  of  the  seeker.  The  doubts  of  the  mind  can  take 
shape  in  words  but  that  is  not  the  essential  teaching  because, 
however  much  a  man  may  argue,  he  is  not  really  to  be  convinced 
in  his  mind  but  only  in  his  heart,  and  that  teaching  is  silent. 
Indeed,  it  has  happened  to  many,  as  Paul  Brunton  relates,  that 
when  they  sat  silent  before  the  Maharshi  such  peace  flooded 
their  heart  that  the  mind's  doubts  also  disappeared  and  they 
found  they  had  no  questions  to  ask. 

In  any  case,  the  kind  of  sadhana  enjoined  by  the  Maharshi 
requires  little  philosophy.  It  is  the  pure  doctrine  of  Advaita. 
This  is  the  most  direct  spiritual  path  and  is  generally  referred  to 


36 


in  books  as  the  path  of  intellect.  It  is  a  peculiar  use  of  the  word 
intellect  and  misleads  many.  It  does  not  mean  that  there  must 
be  more  attention  given  to  philosophy,  but  only  that  there  must 
be  understanding  of  the  one  simple,  central  truth  of  Advaita, 
that  the  Self  alone  is,  and  that  all  that  is  real  in  you  is  the  Self, 
Atma,  and  is  universal.  Therefore,  the  Maharshi  does  not  answer 
questions  about  what  you  were  before  you  were  born  or  what 
you  will  be  after  you  die.  All  such  philosophy  is  brushed  aside 
and  he  turns  you  from  such  mental  speculation  to  the  practical 
work  of  Self-enquiry  'Who  am  I?'  When  asked  about  life  after 
death,  he  has  said,  "Why  worry  about  what  you  will  be  when 
you  die?  First  find  out  what  you  are  now."  Probably 
commentators  will  arise  who  will  call  this  agnosticism'  just  as 
some  have  called  Buddha  an  agnostic  or  atheist,  but  it  is  not.  It 
is  simply  a  practical  reminder  that  the  Self  not  only  was  or  will 
be,  but  is  and  that  if  the  apparent  separateness  of  this  life  is  an 
illusion,  that  of  the  next  life  is  also,  and  for  the  jnani  who  abides 
in  truth,  in  the  Self,  there  is  neither  past  nor  future,  neither 
birth  nor  death,  neither  this  life  nor  the  next.  The  body  may 
change,  but  the  consciousness  of  Self  is  immutable. 

In  order  to  realise  universality,  it  is  necessary  to  try  to  give 
up  the  thought  'I  am  this'  or  'I  am  that'  and  think  only  'I  am'. 
That  is  why  the  Maharshi  does  not  advise  people  to  change  their 
conditions  of  life  or  work.  If  he  advised  them  to  give  up  their 
work  or  their  family  and  retire  into  solitude  it  would  only  be 
exchanging  the  thought  £I  am  a  house-holder'  for  £I  am  a  sadhu 
and  both  are  equally  wrong,  since  it  is  necessary  to  remember 
only  'I  am'.  It  is  the  mind  that  must  be  overcome,  and  that  can 
be  done  as  well  in  the  world  as  in  the  jungle.  If  a  man's  work 
distracts  him  from  sadhana,  the  cure  is  not  to  give  it  up  (because 
even  if  he  does  other  thoughts  will  distract  him)  but  to  ask  himself 


37 


constantly  'Who  am  1?'  'Who  is  doing  this  work?',  until  he  acquires 
detachment  towards  his  life  just  like  the  work  of  the  bank  cashier 
who  receives  and  pays  out  lakhs  of  rupees  efficiendy  and  without 
emotion  because  he  is  not  the  owner  and  the  sums  do  not  affect 
him.  It  means  playing  one's  part  in  life  with  the  same  consciousness 
and  indifference  to  the  outcome  as  the  actor  who  knows  that  he 
himself  is  not  affected  whether  he  has  to  play  Caesar  who  is  stabbed 
or  Brutus  who  stabs. 

Many  will  say  that  this  is  too  hard.  Certainly  it  is  harder  to 
control  the  mind  than  the  body.  To  fast  or  remain  celibate  is 
much  easier  than  to  keep  your  mind  off  food  or  women.  But  if 
the  way  is  hard,  the  blessing  and  support  of  the  presence  of 
Bhagavan  on  earth  is  great.  If  a  man  says  that  this  sadhana  is 
beyond  his  power,  he  is  quite  right!  If  he  says  that  it  is  beyond 
the  power  of  Bhagavan  to  enable  him  to  follow  it,  he  is  wrong. 
Some  may  also  say  that  it  is  a  cold  and  mental  way,  but  it  is  not 
really.  It  is  not  a  sadhana  of  the  mind  but  of  the  heart.  The 
mind  may  wander  and  argue,  the  heart  can  perceive  the  truth 
of  oneness  and  must  hold  grimly  to  it  until  the  wandering  mind 
has  been  subdued.  But  how  can  one  explain  the  conviction  that 
awakens  in  the  heart  and  the  remembrance  that  stays  there  from 
sitting  in  the  presence  of  the  Maharshi?  His  eyes  can  destroy 
doubt  and  implant  the  seed  of  life.  The  memory  is  in  the  heart, 
not  the  mind.  It  must  be  experienced  to  be  understood. 

Not  all  who  go  to  the  Maharshi  are  intellectuals.  All  sincere 
devotees  enjoy  his  grace.  Sometimes  philosophers  have  gone 
there  and  drifted  away  and  simple  folk  with  love  in  their  heart 
have  remained.  Here,  though  never  in  the  material  world,  the 
saying  is  made  good  'to  each  according  to  his  needs'.  You  can 
expect  such  devotees  to  tell  you  why  they  go  there  only  when 
the  lover  can  tell  why  he  loves  and  the  penitent  why  he  worships. 


38 


II 


Dr.  Hafiz  Syed 

IT  IS  SAID  and  perhaps  rightly  too,  that  over  this  distracted 
world  there  is  a  greater  sway  of  materialism  than  of  spirituality. 
The  majority  of  people  are  deeply  sunk  in  materialism  and 
therefore,  have  no  inclination  or  desire  to  turn  their  attention 
towards  spiritual  values. 

The  rapid  advancement  of  science  with  its  wonderful 
achievements  in  the  form  of  numerous  discoveries  and 
inventions,  has  added  to  the  materialistic  tendencies  of  mankind 
today. 

The  people  in  this  modern  age  demand  direct  proof  for 
everything  they  are  told  to  believe  in.  They  are  not  satisfied 
with  mere  assertions.  As  spiritual  values  can  not  be  demonstrated 
in  the  same  manner  as  material  things  are,  people  do  not  give 
even  a  moment's  thought  to  the  possibility  of  values,  other  than 
material  which  they  see  all  round  themselves.  This  sphere  of 
spiritual  and  material  values  is  based  on  two  different  angles. 
To  quote  a  Tibetan  Scripture,  "The  Self  of  matter  and  the  Self 
of  spirit  cannot  remain  together,  one  of  the  twain  must  go!" 

The  reality  of  spiritual  life  cannot  possibly  be  undervalued 
or  ignored  simply  because  the  majority  of  people  are  drawn 
towards  materialism.  But  for  the  glory  and  achievements  of 
spiritual  life,  human  civilisation  would  not  have  progressed  nor 
could  humanity  have  taken  a  step  forward  in  the  scale  of 
evolution.  The  history  of  human  civilisation  has  revealed,  to  no 
small  extent,  that  solitary  spiritual  men  have  achieved  great 
things  and  have  rendered  no  small  service  in  raising  the  standard 
of  human  life  from  animality  to  humanity  and  from  humanity 


39 


to  divinity.  The  all-embracing  influence  of  divinely  inspired 
prophets  and  sages  in  all  ages  is  still  being  felt  in  various  parts  of 
the  world,  and  the  fact  that  materialism  has  been  unsettling  our 
minds,  and  in  spite  of  the  alienation  of  our  sympathy  from  and 
belief  in  higher  values. 

Of  all  countries,  India  has  had  the  unique  reputation  of 
producing  in  its  fold  a  larger  number  of  saints  and  sages  from 
time  immemorial  up  to  the  present  day.  Every  teacher  of 
humanity  has  had  his  own  way  of  dealing  with  his  brethren. 
Some  of  them,  say,  for  instance,  Gautama  the  Buddha,  Jesus 
Christ,  Guru  Nanak,  Kabir  and  Sri  Sankaracharya  have  gone 
about  from  place  to  place  exhorting  and  admonishing  the  people 
of  their  times  to  live  moral  lives  and  shun  the  ways  of  falsehood 
and  intrigue. 

They  used  to  give  sermons  to  the  eager  crowds  wherever 
they  went  and  in  this  way  drew  a  larger  number  of  people  to 
them,  laid  certain  rules  and  regulations  for  everyday  life,  advised 
people  to  seek  true  happiness  exempt  from  decay  and  to  be 
helpful  and  charitable  to  each  other.  They  thus  laid  the 
foundation  of  the  various  religions  that  are  still  in  vogue  in 
every  part  of  the  world. 

Unlike  all  these  saints,  sages  and  prophets,  Sri  Ramana 
Maharshi  s  life  and  work  tells  quite  a  different  tale.  His  way  of 
serving  mankind  is  in  many  ways  unique  and  all  his  own.  If  we 
closely  and  critically  survey  his  simple  and  evidently  uneventful 
life  from  his  earliest  youth  up  to  the  present  day,  when  he  has 
completed  what  the  Psalmists  call  three  score  years  and  ten,  we 
find  that  he  has  never  of  his  own  accord  desired  or  moved  a 
finger  to  win  people's  attention  towards  him.  Nor  did  he  offer 
them  any  kind  of  spiritual  or  moral  admonition  to  better  their 
lives. 


40 


When  the  people  of  Tiruvannamalai  discovered  his  presence 
at  the  foot  of  the  Hill  of  Arunachala  some  of  them  were  irresistibly 
drawn  towards  him  and  sought  his  help  and  guidance. 

There  has  been  a  gradual  evolution  in  his  relation  with  the 
outside  world.  In  his  early  days  when  he  was  observing  complete 
silence,  some  approached  him  out  of  mere  curiosity  to  see  what 
the  'Brahmana  Swami'  looked  like,  while  others  were  moved 
by  an  inner  spiritual  urge  to  visit  him  and  receive  his  blessings. 
One  person  of  the  latter  category  was  Sri  Ganapathi  Muni  who 
had  all  the  equipment  necessary  to  understand,  a  being  endowed 
with  higher  spiritual  powers. 

It  is  acknowledged  on  all  sides  that  Sri  Ganapathi  Shastri 
was  deeply  learned  in  Hindu  shastras  and  in  the  light  of  his 
knowledge  given  by  the  rishis  of  yore  and  having  the  requisite 
qualifications  as  laid  down  by  the  sacred  scriptures,  he  knew 
full  well  how  to  appreciate  a  young  sage.  To  his  great  joy,  as  we 
all  know,  he  found  that  Sri  Ramana  Maharshi  in  his  youth  had 
acquired  all  the  moral  and  spiritual  qualities  and  had  attained 
the  highest  spiritual  enlightenment  to  which  humanity  ever 
aspires.  It  is  he  who  made  known  to  the  outside  world  that  the 
'Brahmana  Swami'  was  a  great  sage,  whose  spiritual  eminence 
could  not  easily  be  gauged  by  an  ordinary  mortal. 

One  great  quality  which  shone  brilliantly  in  the  Sage  was  that 
of  complete  desirelessness  and  a  spirit  of  unreserved  renunciation. 
The  thought  of  the  world  with  all  its  glaring  trinkets  never  crossed 
his  mind.  He  was  deeply,  unshakeably  and  permanently  established 
in  his  highest  Self  that  was  full  of  bliss.  Having  found  his  rest  and 
home  in  what  he  lovingly  called,  his  'father ,  he  never  cared  to  look 
at  anything  that  the  world  prized  highly. 

Only  recently  (i.e.  in  the  late  1940s)  he  suffered  from  a 
sarcomatous  growth  on  his  arm,  a  disease  which  causes  intense 


41 


pain  to  the  body.  It  was  operated  on  thrice  and  the  sage  s  serenity, 
poise  and  peace  were  not  at  all  disturbed.  He  remained  absolutely 
unmoved  by  the  pain  and  suffering  that  is  usually  associated 
with  such  a  condition.  He  firmly  believed  and  teaches  others  in 
silence  to  understand  that  man  is  essentially  a  spiritual  being, 
free  from  all  change,  decay,  and  death.  He  is  not  his  body,  nor 
his  senses,  nor  even  the  mind. 

They  are  all  made  of  matter  and  therefore  they  are 
constantly  moving  and  changing.  It  is  this  realisation  that  makes 
him  truly  happy,  carefree,  quiet  and  peaceful.  Bhagavan  Sri 
Ramanas  life  is  the  greatest  proof  of  the  reality  of  the  spiritual 
life  which  is  a  challenge  to  materialism.  He  lived  in  his  higher 
Self  and  is  in  constant  communion  with  the  supreme  Reality. 

Bhagavans  method  of  approach  to  Truth  is  all  his  own.  He 
never  dogmatises,  he  never  sermonises,  never  gives  any  mantram 
or  expects  people  to  follow  any  set  mode  of  worship. 

What  he  does  for  us  we  cannot  convey  by  word  of  mouth. 
His  invisible  gaze,  silently,  unobtrusively  transforms  the  lives  of 
the  men  and  women  who,  by  virtue  of  their  past  good  deeds, 
are  gathered  around  him,  waiting  for  his  benign  attention  and 
paternal  guidance. 

All  his  great  work  for  the  improvement  and  betterment  of 
mankind  is  done  invisibly  and  silently.  His  silence  is  more 
eloquent,  more  effective,  more  far-reaching  than  the  sermons 
of  any  number  of  teachers  put  together.  There  is  nothing 
wanting  in  him  for  us.  His  grace  is  ever  ready  for  us.  All  that  we 
have  to  do  is  to  qualify  ourselves  by  our  self-effort  and  self- 
purification  to  make  ourselves  worthy  of  his  attention. 

The  well  known  maxim,  "God  helps  those  who  help 
themselves",  holds  good  more  in  the  case  of  his  devotees  than 
of  others.  We  have  to  raise  ourselves  to  his  level  of  requirements. 


42 


Let  a  sceptic,  an  agnostic,  or  an  unbeliever  in  higher  values 
come  to  him  with  an  open  mind,  with  a  genuine  desire  to 
understand  what  inner  life  is  and  to  know  what  truth  really 
means  and  it  may  be  said  without  the  least  hesitation  that  his 
visit  to  Sri  Bhagavan  will  never  prove  fruitless. 

What  the  modern  world  wants  is  proof  and  demonstration. 
That  proof  is  present  in  the  life  of  this  great  sage  of  India  who  is 
in  our  midst  to  dispel  the  darkness  of  ignorance  and  restore  the 
light  eternal,  which  alone  can  grant  us  the  peace  and  happiness 
that  the  world  so  badly  needs. 


Ill 

Prof  B.L  Atreya 

A  SAINT  IS  as  great  a  necessity  for  human  society  as  is  a  great 
scientist,  a  great  thinker  and  a  great  leader,  nay  the  necessity  is 
even  greater.  For  a  scientist  discovers  the  secrets  of  life  and  of 
the  Universe,  a  thinker  tries  to  understand  the  meaning  and 
purpose  of  existence,  and  a  leader  tries  to  shape  and  transform 
humanity  or  a  portion  of  it  according  to  his  own  notions  of 
what  it  ought  to  be. 

A  saint  is  one  who  makes  a  wholehearted  effort  to  realise 
in  himself,  in  his  own  life,  the  highest  and  furthest  possibilities 
of  human  life,  which  in  a  natural  course  of  evolution  may  take 
centuries  to  actualise. 

A  saint  is  a  man  perfected,  a  fulfilled  hope  of  humanity,  a 
successful  experiment  in  human  sublimation,  and  a  source  of 
inspiration  and  guidance  to  the  travellers  on  the  path  to 


43 


perfection.  He  is  the  embodiment  of  the  highest  values  of 
humanity,  an  indubitable  indication  that  ideals  can  be  made 
real,  that  man  can  be  what  he  ought  to  be,  here  and  now. 

His  life  is  a  measure  of  man's  manhood,  when  it  is  lived  in 
the  midst  of  humanity  and  not  in  sanctified  seclusion.  It  is  a 
practical  solution  of  the  various  puzzles  of  life,  provided  it  is  a 
comprehensive  one.  Considered  from  various  points  of  view,  a 
saint  is  the  greatest  asset  to  human  society.  A  perfected  being, 
he  is  the  eternal  beacon  to  sadhakas  the  world  over. 

I  have  read  the  biographies  of  many  a  saint,  seen  a  number 
of  them  and  have  come  in  contact  with  some.  I  have  had  the 
privilege  of  being  at  the  Ashram  of  Sri  Ramana  Maharshi  for  a 
short  time  in  March  1940  and  since  then  have  been  in 
correspondence  with  him. 

He  made  a  deep  impression  upon  my  mind,  a  mind  that 
has  been  moulded  by  a  study  of  scientific  and  philosophic 
writings  of  the  east  as  well  as  of  the  west.  The  greatest  peculiarity 
and  merit  of  Sri  Ramana  Maharshi's  life  is  that  although  he  has 
moulded  and  perfected  his  personality  on  the  lines  of  Advaita 
Vedanta,  a  purely  Indian  way  of  Self-realization,  he  is  highly 
appreciated  and  resorted  to  by  western  seekers  and  by  those 
Indians  who  have  been  educated  on  western  lines. 

One  of  the  reasons  for  this  fact  may  be  that  some  English 
and  French  writers  happened  to  praise  him  highly  in  their  books. 
But  the  fact  remains  to  be  explained  why  these  western  seekers 
were  themselves  so  well  impressed  by  the  Maharshi.  Mere 
publicity  does  not  in  the  least  establish  the  greatness  of  saints, 
although  it  may  make  them  known,  as  in  the  case  of  Jesus  Christ, 
to  a  wider  public. 

Maharshi's  greatness  is  more  deeply  founded.  It  is  based  on 
his  actual  living  by  the  creed  oiAdvaita  Vedanta  which  holds  that 


44 


reality  is  one  without  a  second,  that  everything  in  this  Universe  is 
but  that  reality  which  is  Existence-Consciousness-Bliss. 

True  to  his  creed,  he  regards  nothing  as  alien,  none  as 
other,  no  event  as  undesirable.  For  him  the  ideal  is  the  real  and 
the  real  is  the  ideal.  He  has  no  other  relation  with  anyone  but 
that  of  love.  He  thinks  as  much  of  others  as  he  thinks  of  himself. 
Love,  affection,  kindness,  mercy  etc.  which  are  expressions  of 
one  and  the  same  thing,  and  the  feeling  of  unity  with  all,  ever 
flow  from  him.  This  is  the  secret  of  Maharshi  s  unique  greatness 
and  consequent  popularity.  The  whole  of  humanity  owes  its 
homage  to  this  great  sage  amidst  us. 

Jnana  is  like  akasha.  The  supreme  Self  which  is  to  be  known 
through  sadhana  is  also  like  the  ether.  The  various  objects  we 
see  in  the  world  as  well  as  the  souls  are  like  the  ether.  Therefore, 
who  is  to  know  which?  What  is  to  be  known  by  what?  The 
supreme  realization  is  that  there  is  no  plurality.  True  knowledge 
is  distinctionless.  That  knowledge  is  the  Self,  the  light  divine. 
That  knowledge  is  Bhagavan  Ramana. 

May  we  offer  our  obeisance  to  this  supreme  Lord  who 
came  to  save  the  world  and  who  still  abides  and  will  ever  abide 
with  us  in  order  to  make  us  perfect. 

May  we,  on  this  auspicious  occasion,  renew  our  faith  in 
our  Bhagavan  and  pay  homage  to  him  so  that  not  only  we,  but 
the  entire  world  may  be  saved. 


IV 


45 


Anonymous 

WITH  THE  INCREASE  in  distant  visitors,  the  atmosphere  at 
Ramanashram  is  growing  more  lively  and  Sri  Maharshi  often 
brings  home  a  point  by  narrating  stories  from  the  past. 

One  day,  last  week,  the  photo  of  a  piece  of  architecture  at 
the  Madurai  temple  was  missing.  A  few  minutes  earlier,  it  had 
been  seen  by  many  people  who  had  gathered  in  the  hall  but 
when  Mr.  Maurice  Frydman  wanted  to  see  it,  the  photo  could 
not  be  traced.  The  Maharshi  asked  some  of  the  inmates  what 
had  become  of  it  and  the  most  surprising  part  of  it  was  that  the 
French  lady  who  was  stated  to  have  obtained  it  was  not  herself 
aware  of  having  done  so. 

Mr.  Frydman  utilised  the  occasion  to  ask  a  pointed  question 
as  to  how  this  disappearance  was  viewed  by  the  Maharshi  himself. 

The  reply  was,  "Suppose  you  dream  that  you  are  taking 
me  to  Poland.  You  wake  up  and  ask  me,  I  dreamt  so  and  so. 
Did  you  dream  so  or  know  it?  And  how  do  you  view  it?" 

Frydman  further  asked,  "But  are  you  not  aware  of  the 
happenings  in  front  of  you?" 

Sri  Maharshi  replied,  "These  are  all  workings  of  the  mind 
and  the  questions  also." 

Then  Sri  Maharshi  narrated  a  story. 

"When  Sita  was  missed  and  Rama  went  about  in  search  of  her, 
Parvati  was  surprised  and  asked  Siva,  'You  had  praised  Rama  as  the 
perfect  being.  See  how  he  behaves  now  and  grieves  at  the  loss  of  Sita.' 

"Siva  replied,  'If  you  are  sceptical  about  Sri  Rama's 
perfection  then  put  him  to  the  test.  Transform  yourself  into 
Sita  and  appear  before  him.' 


46 


"Parvati  did  so  and  to  her  astonishment,  Rama  ignored 
her  appearance  and  still  cried.  'Ha  Sita,  Ha  Sita,  and  moved 
like  a  blind  man.  Parvati  was  then  convinced." 

In  the  course  of  a  conversation  Dr.  Henry  Hand  asked 
Maharshi,  "Are  you  conscious  of  a  brotherhood  of  invisible 
rishis?" 

Sri  Maharshi  replied  with  a  question,  "If  invisible,  how  to 
see  them?" 

Dr.  Hand,  "In  consciousness". 

Sri  Maharshi  continued,  "In  consciousness  there  is  nothing 
external." 

Dr.  Hand  asked,  "Is  there  not  individuality?  I  fear  to  lose 
my  individual  being." 

Sri  Maharshi,  "Why  fear  to  lose  individuality?  What  is  your 
state  in  dreamless  sleep?  Are  you  conscious  of  your  individuality 
then?" 

Dr.  Hand,  "It  is  possible." 

Sri  Maharshi,  "But  what  is  your  experience?  If  the 
individuality  be  there  would  it  be  asleep?" 

Dr.  Hand,  "That  depends  on  the  interpretation.  What 
does  Maharshi  say?" 

Sri  Maharshi,  "Maharshi  does  not  speak  for  your 
experience.  He  does  not  force  anything  down  your  throat." 

Dr.  Hand,  "I  know.  That  is  what  I  like  so  much  about  the 
Maharshi  and  his  teachings." 

Sri  Maharshi,  "Do  you  not  really  take  great  care  to  get 
sound  sleep?  Do  you  not  prepare  your  bed  carefully?  And  are 
you  not  anxious  to  lose  your  individuality  in  deep  steep?  Then 
why  fear  it?" 

One  visitor  asked  him,  "How  can  one  root  out  the  sex 
idea?" 


47 


Sri  Maharshi's  reply  was,  "By  rooting  out  the  false  idea  of 
the  body  being  the  Self.  There  is  no  sex  in  the  Self." 

The  visitor  again  asked,  "How  is  one  to  realise  it?" 

Sri  Maharshi  said,  "Because  you  think  you  are  the  body, 
you  see  another  as  the  body.  Difference  in  sex  arises.  But,  you 
are  not  the  body.  Be  the  real  Self  and  there  is  no  sex." 


V 

Anonymous 

IN  1943  (OR  1944),  Dr.  Jesudasan,  known  as  Peria  Annan 
(the  Chinna  Annan  being  Dr.  Paton),  accompanied  by  Dr. 
Raja  went  to  Sri  Ramanasramam.  Peria  Annan  who  was  a  highly 
qualified  doctor  and  who  had  done  his  medical  studies  at 
Edinburgh,  wanted  to  serve  the  poor.  At  the  same  time  he  had 
a  deep  spiritual  longing,  and  spent  long  hours  in  prayer, 
meditation,  and  reading  the  scriptures.  Some  accused  this  odd 
sanyasi  doctor  of  not  giving  his  full  attention  to  medical  work 
and  wasting  his  expert  talents.  He  himself  was  disturbed  about 
this  seeming  dichotomy  in  his  life. 

He  went  to  Sri  Ramanasramam  and  sat  in  silence  before 
the  Maharshi  amidst  several  devotees.  Solemn  silence  prevailed 
and  after  some  fifteen  minutes,  Periannan  ventured  to  speak 
out  and  seek  Bhagavans  guidance.  Smiling,  the  Maharshi  said, 
"Some  call  me  also  a  lazy  fellow.  Do  what  you  feel  like  doing." 
Periannan  realized  in  a  flash  that  there  was  no  real  dichotomy 
in  his  life. 


48 


VI 

WHEN  IN  ANCIENT  DAYS  even  Sri  Dakshinamurti  the  Adi- 
guru,  guru  of  all  gurus  was  able  to  reveal  the  truth  of  that  one 
Self  only  through  silence,  the  speechless  speech,  who  else  can 
reveal  it  through  speech? 

In  this  connection,  Sri  Bhagavan  once  told  the  following 
story  to  Sri  Muruganar.  When  the  four  aged  Sanakadi  rishis 
first  saw  the  sixteen-year-old  Sri  Dakshinamurti  sitting  under 
the  banyan  tree,  they  were  at  once  attracted  by  him, 
understanding  him  to  be  the  real  Sadguru. 

They  approached  him,  did  three  pradakshinas  around  him, 
prostrated  before  him,  sat  at  his  feet  and  began  to  ask  very  shrewd 
and  pertinent  questions  about  the  nature  of  Reality  and  the  means 
of  attaining  it.  Because  of  the  great  compassion  and  fatherly  love 
(vatsalya)  which  he  felt  for  his  aged  disciples,  the  young  Sri 
Dakshinamurti  was  overjoyed  to  see  their  earnestness,  wisdom  and 
maturity,  and  hence  he  gave  apt  replies  to  each  of  their  questions. 

As  he  answered  each  consecutive  question,  further  doubts 
rose  in  their  minds  and  still  they  asked  further  questions.  Thus 
they  continued  to  question  Sri  Dakshinamurti  for  one  whole 
year,  and  he  continued  to  clear  their  doubts  through  his 
compassionate  answers. 

Finally,  however,  Sri  Dakshinamurti  understood  that  if  he 
gave  more  answers  to  their  questions  more  doubts  would  rise  in 
their  minds  and  hence  there  would  never  be  an  end  to  their 
ignorance  (ajnana).  Therefore,  suppressing  even  the  feeling  of 
compassion  and  fatherly  love  which  was  welling  up  within  him, 
he  merged  himself  into  the  supreme  silence.  Because  of  their 
great  maturity  (which  had  been  ripened  to  perfection  through 
their  year-long  association  with  the  Sadguru),  as  soon  as  Sri 


49 


Dakshinamurti  thus  merged  himself,  they  too  were  automatically 
merged  within,  into  silence,  the  state  of  Self. 

Wonder-struck  on  hearing  Sri  Bhagavan  narrating  the 
story  in  this  manner,  Sri  Muruganar  remarked  that  in  no  book 
is  it  mentioned  that  Sri  Dakshinamurti  ever  spoke  anything. 
"But  this  is  what  actually  happened"  replied  Sri  Bhagavan. 

From  the  authoritative  way  in  which  Sri  Bhagavan  thus 
replied  and  from  the  clear  and  descriptive  way  in  which  he  had 
told  the  story,  Sri  Muruganar  understood  that  Sri  Bhagavan 
was  none  other  than  Sri  Dakshinamurti  himself. 


VII 


The  author  of  this  reminiscence  is  not  known,  but  the 
events  took  place  in  1935.  Maurice  Frydman  eventually 
became  a  resident  of  Sri  Ramanasramam  for  a  period  of  nearly 
three  years  and  during  the  later  stages  of  his  stay,  he  compiled 
"Maharshis  Gosper. 

ONE  MORNING  IN  September,  one  Maurice  Frydman,  a 
consulting  and  electrical  engineer  announced  himself  before 
Sri  Bhagavan.  He  entered  the  hall,  hat  in  hand  but  with  shoes 
still  on.  The  Maharshi  ordered  a  stool  for  him  upon  which  he 
seated  himself  cross-legged  for  a  short  time  and  then  he  withdrew. 
After  a  wash  and  light  refreshments  he  came  back  without  shoes 
and  squatted  on  the  floor. 

He  stayed  three  days  and  was  quite  social  and  genial  and 
friendly  to  everyone  who  responded  similarly  towards  him.  He 
tried  to  learn  our  ways  and  adapt  himself  to  them.  His  clumsiness 
often  evoked  the  good  humoured  laughter  of  the  Maharshi  who 
always  put  him  right,  as  a  father  would  a  child. 


50 


He  tried  to  learn  from  Maharshi  something  about  realisation, 
raised  doubts  and  had  them  cleared.  Once  he  asked  why  there 
should  be  illusion  if  the  individual  soul  is  identical  with  the  Supreme. 
Bhagavan  gave  him  the  usual  answer  (the  answer  is  not  given  in  the 
text)  and  then  began  to  chew  betel  leaves.  In  the  meantime, 
Mr.Frydman  was  ruminating  and  with  dramatic  gestures  wanted 
to  know  why  the  ego  should  not  be  cut  down  at  one  stroke  and 
destroyed  so  as  to  gain  supreme  bliss.  The  Maharshi  stopped  chewing 
his  betel  leaves  long  enough  to  smile,  and  then  broke  out  into 
laughter  and  asked  the  questioner  to  hold  out  his  ego  so  that  the 
Maharshi  could  strike  it  down.  Everyone  in  the  hall  laughed 
including  Mr.  Frydman  and  at  the  conclusion  of  the  laughter  Mr. 
Frydman  addressed  the  Maharshi  and  said,  "Yes,  now  I  understand." 


VIII 

Varadachari 

THOUGH  I  HAVE  HAD  unique  opportunities  of  studying 
some  of  the  characteristic  works  of  Sri  Ramana,  yet  it  was  only  in 
April  1947  that  I  had  the  good  fortune  of  beholding  him  face  to 
face.  This  darshan  of  the  sage  is  an  experience  in  itself.  It  is  not 
capable  of  being  described.  So  very  casual  yet  pregnant,  so  very 
unobtrusive  yet  deeply  significant,  almost  everything  that  occurs 
in  the  Ashram  seems  to  be  inundated  with  the  quiet  consciousness 
of  the  Master.  Such  indeed  was  my  reflective  impression.  Pleasant, 
deeply  penetrating  and  inspiring  somewhere  in  the  depths,  it 
showed  that  the  activity  of  the  spirit  is  of  a  different  order  and 
kind  from  what  we  know  to  be  activity'. 


IX 


51 


Maurice  Frydman 

JUST  SIX  MONTHS  after  I  came  to  India,  I  was  left  alone 
and  had  no  friends.  The  person  whom  I  loved  died  and  I  had 
nothing  to  attract  me  in  life. 

Quite  accidentally,  just  for  fun,  I  dropped  in  at 
Tiruvannamalai.  I  went  direct  to  the  swami  but  I  was  ordered 
out  by  his  disciples  as  I  had  not  taken  off  my  shoes. 

After  bathing  and  other  preparations,  I  went  again  to  the 
hall  and  remained  there  with  the  Maharshi  for  two  hours. 

Then  I  understood  that  I  had  met  someone,  the  likes  of 
whom  I  had  never  met  before. 

I  did  not  then  know  what  was  meant  by  words  like 
Maharshi  and  Bhagavan.  I  had  no  preconceived  ideas  and  yet  I 
felt  that  there  was  something  extraordinary  in  that  man. 

I  was  told  about  his  teachings  but  they  were  far  too  high 
for  me.  I  did  not  understand  what  they  meant  but  I  felt  a  strong 
and  lasting  affection  for  him.  I  was  alone  in  India  and  I  attached 
myself  to  him  just  as  a  homeless  dog  would  to  his  master. 

Afterwards,  whenever  I  felt  worried,  I  used  to  go  to 
Arunachala,  and  sit  in  his  presence.  In  the  early  days  I  would  be 
asking  questions,  but  later  when  I  began  to  visit  him  more  and 
more,  the  discussion  with  him  grew  less  and  less. 

Then  I  began  to  visit  him  almost  every  month.  I  knew  no 
sadhana  or  dhyana.  I  would  simply  sit  in  his  presence.  To  my 
questions,  Sri  Maharshi  would  say:  "Find  out  who  you  are."  I 
could  not  make  out  anything  but  all  the  same  I  felt  happy. 

Slowly  some  change  came  in  me.  Just  as  the  egg  grows  and 
hatches  only  with  the  aid  of  the  warmth  of  the  mother  I  was 
also  getting  into  shape  slowly  and  steadily  in  his  presence. 


52 


My  mind  became  more  quiet  than  before.  Previously  it 
was  unhappy  and  never  satisfied.  Now  a  kind  of  security  and 
peace  began  to  be  felt  spontaneously. 

I  felt  that  Sri  Maharshi  was  coming  nearer  and  nearer  as 
time  passed.  Afterwards  I  used  to  think  of  him  whenever  I  felt 
unhappy.  He  used  to  appear  before  me  and  ask  if  I  have  not 
committed  any  sin.  If  I  had  erred  or  sinned,  he  used  to  hide 
himself  for  a  time  but  later  on  appear  and  reply. 

His  affection  was  always  there  and  as  fire  melts  ice  so  his 
affection  made  my  worries  melt. 


X 

Swami  Madhavananda 

ON  ONE  OCCASION,  probably  in  1939,  Sri  P.M.N.  Swamy, 
a  staunch  devotee  of  Bhagavan  and  secretary  of  Sri  Ramana 
Satchidananda  Mandali,  Matunga,  went  to  the  Ashram  at 
Tiruvannamalai  to  have  darshan  of  Bhagavan  and  stayed  for 
the  day  there  with  his  wife  and  nine  month  old  child,  Ramanan. 

They  had  their  breakfast  in  the  common  dining  hall  in 
the  morning.  After  finishing  they  went  to  wash  their  hands  at 
the  tap  outside,  leaving  the  child  in  the  hall.  By  this  time 
Ramanan  crawled  away  somewhere  and  could  not  be  seen.  The 
perturbed  father  called  out  to  the  child  as  'Ramana,  Ramana . 

Bhagavan,  who  was  then  passing  on  his  way  to  the 
meditation  hall  immediately  responded  to  the  call  and  the  child 
also  was  found  near  the  well  in  the  Ashram  compound.  The 
response  from  Bhagavan  naturally  created  a  little  puzzle  in  Sri 


53 


P.M.N.  Swamy's  mind  because  he  thought  that  the  call  'Ramana, 
Ramana'  intended  for  his  child  might  have  been  wrongly 
interpreted  by  Bhagavan. 

Bhagavan  was  quick  to  read  Sri  Swamy's  mind  and  told 
him,  "Why  do  you  feel  puzzled  when  I  responded  to  the  call?  Is 
there  any  difference  between  this  Ramana  (meaning  himself) 
and  that  Ramana  (meaning  the  child)?" 


XI 

K.  R.  K.  Murtty 

AN  OLD  WOMAN  bent  double  with  age  used  to  go  round 
and  round  Sri  Bhagavans  hall  and  finally  go  near  Bhagavans 
seat  and  loudly  sing  songs  composed  extempore  by  her.  Her 
spontaneous  compositions  used  to  pour  forth  effortlessly  from 
her  extremely  devoted  heart.  She  was  not  a  learned  lady,  there 
night  be  some  grammatical  mistakes  and  errors  in  rhyme, 
rhythm,  etc.  She  used  to  thus  sing  her  prayers  daily  for  obtaining 
the  grace  of  Bhagavan. 

One  day  Sri  Bhagavan  smilingly  remarked  that  her  songs 
seemed  to  be  much  better  than  those  of  her  son.  Her  son  was  a 
scholar  and  from  an  ordinary  point  of  view,  the  scholar's 
compositions  ought  to  be  superior  but  for  Bhagavan  those  arising 
from  the  bottom  of  the  heart  with  great  devotion  and  emotion 
are  more  pleasing.  Are  not  the  standards  of  judgement  different? 

Whenever  Bhagavans  physical  body  appeared  to  suffer  from 
some  ailment,  some  devotees  used  to  prescribe  medicines  for  relief, 
forgetting  that  Sri  Bhagavan  himself  was  Vaidyanathawho  can  cure 


54 


all  ills  if  he  so  willed.  Sri  Bhagavan  used  to  take  or  apply  the  medicines 
just  for  the  satisfaction  of  the  devotees  who  prescribed  the  same 
and  not  for  curing  himself.  He  never  wanted  to  wound  the  feelings 
of  even  the  humblest  devotees  and  he  used  to  accept  the  medicines, 
though  there  was  no  necessity  for  any  of  them  as  far  as  he  was 
concerned.  Though  the  act  is  the  same,  the  object  is  different. 

One  lady  devotee  was  one  day  expressing  to  Bhagavan 
that  she  had  come  that  day  from  a  long  distance.  Bhagavan 
suddenly  remarked,  "You  did  not  come.  The  train  brought  you 
here."  The  other  side  of  the  picture  is  more  real  to  Bhagavan. 
She  did  not  come  there  perhaps  by  her  individual  exertion  but 
was  brought  by  Bhagavans  grace. 

In  the  early  stages,  Sri  Ramanashramam  was  a  lonely 
cottage  in  the  burial  ground.  As  the  number  of  devotees 
frequenting  the  Ashram  was  increasing,  so  also  was  the  joy  of 
the  thieves  in  the  neighbourhood  at  the  prospect  of  getting  easy 
money  from  the  Ashram. 

They  waited  for  an  opportunity  and  one  day  suddenly 
broke  into  the  Ashram  at  the  dead  of  night.  They  freely  used 
their  sticks  on  every  one  of  the  inmates  including  Bhagavan. 
They  enraged  the  devotees  who  were  preparing  to  pay  them  in 
the  same  coin.  Sri  Bhagavan  who  was  unmoved  pointed  out 
that,  "sahanam  was  sadhu  dharma" ,  and  that  they  should 
patiently  bear  with  the  thieves. 

"We  should  not  swerve  from  the  path  of  our  dharma 
irrespective  of  the  acts  or  behaviour  of  evil  doers,  further  it  is 
not  wise  to  knock  down  the  teeth  that  bit  the  tongue",  he  said. 

These  words  disarmed  the  devotees,  who  kept  quiet  while 
the  thieves  were  busy.  The  thieves  expected  to  go  back  with  a 
fortune  but  with  all  their  efforts  could  not  secure  more  than 
ten  rupees  worth  of  valuables  from  the  whole  premises. 


55 


While  the  thieves  were  thus  disappointed  and  dejected,  Sri 
Bhagavan  was  reported  to  have  suggested  to  them  mercifully 
that  they  should  take  the  food  available  in  the  kitchen.  This 
sensational  incident  could  not  upset  the  peace  of  Bhagavan  even 
for  a  while  or  make  an  impression  on  his  mind  (although  it 
became  the  talk  of  the  neighbouring  town).  The  importance 
attached  to  this  occurrence  by  the  sage  was  nil. 

Once  Bhagavan,  while  passing  through  the  hilly  tracts 
inadvertently  damaged  a  nest  of  wasps.  The  wasps  furiously 
attacked  the  leg  that  pulled  down  their  beloved  home.  Sri 
Bhagavan  bore  the  unbearable  pain  patiently  without  offering 
the  least  resistance  as  his  guilty  leg  which  caused  pain  to  them  in 
his  opinion,  deserved  the  just  punishment  meted  out  to  the 
same  by  the  angry  wasps.  How  different  is  Sri  Bhagavan's 
reaction  and  his  sense  of  justice  which  knows  no  fear  or  favour? 

When  a  westerner  invited  the  attention  of  Bhagavan  to  the 
poverty  of  the  average  Indian  and  his  poorly  furnished  quarters, 
Sri  Bhagavan  replied  that  although  the  Indians  did  not  possess 
many  material  comforts,  they  are  not  less  happy  on  that  account. 
As  they  do  not  feel  the  want  of  the  same,  they  are  able  to  enjoy 
life  with  what  they  have.  How  true  and  how  correct!  Happiness  is 
not  directly  proportional  to  the  material  goods  one  possesses. 

In  Sri  Ramanashram  Sri  Bhagavan  used  to  occupy  a  sofa 
and  many  people  used  to  think  it  was  very  comfortable  and 
luxurious  a  seat  for  any  person.  Some  used  to  remark  why  should 
a  sage  or  sanyasi  require  such  a  seat,  forgetting  for  the  moment 
that  Sri  Bhagavan  was  accustomed  to  the  roughest  and  hardest 
possible  seats  throughout  his  life  and  only  towards  the  end  he 
used  the  sofa  to  oblige  certain  devotees. 

One  day  Sri  Bhagavan  was  giving  instructions  to  an 
attendant  about  binding  the  books  for  careful  preservation.  To 


56 


supplement  the  instructions  and  show  personally,  he  sat  on  the 
flat  floor  and  remarked  that  it  was  very  pleasant  to  sit  on  the 
ground.  A  high  seat  also  was  essential  to  enable  a  number  of 
devotees  to  have  darshan  of  Bhagavan  simultaneously.  Sri 
Bhagavan  was  accustomed  to  put  up  with  anything  which  came 
his  way  and  as  he  was  not  attached  to  any  particular  seat,  he 
occupied  the  sofa  for  the  convenience  of  the  devotees.  This  was 
in  spite  of  some  physical  discomfort  in  occupying  that  particular 
seat.  Ordinary  people  think  that  the  sofa  is  a  nice  seat.  But  Sri 
Bhagavan  expressed  at  least  once  that  the  floor  was  much  better. 
Are  not  the  views  different? 

One  day  as  usual  Sri  Bhagavan  started  for  a  walk  towards 
Arunachala.  On  the  way,  there  were  some  steps.  While  crossing 
over  these  Sri  Bhagavans  leg  slipped  and  was  injured.  Some 
devotees  who  noticed  this  examined  the  steps  and  found  them 
to  be  uneven.  Immediately  some  masons  were  called  for  and 
by  the  time  they  started  work  Sri  Bhagavan  returned  to  the 
spot  and  observed  that  they  were  cutting  off  some  portions  of 
the  steps.  "Why?"  He  questioned.  "Why  do  you  cut  off  the 
steps?  The  steps  did  nothing.  It  is  only  this  leg  that  is  at  fault. 
Cut  off  the  leg."  How  different  is  the  saintly  reaction! 


XII 

).  Suryaprakasa  Rao 

IN  THE  YEAR  1946,  a  friend  of  mine  informed  me  about  the 
glory  of  Tiruvannamalai  and  its  sage.  The  photo  of  Bhagavan 
in  a  smiling  posture  was  secured  by  me. 


57 


It  was  three  years  later  during  May  1949,  that  I  decided  to 
have  his  darshan.  On  entering  into  his  presence,  the  general  silence 
and  serenity  captivated  me.  At  first  I  was  partly  anxious  to  get 
near  to  him  and  partly  timid.  I  only  mentally  repeated,  "Bhagavan 
I  have  come"  as  though  it  was  a  long  expected  meeting.  He  looked 
into  my  eyes.  Even  from  the  distance  I  could  not  stand  the 
brilliance  of  those  eyes.  I  tried  to  meditate.  Presently  there  was 
some  conversation.  A  European  lady  sat  there  attired  in  Indian 
style.  After  a  repeated  jingling  of  her  bangles,  Bhagavan  asked  in 
Telugu  smilingly,  "What  is  the  matter?"  Somebody  replied,  "She 
wore  bangles",  "Oh  I  see",  said  Bhagavan.  He  was  then  looking 
at  some  of  the  correspondence,  at  the  playing  of  the  squirrels, 
and  at  the  feeding  of  the  white  peacock. 

In  the  afternoon,  by  the  time  we  came,  the  sitting  had 
already  commenced.  There  was  no  interruption  to  the  supreme 
silence.  A  cultured  family  of  a  mother,  husband  and  wife  came 
and  offered  some  tiffin  which  he  took,  washed  his  hands  and 
resumed  his  inimitable  posture.  We  sat  still  in  silence  for  some 
time  and  took  leave  after  prostrating  to  Sri  Ramana  Bhagavan. 

XIII 

K.  K.  Nambiar 

PEOPLE  WHO  VISITED  Sri  Bhagavan  during  his  life  time, 
could  not  have  failed  to  observe  the  characteristic  pose  in  which 
he  reclined  on  his  sofa  with  eyes  closed  and  his  head  supported 
with  his  left  arm,  particularly  at  the  time  of  Vedaparayana  and 
so  on. 


58 


Some  of  us  devotees  sitting  around  used  to  watch  him 
intently  during  such  periods.  On  several  occasions  I  used  to 
mentally  pray  to  him  that  on  reopening  his  eyes,  he  should 
bestow  a  look  at  me  and  I  must  say  I  was  never  disappointed. 
So,  it  was  crystal  clear  to  me  that  prayers  to  Bhagavan  need  not 
be  vocal  and  he  felt,  knew,  and  answered  the  inner  prayers  of 
all  his  devotees. 

Conversely,  there  were  also  occasions  when  I  sat  at  the  feet 
of  Sri  Bhagavan  and  intently  meditated  on  his  form  with  closed 
eyes,  and  most  often  when  I  opened  my  eyes,  Sri  Bhagavan 
appeared  to  be  watching  me.  It  is  a  great  comfort  even  now  to 
recall  the  experience  of  those  exquisite  moments  which  stand 
out  so  vividly  in  my  memory.  Time  hasn't  effaced  even  a  fraction 
of  those  vistas. 


XIV 
P.T.  Muthuswami 

MY  JOY  FOUND  no  limit  when  I  had  the  darshan  of  Bhagavan 
Sri  Ramana  Maharshi  on  the  8th  of  June,  1947  at  9.20  a.m. 
Apart  from  Ashram  inmates,  Indians  and  foreigners,  there  used 
to  be  a  stream  of  visitors  both  in  the  morning  and  the  evening. 
Some  visitors,  with  the  permission  of  the  Ashram  authority, 
used  to  take  snapshots  of  Bhagavan  Sri  Ramana  Maharshi. 

In  my  heart  of  hearts  I  was  deeply  thinking  whether  I 
could  be  so  fortunate  as  to  have  a  photo  taken  along  with  Sri 
Bhagavan.  A  good  and  pious  idea  indeed!  But,  the  question  of 
its  fulfilment  was  entirely  left  to  the  entire  grace  of  guru  dev. 


59 


It  so  happened  that  a  rich  and  a  pious  soul  with  a  band  of 
devotees  from  Andhra,  came  to  the  Arunachala  temple  and  then 
to  Sri  Ramanasramam.  They  had  the  darshan  of  Sri  Bhagavan 
in  the  morning  and  they  arranged  for  a  group  photo  to  be 
taken  along  with  him  in  the  evening. 

Sri  Bhagavan  stood  in  front  of  the  small  gate  towards  the 
eastern  side,  facing  Arunachala  Hill.  Another  devotee  and  myself 
were  observing  all  this  very  keenly  from  a  very  respectful  distance. 
One  of  the  devotees  seeing  Sri  Bhagavan  standing,  had  very  wisely 
brought  a  stool  from  the  Ashram,  upon  which,  gurudev  sat.  The 
photo  was  about  to  be  taken  when  the  sarvadhikari,  in  hurrying 
up  to  the  spot,  saw  me  and  another  devotee  standing,  and  asked 
us  to  follow  him.  We  both  immediately  followed  him  and  joined 
the  group  photo.  The  photo  was  taken.  My  happiness  was  beyond 
expression.  I  have  a  copy  of  this  eventful  photo  with  me.  This  is 
how  'kripd  of  Bhagavan  works  miraculously. 

Bhagavan  can  be  compared  to  the  saptha  rishis  of  the  ancient 
times.  Those  who  came  in  contact  with  such  a  great  personality, 
an  embodiment  of  supreme  Self-hood  are  really  blessed.  They 
should  consider  themselves  very  fortunate. 

Those  who  lived  at  Sri  Ramanashram  knew  full  well  how 
punctuality  used  to  be  observed  in  every  activity  of  the  Ashram. 
Even  breakfast,  lunch,  tea  and  supper  used  to  be  served  precisely 
at  7a.m.,  11a.m.,  3p.m.,  and  7.30p.m.,  respectively. 

At  the  ringing  of  the  bell,  Sri  Bhagavan  would  go  to  the 
dining  hall  from  the  main  darshan  hall.  The  devotees  would 
follow  him  with  great  reverence.  He  used  to  sit  in  the  middle  of 
the  dining  hall  and  of  all  the  devotees  sitting  in  rows. 

Different  varieties  of  delicious  dishes  used  to  be  served 
systematically  and  briskly  by  some  of  the  devotees.  Every  variety, 
each  in  small  quantity,  used  to  be  served  to  Bhagavan.  He  used 


60 


to  mix  up  the  food,  vegetables,  chatnys  and  other  things  all 
into  one  paste  and  keep  it  ready. 

When  serving  was  finished  Sri  Bhagavan  used  to  ask, 
"Finished?"  meaning  whether  serving  was  completed. 
Sarvadhikari  replying  in  the  affirmative  used  to  prostrate  before 
him.  Sri  Bhagavan  would  then  cast  a  benign  glance  all  round 
and  would  nod  his  head  signifying  to  commence  eating.  Perfect 
silence  would  be  prevailing  in  the  dining  hall,  although  the 
number  present  would  be  more  than  a  hundred.  Sri  Bhagavan 
would  leave  the  plantain  leaf  after  his  meals,  in  such  a  clean 
manner,  as  it  was  placed,  before  meals  were  served.  Not  even  a 
particle  of  rice  would  be  left  on  it. 

The  very  life  of  Sri  Bhagavan  was  itself  sacred  scripture. 
He  was  moving  Veda  and  Upanishad.  His  teachings  were  through 
silence.  Who  could  have  understood  his  immutable  silence,  the 
very  nature  of  one's  own  Self. 


XV 
N.  N.  Rajan 

BHAGAVAN  SRI  RAMANA  is  a  guru  to  all  those  who  have 
faith  in  him.  He  is  a  rare  combination  of  bhakti  and  jnana. 
Some  devotees  feel  that  they  are  led  through  jnana  towards 
Self-knowledge.  Each  individual  is  helped  or  taught  by  him 
either  through  silence  or  sometimes  by  words  according  to  the 
needs  of  that  person.  Therefore,  one  is  not  aware  what  another 
gets  by  way  of  help  from  the  guru  and  that  becomes  clear  when 
the  devotees  compare  notes  of  their  experience. 


61 


Often  Sri  Bhagavan  clears  the  doubts  in  the  minds  of  the 
devotees  even  before  they  put  questions  to  him.  Devotees  having 
some  problems  which  they  themselves  could  not  solve  come 
there  with  an  ardent  desire  of  asking  Sri  Bhagavan  for  a  solution, 
but  often,  and  to  their  amazement,  they  themselves  find  the 
solutions  of  the  problems  when  they  sit  in  his  presence. 

Such  a  method  of  teaching  is  nothing  short  of  a  miracle  in 
its  subtlest  form.  Miracles,  as  generally  understood,  are 
something  spectacular  and  many  persons  are  under  the 
impression  that  the  greatness  of  a  saint  or  sage  is  directly 
proportionate  to  the  number  of  miracles  he  performs.  That 
way  of  thinking  is  not  correct.  Sri  Bhagavan  says  that  the  greatest 
miracle  is  attainment  of  Self-knowledge  and  all  other  spectacular 
performances  are  of  the  world,  hence  illusory!  He  does  not  admit 
that  he  performs  any  miracles,  but  things  do  happen  which  we 
interpret  in  such  a  way. 

In  this  connection,  it  would  be  interesting  to  narrate  my 
experience.  Once  I  met  an  old  friend  Mr.  K.  A.  in  Poona.  In 
the  course  of  our  conversation,  he  told  me  that  in  1919,  he  was 
informed  by  some  devotees  that  a  peacock  and  a  cobra  played 
with  each  other  in  Skandasram  when  Sri  Bhagavan  was  residing 
there.  To  see  this,  he  and  a  friend  of  his,  decided  to  go  there  and 
verify  what  they  had  heard. 

They  arrived  at  Skandasram  in  the  afternoon  and  sat  there 
for  a  couple  of  hours  hoping  to  see  the  bird  and  the  snake,  but 
they  did  not  appear.  They  felt  disappointed  and  returned  home 
the  same  day  with  the  belief  that  people  circulate  stories  that  are 
not  correct.  I  too  had  heard  about  the  story  of  the  peacock  and 
the  snake  at  Skandasram,  and  I  believed  it  because  I  had  no  cause 
to  doubt  the  intention  of  those  that  told  me  about  it.  I  tried  to 
convince  Mr.  K.A.,  that  miracles  have  no  value  to  gauge  the 


62 


greatness  of  a  saint,  which  according  to  him  have  a  value,  and  he 
put  forward  very  strong  arguments  to  support  his  own  case. 

Mr.  K.  A.  is  a  well-read  old  man,  and  the  conversation 
initiated  a  struggle  in  my  mind  whether  to  believe  or  discard  as 
untrue  what  I  had  heard.  My  mind  was  very  uneasy  for  a  couple 
of  days  and  it  calmed  down  when  it  occurred  to  me  that  the 
peacock  and  the  snake  could  not  have  obliged  Mr.  K.A.  and  his 
friend  during  the  very  short  stay  they  made  at  Skandasram. 

Sri  Bhagavan's  talks  are  very  instructive  and  can  be  easily 
understood  by  those  who  listen  to  him.  He  talks  about  his  own 
experience  in  very  simple  language.  He  generally  speaks  in  Tamil, 
Telugu  or  in  Malayalam.  He  knows  English  but  seldom  speaks 
in  that  language.  People  who  do  not  know  the  Dravidian 
languages  ask  questions  in  English  and  his  replies  are  given  in 
Tamil  which  are  then  translated  into  English  by  an  interpreter 
for  the  benefit  of  the  questioners.  When  he  finds  that  the 
translation  is  not  correct  he  suggests  appropriate  English  words 
to  the  interpreter.  He  writes  and  composes  in  the  three  Indian 
languages  mentioned  above  and  in  Sanskrit  too.  Most  of  his 
works  have  been  translated  into  English  and  other  languages. 
From  the  study  of  such  spiritual  literature  much  benefit  can  be 
derived,  but  one  who  is  earnest  in  the  quest  of  the  Self,  gets 
abiding  inspiration  by  personal  contact  with  Sri  Bhagavan.  Since 
he  knows  many  languages,  it  is  possible  to  converse  with  him 
and  get  more  benefit  than  from  reading  books  alone. 

I  have  had  opportunities  to  talk  to  Sri  Bhagavan  and  one 
of  them  is  mentioned  here.  One  day  I  went  to  see  Gurumurtham 
and  the  garden  near  it.  These  two  places  are  well  known  to 
those  who  have  read  his  biography.  It  is  in  this  garden  that 
Bhagavan's  uncle  recognised  him  as  his  nephew  Venkataraman, 
who  had  left  his  home  some  three  years  earlier.  After  visiting 


63 


the  two  places  I  returned  to  the  Ashram  and  told  Sri  Bhagavan 
that  the  place  now  is  more  or  less  an  open  ground  and  is  not  a 
garden  as  described  by  Sri  Narasimhaswamy  in  his  book  Self 
Realization.  Sri  Bhagavan  immediately  began  to  describe  how 
the  garden  was  then  and  proceeded  further  to  describe  his  life 
during  his  sojourn  there.  He  said  that  he  was  taking  shelter  in  a 
lamb  pen  which  was  hardly  high  enough  for  him  to  sit  erect.  If 
he  wanted  to  stretch  his  body  on  the  floor,  most  of  it  was  out  in 
the  open.  He  wore  only  a  kaupina  and  had  no  covering  over 
the  rest  of  his  body.  If  it  rained  he  remained  on  the  wet  and 
sodden  ground  where  sometimes  water  stood  a  couple  of  inches 
deep!  He  did  not  feel  any  inconvenience  because  he  had  no 
'body  sense'  to  worry  him.  He  felt  that  sunrise  and  sunset  came 
in  quick  succession.  Time  and  space  did  not  exist  for  him!  He 
then  tried  to  describe  the  state  of  his  awareness  of  the  Self  and 
his  awareness  of  the  body  and  things  material.  To  him  the  sun 
of  absolute  Reality  made  the  phenomenal  world  disappear  and 
he  was  immersed  in  that  light  which  dissolves  diversity  into  the 
One  without  a  second! 

It  is  not  possible  to  express  exactly  the  thrill  felt  by  all  of 
us  who  were  listening  to  him.  We  all  did  feel  as  if  we  were 
transported  into  that  condition  to  attain  that  which  we  are 
striving  for.  There  was  a  deep  silence  in  the  hall  for  some  time 
during  which  everyone  present  felt  peace  and  happiness.  It 
occurred  to  me  then  that  Bhagavan,  while  narrating  any  incident 
of  his  life,  takes  the  opportunity  to  teach  us,  and  I  told  him  that 
when  he  spoke  we  felt  as  if  it  was  easy  to  experience  the  Self  and 
even  as  if  we  had  glimpses  of  it.  We  asked  him  exactly  how  one 
has  to  proceed  to  be  in  that  state  of  continuous  awareness  which 
he  had  described.  Sri  Bhagavan,  with  his  sparkling  eyes,  looked 
at  me  benevolently,  raised  his  hands  and  said, 


64 


"It  is  the  easiest  thing  to  obtain.  The  Self  is  always  in  you, 
around  you  and  everywhere.  It  is  the  substratum  and  the  support 
of  everything.  You  are  experiencing  the  Self  and  enjoying  it 
every  moment  of  your  life.  You  are  not  aware  of  it  because  your 
mind  is  on  things  material  and  thus  gets  externalised  through 
your  senses.  Hence  you  are  unable  to  know  it.  Turn  your  mind 
away  from  material  things  which  are  the  cause  of  desires,  and 
the  moment  you  withdraw  your  mind  from  them  you  become 
aware  of  the  Self.  Once  you  experience  the  Self,  you  are  held 
by  it,  and  you  become   'That  which  is  the  One  without  a 

When  he  finished  his  words  I  again  felt  in  the  same  way  as 
I  felt  on  the  first  day  I  met  him  in  1923  —  that  Sri  Bhagavan  is 
a  big  power  house  and  his  power  or  grace  overwhelms  us, 
whatever  our  ideas  may  be  and  leads  us  into  the  channel  flowing 
into  the  Self.  It  became  clear  to  me  that  we  can  have  the 
knowledge  of  the  Self  if  only  we  take  the  path  into  which  a 
realised  person  or  guru  directs  us. 

In  conclusion  I  wish  to  say  that  one  should  constantly 
meditate  that  one  is  not  the  body  or  the  mind.  Unless  the  mind 
is  in  contact  with  the  senses,  we  cannot  get  any  report  from  our 
ears,  eyes  etc.  We  must  therefore  still  the  mind  by  disconnecting 
it  from  the  senses  and  thus  get  beyond  them  to  experience  the 
Self.  What  we  learn  from  sense  perception  is  only  relative 
knowledge.  Knowledge  of  the  Self  can  be  learnt  only  by  sitting 
at  the  feet  of  one  who  has  realised  it;  what  others  tell  you  is 
mere  talk.  Bhagavan  Sri  Ramana  is  one  of  those  Masters  who 
has  realised  the  Self  and  like  all  other  Masters  who  preceded 
him,  he  helps  us  proceed  rapidly  to  attain  Self-knowledge. 


XVI 


65 


Madhavi  Ammal 


Srimathi  Madhavi  Ammal,  a  staunch  devotee,  was 
fortunate  in  having  many  opportunities  to  talk  to  Sri 
Bhagavan  freely  and  appeal  to  him  direct  for  upadesa.  Sri 
Bhagavan  made  things  easy  for  her  in  many  ways,  one  of 
which  was  talking  to  her  in  her  native  Malayalam.  He  gave 
a  patient  hearing  to  her  tales  of  woe  which  were  many.  This 
is  visible  in  a  film  on  Sri  Bhagavan  which  is  screened 
occasionally  at  the  Ashram.  The  devotee  seems  to  have  almost 
wrested  the  upadesa  from  the  Guru  by  her  perseverance 
according  to  the  following  narrative  of  hers. 

I  KNEW  FULL  well  that  Sri  Bhagavan  gave  no  formal  upadesa 
(initiation)  but  I  kept  on  asking  for  it  whenever  an  opportunity 
presented  itself.  Invariably  Sri  Bhagavan  used  to  reply,  "Who  is 
the  Guru  and  who  is  the  sishya  (disciple)?  They  are  not  two. 
There  is  but  One  Reality.  It  is  in  you  and  It  can  neither  be 
given  nor  taken.  But  you  may  read  books  for  intellectual 
understanding." 

On  March  12,  1934  after  prayers  at  the  Shrine  of  Sri 
Mathrubhuteswara  I  went  to  the  old  hall.  Only  the  attendant 
Madhava  Swami  was  with  Sri  Bhagavan.  When  I  made  my  usual 
request  Sri  Bhagavan  laid  aside  the  newspaper  he  was  reading  and 
sat  in padmasana,  quite  absorbed.  I  then  recited  a  (general)  hymn 
of  praise  to  the  Guru  in  Telugu  and  also  Aksharamanamalai  in 
Telugu  (the  hymn  on  Sri  Arunachala  by  Sri  Bhagavan).  Sri 
Bhagavan  turned  to  Madhava  Swami  and  said,  "She  has  prayed 
to  Sri  Arunachala."  This  struck  me  as  meaning  that  Sri  Arunachala 


66 


will  give  the  initiation  and  also  that  Sri  Bhagavan  and  Sri 
Arunachala  are  not  two.  Sri  Bhagavan  resumed  his  state  of 
absorption  and  I  had  my  persistent  request  for  upadesa.  But  he 
continued  to  sit  motionless.  Finally  I  begged  of  him,  "Am  I  not  a 
competent  person  to  receive  upadesa?  Sn  Bhagavan  should  himself 
tell  me  about  this.  Even  if  Sri  Bhagavan  confirms  this  how  is  it 
that  I  adopted  him  as  my  Guru  immediately  on  hearing  of  him 
(she  was  just  told  that  a  Rishi  lived  at  the  foot  of  the  Hill)?  Will  it 
all  be  in  vain?"  Immediately  on  my  speaking  thus  I  found  a  bright 
light  emanating  from  Sri  Bhagavans  holy  face,  and  the  effulgence 
filled  the  whole  Hall.  I  could  not  see  Sri  Bhagavans  body  but 
only  the  brilliance.  I  shed  tears  in  profusion.  The  whole  incident 
could  have  lasted  just  two  seconds!  I  prostrated  to  Sri  Bhagavan. 
There  was  a  smile  on  his  face  but  no  movement  otherwise.  After 
a  while  Sri  Bhagavan  turned  to  me  as  if  to  ask,  "Are  you  rid  of 
your  mania?"  Yes,  I  was.  He  then  took  a  piece  of  paper,  wrote  a 
sloka  (verse)  on  it  and  gave  it  to  me  saying,  "You  can  make  use  of 
it  in  meditation." 

This  is  the  sloka: 

I  adore  Guha  the  Dweller  in  the  Cave  of  the  Heart,  the 
Son  of  the  Protector  of  the  Universe,  the  Pure  Light  of  Awareness 
beyond  thought,  the  Wielder  of  the  weapon  of  Jnana  Sakti  and 
the  Remover  of  the  ignorance  of  blemishless  devotees.  1 

And  again  he  smiled  graciously. 

This  was  wonderful  upadesa  indeed  by  a  Master  rare  to 
see.  My  Master  taught  me  the  great  truth  that  there  is  only 
ONE.  The  proper  Guru  is  one  who  shows  what  is.  This  was  but 
a  practical  demonstration  of  the  saying 

"The  Master's  face  reveals  Brahman.  You  attain  Brahman 
through  Grace." 

03  SO 


67 


Recollections 


K.R.K.  Murthy 

WITH  A  VIEW  to  record  Sri  Bhagavan's  voice  and 
preserve  the  same  for  posterity,  someone  raised  a 
discussion  on  the  sound  recording  machines  in  the  presence  of 
Bhagavan.  Sri  Bhagavan  agreed  with  what  they  said,  regarding 
this  wonderful  machine.  Seeing  that  Sri  Bhagavan  was  very 
favourably  disposed  towards  the  same,  they  wanted  to  pursue 
the  matter  further  and  fix  up  a  date  for  recording  Sri  Bhagavan's 
voice.  At  that  moment  Sri  Bhagavan  replied,  "My  real  voice  is 
silence;  how  can  you  record  that?"  In  this  connection  he  narrated 
the  story  of  the  saint  Thandavaraya,  who  by  his  dynamic  silence 
stilled  the  minds  of  several  people,  for  three  full  days. 

Once  when  someone  was  expressing  that  all  sensations 
near  his  hip  were  not  being  felt  for  some  time,  Sri  Bhagavan 
quickly  remarked,  "How  nice  will  it  be  if  the  whole  body 
becomes  like  that?  We  will  be  unaware  of  the  body." 

One  attendant  of  Bhagavan  was  reading  to  Bhagavan  in 
the  night.  The  attendant  heard  snoring  sounds  and  stopped 
reading  thinking  that  Bhagavan  was  asleep.  Immediately 
Bhagavan  questioned  him  as  to  why  he  stopped.  Again  the 
attendant  continued  and  similar  snoring  sounds  proceeding 
from  Bhagavan  made  him  stop  again.  But  Sri  Bhagavan  was 
quite  alert  and  asked  him  to  continue.  Is  it  not  a  job  to  find  out 
when  Bhagavan  is  inattentive? 


68 


Once  Sri  Bhagavan  said,  "If  you  remain  quiet  you  do  the 
greatest  service.  One  who  is  abiding  in  Atma  nishtai  is  always 
doing  greater  service  (sishrusha)  to  the  guru,  than  one  who  does 
some  service  physically."  Guru  is  one  who  shows  the  way  to 
Atma  nishtai  (abidance  in  the  Self)  and  the  disciple  is  one  who 
follows. 

"If  one  wants  to  commit  suicide,  even  a  small  implement 
or  knife  is  sufficient.  For  murdering  others,  bigger  ones  are 
required.  Similarly  for  oneself,  one  or  two  words  are  sufficient 
but  to  convince  others,  books  after  books  have  to  be  written." 

"This  Ashram  is  a  place  where  people  can  stay  and  improve 
and  not  remark  or  criticise.  In  the  beginning  people  come  here 
with  the  best  of  intentions  to  secure  the  grace  of  the  swami. 
After  a  time,  they  begin  to  comment,  £This  is  not  right,  that  is 
not  right',  and  engage  themselves  in  some  kind  of  activity  and 
run  after  power  and  position  and,  as  it  were,  forget  for  what 
they  have  come  here." 

"Always  it  is  safer  to  use  cheap  and  ordinary  items  as  no 
one  then  cares  to  cast  a  greedy  eye  upon  them." 

"One  who  does  the  work  without  the  feeling  of  doer-ship 
escapes  misery  and  unhappiness;  work  then  becomes  more  a 
pleasure  and  not  exacting." 

—  Sri  Bhagavan 


69 


Our  Natural  State 


A  'Pilgrim' 

The  author  of  this  article  is  unknown  but  the  incident 
must  have  taken  place  some  time  after  1946 when  the  answer 
to  D.S.  Sarmas  question  was  first  printed.  The  quotation 
was  first  printed  in  Vedanta  Kesari  in  January  1947  (Vol 
33,  No.  9,  P.  327) 

I WAS  ON  MY  long  cherished  pilgrimage  to  Bhagavan  Sri 
Ramana.  On  the  train  I  was  chewing  the  cud  of  doubt.  In 
the  December  and  January  issues  of  the  Vedanta  Kesari,  I  had 
read  the  answer  Maharshi  gave  to  the  question  put  to  him  by 
Prof.  D.S.  Sarma  as  to  whether  there  was  a  sadhana  period  in 
the  life  of  Sri  Bhagavan  previous  to  his  enlightenment.  Sri  Dilip 
Kumar  Roy  had  put  the  answer  in  a  poetical  garb  under  the 
caption,  "My  yoga"  and  Prof.  Sarma  had  given  his  question 
and  Maharshi  s  answer  under  the  title,  'Sahajasthitht.  I  reproduce 
below  the  answer  of  Sri  Bhagavan, 

"I  know  no  such  period  of  sadhana.  I  never  performed 
any  pranayama  or  japa.  I  know  no  mantras.  I  had  no  rules  of 
meditation  or  contemplation.  Sadhana  implies  an  object  to  be 
gained  and  the  means  of  gaining  it.  What  is  there  to  be  gained 
which  we  do  not  already  possess?  In  meditation,  concentration 
and  contemplation  what  we  have  to  do  is  only  not  think  of 
anything  but  to  be  still.  Then  we  shall  be  in  our  natural  state." 


70 


This  indeed  was  an  intriguing  situation  for  me.  I  had  read 
in  the  'Life  and  Teachings  of  Sri  Ramand  of  the  severe  sadhana 
he  did  in  the  lonely  rooms  of  the  big  temple  at  Tiruvannamalai 
and  in  the  caves  on  the  hill.  Now  here  is  Bhagavan  himself 
denying  it  all!  And  more  than  that,  how  can  illumination  come 
without  sadhana?.  That  was  something  against  the  word  of  the 
scriptures.  However,  I  consoled  myself  with  the  thought  that  at 
the  Ashram,  I  might  have  the  chance  of  placing  my  difficulties 
before  Sri  Maharshi  himself. 

It  was  one  of  those  beautiful  mornings  in  Tiruvannamalai. 
After  my  daily  ablutions  and  duties  I  was  ready  for  the  darshan 
of  Bhagavan.  As  I  approached  the  Maharshi  s  room  I  could  feel 
the  peace  that  was  radiating  from  his  room.  I  entered  the  room 
and  then  came  my  first  shock.  I  expected  to  see  something 
glorious,  a  face  surrounded  by  a  halo,  etc.  I  didn't  find  any  of 
these.  Has  he  not  said,  I  was  reminded,  in  his  answer  that  Self- 
realisation  does  not  mean  that  something  would  descend  upon 
us  as  something  glorious?  Has  he  not  said,  "People  seem  to  think 
that  by  practising  some  elaborate  sadhana  the  Self  would  one 
day  descend  upon  them  as  something  very  big  and  with 
tremendous  glory  and  they  would  then  have  what  is  called 
sakshatkaram. " 

None  of  the  biographies  state  that  Bhagavan  did  any 
sadhana  after  coming  to  Tiruvannamalai.  I  might  have 
interpreted  Bhagavan's  period  of  silence  and  solitude  as  a  period 
of  sadhana,  although  it  has  been  clearly  stated  both  by  Bhagavan 
and  the  writers  who  have  written  about  him,  that  no  sadhana 
was  taking  place  during  this  period. 

That  winning  smile  that  accompanied  his  greeting  me 
meant  more  than  Self-realisation.  He  beckoned  to  me  to  sit 
down  and  I  sat  there  for  more  than  two  hours  not  knowing 


71 


the  passage  of  time.  I  realised  then  that  silence  is  more  eloquent 
than  words.  I  dared  not  break  the  silence  to  raise  my  own  petty 
doubts. 

Later,  though,  I  communicated  my  wish  to  place  my  doubts 
before  the  Maharshi  and  the  consent  came  by  midday. 

When  we  reassembled  before  Sri  Bhagavan  at  three,  I  was 
given  the  typescript  of  the  question  and  answer  to  read  and  I 
read  it  aloud.  I  had  framed  my  question  thus: 

Question:  "You  have  said  here  that  you  know  no  such 
period  of  sadhana;  you  never  performed  japa  or  chanted  any 
mantra;  you  were  in  your  natural  state.  I  have  not  done  any 
sadhana  worth  the  name.  Can  I  say  that  I  am  in  my  natural 
state?  But  my  natural  state  is  so  different  from  yours.  Does  that 
mean  that  the  natural  state  of  ordinary  persons  and  realised 
persons  are  different?" 

Answer:  "What  you  think  to  be  your  natural  state  is  your 
unnatural  state.  (And  this  was  my  second  shock  that  shook  me 
from  the  slumber  of  my  pet  notions).  With  your  intellect  and 
imagination  you  have  constructed  the  castles  of  your  pet  notions 
and  desires.  But  do  you  know  who  has  built  up  these  castles, 
who  is  the  culprit,  the  real  owner?  The  T  who  really  owns  them 
and  the  T  of  your  conception  are  quite  different.  Is  it  necessary 
that  you  put  forth  some  effort  to  come  into  the  T  who  owns 
these,  the  T  behind  all  states?" 

"Would  you  have  to  walk  any  distance  to  walk  into  the  T 
that  is  always  you?  This  is  what  I  mean  by  saying  that  no  sadhana 
is  required  for  Self-realisation.  All  that  is  required  is  to  refrain 
from  doing  anything,  by  remaining  still  and  being  simply  what 
one  really  is.  You  have  only  to  dehypnotise  yourself  of  your 
unnatural  state.  Then  you  have  asked  whether  there  is  any 
difference  between  the  natural  state  of  ordinary  persons  and 


72 


realised  persons.  What  have  they  realised?  They  can  realise  only 
what  is  real  in  them.  What  is  real  in  them  is  real  in  you  also.  So 
where  is  the  difference?" 

"Even  then,  some  may  ask",  the  Maharshi  continued, 
reminding  me  so  vividly  of  those  Upanishadic  rishis,  "where  is 
the  conviction  that  one  s  Self  is  sakshat  all  right,  that  no  sadhana 
is  required  at  all  for  Self-realisation?  Well,  do  you  need  anybody 
to  come  and  convince  you  that  you  are  seated  before  me  and 
talking  to  me?  You  know  for  certain  that  you  are  seated  here 
and  talking  to  me." 

"When  we  read  a  book,  for  instance,  we  read  the  letters 
on  the  page.  But  can  we  say  that  we  are  reading  only  the  letters? 
Without  the  page  of  the  book  where  are  the  letters.  Again  we 
say  that  we  are  seeing  the  picture  projected  on  a  canvas.  No 
doubt  we  are  seeing  the  picture,  but  without  the  canvas  where  is 
the  picture?" 

"You  can  doubt  and  question  everything  but  how  can  you 
doubt  the  T  that  questions  everything.  That  T  is  your  natural 
state.  Would  you  have  to  labour  or  do  sadhana  to  come  into 
this  natural  state?" 


0*5  SO 


73 


A  Spiritual  Torch 


Paul  Brunton 

THE  WORLD  SELDOM  recognises  a  prophet  at  his  true 
worth  during  his  own  lifetime,  but  the  Maharshi  has  been 
more  fortunate.  His  repute  has  begun  to  ripple  out  and  is  destined 
to  go  right  around  the  world. 

He  has  made  it  possible  for  us  to  understand  what  seems 
to  exist  today  only  as  a  mere  echo  of  the  words  of  the  great 
spiritual  teachers  of  former  ages;  the  blessed  nirvana  of  Buddha, 
the  kingdom  of  heaven  of  Jesus,  the  liberation  of  Sri  Krishna, 
and  the  supreme  good  of  the  early  philosophers. 

The  Maharshi  enjoys  that  divine  condition  and 
demonstrates  in  his  own  person  this  unique  attainment.  While 
metaphysicians  argue  vainly  about  the  reality  of  our  world, 
scientists  throw  wet  blankets  around  the  ardours  of  religionists 
and  the  average  man  meekly  looks  on;  this  serene  Sage  knows 
the  eternal  reality,  experiences  the  everlasting  bliss  and  expresses 
the  highest  Truth  in  his  teachings.  Withal,  he 
radiates  these  things  to  every  sensitive  person  who  comes  within 
his  orbit  and  to  every  humble  and  teachable  soul  entering  his 
sanctified  presence. 

His  doctrine  is  as  old  as  the  Hill  of  Arunachala  itself,  yet, 
being  self- found  as  the  result  of  his  own  overwhelming  spiritual 
illumination  and  not  as  the  result  of  studying  other  mens  books, 
it  comes  to  us  as  fresh  in  presentation  as  the  latest  words  of  the 
pundits  of  western  science. 


74 


If  you  can  plumb  the  mind's  depths,  he  teaches,  you  will 
eventually  arrive  at  a  point  where  both  the  thinking  intellect 
and  personal  self  seem  to  disappear,  becoming  reabsorbed  by 
the  hidden  element  out  of  which  they  were  created.  That  element 
is  none  other  than  the  absolute  Being,  the  partless  Reality,  the 
one  Self  underlying,  the  birth  and  death  of  mortal  men  and 
material  worlds. 

The  Maharshi's  practical  course  of  effort  for  discovering 
this  reality  is  extremely  simple,  so  simple,  that  our  modern 
over-active  minds  may  turn  away  unsatisfied  and  seek 
complicated  elaborate  yoga  disciplines  and  yet  it  is  extremely 
subtle.  It  is  as  effective  for  the  devotional  type  of  person  as  for 
the  intellectual. 

Set  up  a  mental  current  of  self-questioning,  teaches  the 
sage,  attempt  to  ferret  out  what  you  really  are,  and  to  trace  the 
living  being  who  thinks  and  feels  within  your  body.  Watch  your 
thoughts  in  the  process  and  then  endeavour  to  pin  them  down 
to  the  stillness  out  of  which  they  arise.  If  you  persist  and  apply 
yourself  to  frequent  meditation  on  this  topic,  you  will  ultimately 
track  thought  to  its  origin,  Self  to  its  lair  and  consciousness  to 
its  primal  partless  state. 

The  personal  sense  of  T  will  collapse  and  disappear,  being 
replaced  by  the  impersonal  sense  of  That,  the  absolute  spirit 
which  breathes  life  into  us  all,  which  not  only  maintains  the 
existence  of  your  mind  and  body  but  also  the  minds  and  bodies 
of  all  creatures. 

This  technique  of  Self-enquiry  is  really  more  simple  than 
the  ancient  systems  of  yoga,  and  should  therefore  be  easy  to 
practise.  Because  of  its  subtle  nature,  however,  and  of  our 
numerous  tendencies  towards  excessive  mental  and  material 
activity,  it  becomes  difficult.  The  most  effective  way  of 


75 


overcoming  that  difficulty  which  I  know  and  of  which  the 
ancient  Upanishads  often  remind  us,  is  to  seek  out  the  society 
of  the  Brahman-knowers,  the  spiritually  illumined,  and  to  sit  at 
their  feet,  as  the  same  texts  poetically  put  it. 

The  Maharshi,  in  his  modesty,  will  hardly  ever  refer  to  this 
fact,  but  those  of  us  who  have  basked  in  his  spiritual  sunshine 
have  found  the  way  to  the  spirit  made  easier.  For  he  continually 
broadcasts  telepathically  the  divine  atmosphere  which  has  now 
become  his  very  nature.  In  effect,  he  mysteriously  communicates 
his  spiritual  calm  to  our  troubled  souls. 

This  investigator  of  the  soul's  domain  has  solved  stubborn 
questions  which  have  puzzled  the  thinkers  amongst  men  since 
reason  first  evolved.  Western  scientific  psychology  is  heading 
straight  for  the  explanation  which  he  gives  of  that  apparent 
mixture  of  beast  and  angel  called  man.  The  Maharshi  s  method 
of  psychoanalysis  is  far  removed  from  the  queer,  muddled 
method  of  Freud,  whose  materialistic  and  sexual  emphasis  caused 
him  to  miss  the  divine. 

The  reward  which  waits  for  those  who  practise  the 
technique  advocated  by  the  Maharshi  is  nothing  less  than  nirvana 
itself,  at  the  most,  and  mental  tranquillity  at  the  least.  Those 
who  think  that  the  nirvana  of  the  sage  is  a  kind  of  never  ending 
boredom  should  spend  a  few  months  in  his  society.  The 
experience  will  correct  their  mistake  and  make  good  their 
ignorance. 

When  I  first  travelled  around  India  interviewing  her  holy 
and  learned  men,  I  was  amused  to  note  how  their  numerous 
theories  and  explanations  contradicted  each  other.  The  trouble 
was  that  the  dust  of  so  many  generations  has  gathered  upon  the 
sacred  texts  and  scholarly  books  that  the  real  meaning  of  these 
volumes  has  been  overlaid. 


76 


Scarcely  one  of  those  who  granted  me  audience  could 
speak  from  personal  experience,  and  most  could  only  quote 
the  opinions  of  others.  But  the  Maharshi  s  teachings  flow  out  of 
his  own  original  teachings,  realization  of  Truth,  and  to  that 
extent  he  stands  solitary  as  the  peak  of  Arunachala  itself.  He 
illustrates  perfectly  those  words  of  the  great  yogi,  Patanjali,  'The 
seer  abides  within  himself,  for  he  ever  dwells  within  that  sacred 
centre  wherein  God  speaks  to  man . 

Even  while  I  write,  a  grey  squirrel  hops  into  the  Ashram 
hall,  plays  purposelessly  for  a  while,  and  then  squats  contentedly 
under  the  Maharshi  s  divan.  You  are  as  safe  there,  brother  squirrel, 
as  on  your  own  sheltering  tree,  for  the  sage's  attitude  towards 
you  is  no  different  from  your  Creators.  There  is  nothing  but 
love  in  his  heart  towards  all  creatures  and  even  if,  perchance 
you  were  to  bite  him,  he  would  not  hit  you  in  return. 

Since  that  day  when  I  first  found  him,  absorbed  in  the 
mysterious  trance  of  samadhi,  I  have  travelled  in  many  lands 
but  always  my  thoughts  turned  towards  Tiruvannamalai  as  the 
Muhammedan  turns  his  face  during  prayer  towards  Mecca.  I 
knew  that  somewhere  in  the  wilderness  of  this  world  there  was 
a  sacred  place  for  me.  Since  that  day,  it  has  become  a  sacred 
place  for  many  others  who  have  never  left  Europe  and  America. 
For  at  the  sage's  feet,  I  picked  up  a  spiritual  torch  and  carried  it 
to  waiting  souls  in  the  lands  of  the  west.  They  welcomed  the 
light  with  eagerness.  There  should  be  no  virtue  to  be  accredited 
to  me  for  that,  for  whatsoever  benefit  has  accrued  to  Western 
seekers  comes  from  the  torch  which  was  lit  by  the  Maharshi 
himself.  I  was  only  the  unimportant  "link  boy",  the  humble 
carrier.  And  now  that  I  have  returned  to  the  ever  luring  Hill  of 
the  Holy  Beacon,  I  pray  the  gods  of  destiny  that  they  may  keep 
the  captive  here  for  many  years. 


77 


Bhagavan  Treated 
for  Eczema 

T.K.S. 

SOMEWHERE  ABOUT  1935  a  doctor  friend  of  mine  visited 
the  Ashram  and  stayed  with  Bhagavan  for  over  six  weeks.  He 
was  deeply  pious  and  devoted  to  Sri  Ramanuja  Sampradaya.  His 
devotion  to  Bhagavan  Sri  Ramana  Maharshi  was  equally  great. 
He  was  a  great  congress  worker.  I  remember  that  he  was  a  good 
friend  of  Swamy  Ramananda  of  Hyderabad,  for  I  saw  him  in  his 
company,  when  the  Swamiji  visited  Bhagavan  at  the  time  of  the 
Government  of  India's  police  action  against  the  Nizam's  State. 
Later  this  doctor  himself  became  a  minister  of  the  state  and  was 
in  charge  of  the  finance  portfolio. 

The  doctor's  visit  synchronised  with  the  occasion  when 
Bhagavan  had  an  attack  of  eczema  for  which  he  was  being  treated 
by  the  local  doctors.  This  doctor  being  more  qualified  than 
others  took  the  lead  in  treating  Bhagavan.  The  treatment  went 
on  for  about  a  fortnight.  Patches  of  white  ointment  were  seen 
all  over  Bhagavan's  body.  After  a  fortnight,  the  disease  seemed 
to  get  under  control.  The  doctor  was  happy  and  congratulated 
himself  that  he  had  the  opportunity  to  treat  Bhagavan  with 
success. 

Lo!  His  elation  was  short  lived.  The  disease  burst  out  again 
with  redoubled  vigour.  The  doctor  said  to  me  that  it  was  a  lesson 


78 


to  him  to  curb  his  ego  and  continued  the  treatment  with  great 
humility  and  prayerfulness,  praying  to  Bhagavan  that  he  must 
effect  the  cure  himself  and  that  he  (the  doctor)  was  but  his 
instrument. 

The  divine  patient  now  seemed  to  make  steady  progress 
and  gave  consolation  to  the  doctor  that  his  prayer  was  being 
heard.  The  doctor  oscillated  between  elation  and  curbing  of  his 
ego  according  to  the  disease  as  it  decreased  or  increased.  All 
along  this  course  of  treatment  and  from  the  time  the  doctor 
friend  arrived  at  the  Ashram,  I  had  the  pleasure  of  his 
acquaintance  and  of  talking  to  him  about  Bhagavan.  We  used 
to  sit  until  late  in  the  night  and  talk  and  talk  about  Bhagavan, 
so  absorbed  in  our  conversation  that  we  had  no  sense  of  space 
or  time. 

It  was  the  month  of  December  and  Bhagavan \  jayanthi 
was  arriving.  I  used  to  talk  to  my  doctor  friend  about  the 
speciality  of  jayanthi  darshan,  for  on  the  jayanthi  day 
Bhagavan  had  a  special  glow  of  light  about  him  and  his  starry 
eyes  shed  a  special  lustre  and  those  around  experienced  the 
ambrosia  or  the  elixir  of  life.  It  is  for  experiencing  this  light 
or  bliss  of  being  that  devotees  flocked  to  him  from  near  and 
far.  Though  this  experience  was  obtained  on  normal  days 
too,  it  was  very  intense  on  particular  occasions  like  jayanthi, 
Mahapooja  and  Karthikai  days,  as  also  it  was  when  great  souls 
met  him. 

It  is  of  this  special  favour  to  devotees  that  I  was  telling  my 
doctor  friend.  I  used  to  call  it  the  special  grace  of  Bhagavan  on 
the  jayanthi  occasion. 

It  was  at  this  time  that  Bhagavan  was  putting  the  eczema 
ointment  over  his  body.  What  could  be  the  nature  of  this  jayanthi 
dream?  This  was  the  anxiety  of  my  doctor  friend  and  he  used  to 


79 


ask  me  often,  "Mr.  Iyer,  how  will  Bhagavan  give  special  darshan 
to  his  devotees  with  these  white  paints  and  patches  on  him?  I  am 
sorry  that  I  shall  not  have  the  fortune  of  having  it.  Why  should 
he  have  this  disease  at  this  time  when  I  am  visiting  him?" 

I  used  to  reply,  "Wait  and  see  if  he  will  be  Bhagavan  your 
patient,  or  the  Bhagavan  of  my  description  dispensing  special 
grace  on  the  jayanthi  occasion." 

The  jayanthi  day  came.  There  were  the  usual  decorations, 
gathering  of  devotees,  pujas,  music  etc.  Bhagavan  was  seated  in 
a  specially  decorated  pandal.  All  the  same  he  was  to  my  doctor 
friend  still  his  patient  Bhagavan  and  not  the  Bhagavan  of  my 
description.  I  was  not  sorry  that  Bhagavan  was  going  to  belie 
my  expectation  and  that  of  other  devotees  who  were  accustomed 
to  have  the  jayanthi  gift  of  Bhagavan.  (They  used  to  call  it 
Bhagavan 's  jayanthi  gift).  I  was  only  sorry  for  my  doctor  friend. 

It  was  9  a.m.  on  the  jayanthi  morning.  All  eyes  were  riveted 
on  Bhagavan.  There  were  the  longing  prayers  of  the  souls 
gathered  around  Bhagavan.  Suddenly  there  appeared  the  special 
features  of  Bhagavan  on  his  face  and  eyes.  The  nija  mouna  bhava, 
its  fullness  expressing  itself  as  Atma  Rama  -  Muditha  vadana 
and  Dakshinamurthi.  The  Bliss  of  his  Being  ebbing  over  his 
countenance  beautifying  it,  true  to  the  words  of 
Dakshinamuthis  names:  Sundara,  Sundaray  Sundara,  I  am  the 
perfection  of  beauty  of  the  inner  Self.  I  am  T.  Ahamevaham. 

The  peace  of  his  Being  permeated  the  atmosphere  and  all 
those  that  were  gathered  around,  keeping  them  enthralled  in 
the  grace  that  was  his.  The  peace  that  passeth  all  understanding. 
The  unborn  {Ajayamana)  was  revealing  himself  through  a  form. 
Bhagavan  was  Bhagavan  telling  us  without  telling  Tat  Twam  Asi 
(That  Thou  art). 

"  Tat  Twam  Asi,  Tat  Twam  Asi"  nithyam. 


80 


I  whispered  to  my  doctor  friend  to  tell  me  if  Bhagavan 
was  his  patient  Bhagavan  or  Jayanthi  Ramana  Bhagavan.  He 
could  only  nod  his  head  in  acceptance  of  my  remarks.  He  was 
all  spellbound  and  in  wonder.  He  remarked  later,  "Mr. 
Sundaresh,  I  have  lived  to  see  this  great  marvel.  Who  would  say 
he  is  like  any  of  us?  Yet  he  condescends  to  be  one  of  us  and  that 
is  our  great  fortune.  My  patient  is  my  darling  and  God." 


81 


Sri  Ramana 


Major  A.W.  Chadwick  (Sadhu  Arunachala) 

The  author  was  a  well-known  and  ardent  devotee  of 
Sri  Bhagavan,  who  stayed  at  the  Ashram  for  over  a  quarter 
of  a  century  without  any  thought  of  return  to  England.  He 
used  to  spend  many  hours  in  meditation  adhering  strictly  to 
a  regular  time-table.  He  was  a  model  of  steadfast  sadhana 
which  he  kept  up  afier  Bhagavans  Mahasamadhi  till  the 
end  of  his  life  in  1962. 

RAMANA  MAHARSHI  WAS  UNIQUE  in  that  he  was  an 
^  out  and  out  advaitin.  There  were  no  half-measures  with 
him.  Now  to  be  an  advaitin  of  this  description  is  extremely 
difficult.  While  for  most  of  us,  it  is  all  intellectual  gymnastics, 
for  him  it  was  his  life.  At  the  early  age  of  sixteen  he  had  realized 
the  Self,  and  had  never  swerved  from  it  or  come  down  to  a 
lower  function  ever  after.  When  he  was  asked  about  his 
movements  in  the  temple  and  his  period  of  mounam,  if  his 
state  had  not  become  more  stabilized  as  a  result  of  this  sadhana 
he  emphatically  stated  that,  "No  change  had  occurred,  nothing 
new  since  then  had  ever  happened.  Its  the  same  now  as  then." 

But  for  himself  he  saw  nothing  wonderful  in  it.  It  was  the 
natural  state  and  it  was  really  strange  that  others  should  find 
any  difficulty  in  realising  or  being  it  themselves.  "You  are  the 


82 


Self",  he  repeatedly  said,  "nothing  but  the  Self.  How  can  you 
be  anything  else?  There  are  not  and  cannot  be  two  selves,  one 
to  know  the  other.  Just  be  yourself!" 

Put  like  this,  of  course,  it  sounds  easy  but  experience  teaches 
us  another  tale.  Every  word  is  true,  but  vasanas  are  so  persistent 
and  desires  of  such  long  standing  that  they  get  in  the  way  and 
prevent  the  pure  vision.  Habits  are  deep  within  us  and  refuse  to 
be  rooted  out. 

Countless  are  the  number  of  existences  lived  in  the  past 
with  which  we  have  been  associated.  Just  to  sit  quiet  and  forget 
them  even  for  a  moment  seems  impossible.  Rather  does  it  seem 
to  cause  those  long  forgotten  existences  to  bubble  up  and  fill 
the  mind  with  their  inanities. 

Yet  sitting  in  his  presence  the  thing  became  so  transparent 
that  one  was  convinced  for  the  time  being,  that  all  troubles 
were  ended,  and  one  was  forced  back  on  oneself  in  spite  of  all 
obstacles.  And  this  was  the  wonder  of  his  presence. 

It  was  not  in  the  few  words  he  set  on  paper  or  the  verbal 
instructions  he  gave  to  sincere  enquirers  that  his  real  teaching 
lay  but  in  his  silent  presence.  Then  questions  would  drop  away 
unasked,  difficulties  of  meditation  vanished  and  the  mind 
became  still.  It  was  unbelievable  how  easy  it  suddenly  became. 

Not  only  the  effect  of  his  presence  but  the  shining  example 
of  himself,  left  indelible  marks  on  those  who  had  the  good  fortune 
to  spend  some  time  with  him.  There  was  no  use  in  saying  it  could 
not  be  done.  Here  was  one  who  had  done  it.  One  might  tell  oneself 
that  the  state  could  be  nothing  but  one  of  blankness  and  convince 
oneself  that  it  was  not  to  be  desired  but  here  was  he,  exhaling  bliss 
which  overflowed  out  of  its  superabundance  to  even  the  meanest 
of  us  sitting  there  with  him.  It  was  marvellous!  Was  there  ever 
another  like  him?  What  silent  power!  And  what  a  fountain  of  hope! 


83 

Sri  Bhagavan  and  the 
Mother's  temple 

Major  A.W.  Chadwick  (Sadhu  Arunachala) 

BHAGAVAN  WAS  DEEPLY  interested  in  the  construction 
of  the  shrine  built  over  his  mothers  samadhi.  He  attended 
every  function  in  connection  with  it,  placing  his  hands  in 
blessing  on  the  various  objects  that  were  to  be  enclosed  in  the 
walls.  At  night,  when  no  one  was  about,  he  would  walk  round 
and  round  the  construction  consecrating  it.  That  he  should  take 
such  a  demonstrative  part  in  anything  has  a  very  deep 
significance.  It  was  extremely  rare  and  has  been  doubted  by 
many,  but  I  myself  was  an  eye-witness  to  these  things  and  can 
vouch  for  their  truth. 

He  took  a  personal  interest  in  the  cutting  of  the  Sri  Chakra 
Meru  in  granite  (pyramidal  form),  which  was  installed  in  the 
completed  temple  and  is  regularly  worshipped.  This  is  about 
one  and  a  half  feet  square  and  proportionately  high.  At  the 
time  of  the  kumbabhishekam  on  the  penultimate  night  before 
the  sacred  water  was  poured  over  the  images,  he  personally 
supervised  the  installation  in  the  inner  shrine.  It  was  an  extremely 
hot  night  and  with  three  charcoal  retorts  for  melting  the  cement 
adding  to  the  heat.  It  must  have  been  intolerable  inside  the 
airless  cave  of  the  inner  shrine.  Yet  for  approximately  one  and  a 
half  hours  Bhagavan  sat  there  telling  the  workmen  what  to  do. 


84 


On  the  last  night  of  the  function  he  went  in  procession, 
opening  the  doors  of  the  new  hall  and  temple  and  passing 
straight  up  into  the  inner  shrine,  where  he  stood  for  some  five 
minutes  with  both  hands  laid  on  the  Sri  Chakra  in  blessing.  I 
happened  that  night  to  be  at  his  side  the  whole  time.  This  was 
unusual,  as  I  deliberately  avoided  taking  a  prominent  part  in 
such  things,  preferring  to  watch  from  the  back. 

Strangely,  something  made  me  keep  by  him  on  this 
occasion  and  on  account  of  this  I  was  able  to  understand  his 
deep  interest  in  the  temple  and  especially  in  the  Sri  Chakra.  It 
was  because  of  this  knowledge  that  I  was  instrumental,  after 
Bhagavan's  passing,  in  persuading  the  Ashram  authorities  to 
institute  the  Sri  Chakra  pujas  six  times  a  month. 

The  explanation  for  this  unusual  action  on  Bhagavan's  part 
may  be  found  in  the  necessity  of  Siva  always  to  be  accompanied 
by  Shakti.  The  world  would  stop  otherwise.  On  the  only  occasion 
when  such  a puja  was  performed,  shortly  after  the  dedication  of 
the  temple  during  the  life  of  Bhagavan,  he  refused  to  go  for  his 
evening  meal,  but  insisted  on  remaining  a  witness  of  it  until 
the  end.  Someone  remarked  how  magnificent  it  had  been  and 
that  it  would  be  a  good  thing  if  such  pujas  could  be  performed 
regularly,  "Yes,  but  who  will  take  the  trouble?"  asked  Bhagavan. 
Trouble  is  being  taken  now  and  it  undoubtedly  has  the  blessings 
of  Bhagavan. 


eg  so 


85 


The  Immutable 
Atmosphere 

N.  O.  Mehta 

DILIP  KUMAR  ROY  and  myself  reached  Tiruvannamalai 
at  about  7  p.m.,  17th  February  1949  after  a  tiresome  and 
dusty  journey.  Our  discerning  hostess,  a  Parsi  lady,  was  rightly 
more  concerned  about  our  having  the  darshan  of  Bhagavan,  as 
the  Maharshi  is  universally  called  there,  and  consequently  we 
promptly  went  to  the  prayer  hall. 

To  our  pleasant  surprise  we  found  Tiruvannamalai  a 
substantial  town  with  good  roads,  and  electric  lighting.  The 
Ashram  is  one  and  a  half  miles  beyond  the  town,  just  at  the  foot 
of  the  beautiful  Arunachala  Hill,  so  sacred  and  so  powerfully 
evoked  in  some  of  the  wonderful  verses  written  by  the  Maharshi 
years  ago.  The  prayer  hall  is  a  nice,  clean,  fair  sized  building 
which  could  perhaps  accommodate  100  to  150  people  without 
difficulty.  We  went  into  the  hall,  but  either  by  habit  or  by  some 
sort  of  inhibition  or  training,  we  did  not  prostrate  ourselves  in 
the  traditional  fashion.  We  only  made  a  deep  bow  and  took  our 
seats.  The  critical  eye  noticed  the  scrupulous  cleanliness  of  the 
hall,  the  intensely  devout  mien  of  the  people  and  the  utter 
simplicity  and  grandeur  of  the  entire  atmosphere. 

Bhagavan  himself,  lean,  of  medium  height,  wheat 
complexioned,  was  reclining  on  a  sofa  surrounded  by  a  low, 


86 


folding  wooden  barrier  to  keep  the  fervent  worshippers  from 
touching  his  body.  It  is  on  this  sofa  that  the  Maharshi  spends  his 
time  either  sitting  or  reclining  whether  by  day  or  by  night.  Close 
to  the  couch  is  an  incense  burner,  which  is  going  on  all  the  time. 
There  is  one  more  burner  with  incense  sticks  at  the  foot  of  the 
couch.  The  purifying  fumes  are  always  rising  in  the  air.  Sometimes 
the  Maharshi  himself  is  stocking  the  burner  and  putting  in  more 
and  more  incense  in  the  bowl.  Just  on  the  side  of  the  couch  is  a 
high  stool  with  a  time  piece,  a  table  lamp  and  a  few  bottles  of 
medicine.  In  front  of  the  sofa  is  a  small  book  case  with  a  few 
books  in  English  and  in  Tamil,  principally  of  the  Maharshi  s  own 
writing.  I  counted  five  wall  calendars  hung  at  the  odd  corners 
including  one  containing  a  portrait  of  Jawaharlal  Nehru. 

People  were  squatting  cross  legged,  some  with  eyes  shut, 
some  eagerly  looking  at  Bhagavan,  but  all  absolutely  silent. 
People  were  coming  in  and  going  out  after  doing  the  prostration. 
All  this  homage  left  the  Maharshi  untouched,  or  was  it  only 
my  illusion,  for  those  wonderful  eyes  seemed  to  take  in 
everything  even  though  they  had  a  faraway,  distant  look. 

Prayers  from  the  Upanishads were  being  recited  by  three  young 
disciples.  I  felt  the  magnificent  rhythm  of  the  Sanskrit  language 
more  powerfully  than  I  have  ever  felt  it  before.  I  immediately 
realized  how  the  great  mantras  and  the  verses  of  the  Vedas  and  the 
Upanishads  must  have  sounded  in  a  bygone  age  at  the  morning 
and  evening  prayers  in  forest  hermitages.  The  recitation  was 
wonderful,  the  intonation  accomplished  and  egoless.  One  was 
immediately  hushed  to  devout  silence.  The  prayers  were  wound  up 
with  the  invocation  to  Bhagavan  Ramana  himself. 

How  is  one  to  describe  the  atmosphere?  1  have  referred  to 
the  trifles  because  though  they  attracted  my  attention  on  the 
first  evening,  they  ceased  to  have  any  significance  the  very  next 


87 


morning.  All  that  I  felt  was,  that  I  was  face  to  face  with  a  Reality 
which  transcended  all  that  I  had  dreamt  of  him.  Here  was  a 
great  sage  whose  darshan  was  undoubtedly  a  privilege.  I 
instinctively  felt  that  here  was  India  at  its  highest,  for  here  was 
the  deepest  realization  of  the  Reality  transcending  all  mundane 
factors  and  bringing  peace  which  passes  all  understanding.  Let 
me,  however,  get  along  with  trifles,  for  even  they  may  have 
some  usefulness. 

At  7.30  p.m.  was  the  evening  meal  and  some  thirty  to 
forty  people  sat  down  to  a  simple  meal,  irrespective  of  race  or 
rank,  with  the  Maharshi  occupying  a  corner.  Rice  and  curry  are 
served,  some  pulses  and  sometimes  little  vegetable  delicacies  on 
a  plantain  leaf.  The  Maharshi  is  the  most  careful  diner  of  all, 
for  he  leaves  no  particle  of  surplus  food  on  his  platter.  Food  is 
served  to  all  servants  and  masters  by  the  very  people  who  render 
service  to  the  Maharshi,  the  same  who  look  after  the  Ashram 
and  who  chant  those  wonderful  verses  from  the  Vedas  and  the 
Upanishads  at  the  morning  and  evening  prayers.  Here  was  truly 
the  hermitage  of  a  saint  where  nothing  mattered  but  an  unceasing 
effort  to  know  and  feel  the  eternal  Brahman. 

The  Maharshi  finishes  his  meal  quietly  and  slowly,  but  the 
diners  leave  the  hall  as  they  please,  and  so  far  as  the  Maharshi's 
presence  for  the  day  is  concerned,  it  is  all  over  with  the 
completion  of  the  evening  meal.  There  is  a  radio  set  in  a  corner 
of  the  prayer  hall.  The  Maharshi  is  interested  in  everything 
including  the  feeding  of  monkeys,  peacocks  and  squirrels. 

After  the  meal  we  left  the  Ashram  to  go  to  our 
accommodation  across  the  road.  There  are  some  charming  little 
cottages,  which  have  been  built  by  the  people  who  have  been 
regularly  coming  to  have  the  darshan  of  Bhagavan  and  with 
some  luck  one  can  have  one  of  these  cottages.  However,  the 


88 


creature  comforts  to  which  we  were  used  no  longer  mattered. 
We  were  in  a  world  totally  different  from  the  one  we  had  left 
behind.  The  values  were  also  different  and  all  that  was  important 
now  was  to  get  up  in  time  for  the  morning  prayers  at  4  a.m. 

It  is  difficult  to  reproduce  the  atmosphere  of  the  morning 
prayers.  The  lights  are  still  on.  The  Maharshi  is  holding  his  hands 
over  the  incense  burner,  the  disciples  chant  the  Vedic  prayer  in  a 
firm  and  resonant  voice.  The  stately  rhythm  of  these  prayers 
creates  an  amazing  atmosphere  of  peace  and  sanctity.  For  more 
than  forty  minutes  the  recital  continues  in  an  unbroken  melody 
and  at  the  conclusion,  a  few  verses  are  recited  in  adoration  of 
Bhagavan  himself. 

The  prayers  over,  there  is  an  hour  to  get  ready  for  the 
morning  coffee.  The  low  lying  Arunachala  Hill  looks  singularly 
beautiful  in  the  light  of  the  dawn  and  one  is  aware  of  that 
harmony  between  man  and  nature  which  is  so  essential  to 
balanced  life.  As  one  strolls  out  of  the  Ashram  one  is  aware  that 
Tiruvannamalai  is  a  town  of  sacred  memories,  of  temples  small 
and  big,  and  of  graveyards  dedicated  to  the  memories  of  the 
departed.  There  are  shrines,  some  modest  and  some  more 
pretentious,  built  all  around  the  Hill,  but  the  greatest  monument 
of  them  all  is  the  superb  temple  of  Arunachalam. 

It  was  interesting  to  learn  that  the  custom  of  burial  was  and 
still  is  not  uncommon  among  certain  classes  of  people  in  the  south. 
Unfortunately  however,  the  memorial  stones  are  scattered  on  the 
periphery  of  the  town  and  are  in  a  state  of  complete  neglect,  as  is 
also  the  case  with  some  beautiful  mandapams  and  temples  of  all 
sizes.  It  could  not  have  been  the  decline  of  the  devout  spirit  so 
much  as  the  weakening  and  disintegration  of  economic  life  which, 
once  so  prosperous  as  to  have  built  the  great  edifices,  is  now  no 
longer  able  even  to  afford  their  maintenance.  The  people  are  poor 


89 


because  perhaps  they  have  not  been  able  to  keep  pace  with  the 
march  of  time.  In  the  whole  of  Tiruvannamalai  the  living  centre  is 
the  modest  Ashram  of  Bhagavan,  for  here  the  spiritual  lamp  stays 
burning,  capable  of  igniting  the  fires  in  the  hearts  of  those  who  are 
still  wanting  or  are  prepared  to  receive  the  illumination. 

It  was  fortunate  that  the  next  day  of  our  halt  at  the  Ashram 
was  the  sacred  day  oiMaha  Shivaratri.  Very  early  in  the  morning 
crowds  of  people  were  on  the  march  around  the  sacred  Hill  of 
Arunachalam  and  in  the  Ashram  itself  worship  was  continuous 
for  all  the  twenty  four  hours.  The  great  temple  of  Arunachalam 
was  illuminated  but  the  resources  of  the  people  were  far  too 
attenuated  to  permit  adequate  lighting.  One  day  when  the 
people  of  India  are  again  strong  and  economically  prosperous 
these  temples  will  perhaps,  be  revived  into  centres  of  inspiration 
and  light,  and  their  vast  mandapams  might  be  restored  to  their 
proper  use  and  status. 

We  attended  the  evening  prayers  on  the  eve  of  our  departure. 
There  could  be  no  farewell,  for  Bhagavans  presence  would  never 
be  forgotten.  We  bade  mental  farewell  to  the  Ashram  for  we 
were  going  to  leave  for  Pondicherry  early  next  morning.  As  we 
were  about  to  leave,  a  friend  said  that  we  could  not  possibly  leave 
the  Ashram  without  taking  the  permission  of  Bhagavan  and  saying 
goodbye  to  him.  We  therefore  repaired  to  the  Ashram  to  intimate 
our  departure  to  Bhagavan  just  as  he  was  going  out  of  the  dining 
hall.  We  felt  like  young  children  going  to  their  elders  for  a  blessing. 
Our  reward,  however,  was  immense,  for  Bhagavan  vouchsafed  to 
us  a  penetrating  glance  of  immeasurable  beatitude  which,  even 
now,  is  one  of  the  most  abiding  memories  of  a  sacred  pilgrimage. 
It  is  astonishing  how  Bhagavans  presence  and  his  usual,  apparently 
humdrum  activities  cast  such  a  magic  spell  over  all  those  who 
were  blessed  to  come  near  him. 


90 

Bhagavan  Ramana 
Maharshi  as  seen  by  a 
Bengali  Devotee 

Jagannath  Chattopadhyaya 

TO  A  BENGALI  who  has  been  accustomed  to  hear  the 
Lord's  name  chanted  with  fervour  and  devotion, 
accompanied  by  dancing  and  sankirtan,  as  introduced  into 
Bengal  by  Lord  Gouranga  more  than  four  hundred  years  ago, 
Bhagavan's  method  of  enquiry  in  absolute  stillness  of  the  mind, 
presents  a  sharp  contrast.  In  the  life  of  Bhagavan  I  am  confronted 
with  a  towering  personality,  the  like  of  which  I  have  never  seen 
or  heard  of  or  come  across  in  books. 

He  never  ran  down  any  religion  or  the  traditions  sponsored 
by  a  religion.  For  instance,  the  Hindu  caste  system  has  become 
the  target  of  criticism  by  preachers  and  reformers  but  Bhagavan 
would  never  attack  it  outright.  When  asked  whether  we  should 
ignore  caste  rules  he  said,  "Not  in  the  beginning.  Observe  them 
to  start  with.  They  serve  as  a  check  on  the  vagaries  of  the  mind 
and  it  is  thus  purified.  On  the  same  subject  he  says,  "Differences 
always  exist,  not  only  in  human  beings  but  also  in  plants,  animals, 
etc.  This  state  of  affairs  cannot  be  helped.  You  need  not  notice 
these  distinctions.  There  is  diversity  in  the  world  but  a  unity 


91 


runs  through  the  diversity.  The  Self  is  the  same  in  all.  There  is 
no  difference  in  spirit.  The  differences  are  external  and 
superficial.  Find  the  unity  and  you  will  be  happy."  1 

I  myself  am  a  disciple  of  Sri  Sitaramdas  Omkarnath 
Maharaj,  the  strict  follower  of  sanatana  dharma,  the  eternal 
dharma  based  on  the  Vedas  and  Upanishads,  to  which  foreigners 
have  given  the  name  'Hinduism'.  He  is  also  an  upholder  of  our 
varnashrama  dharma  or  caste  dharma.  I  therefore  very  much 
appreciate  the  Maharshi's  respect  for  every  religion.  Once,  for 
instance,  he  told  a  Muslim  devotee  to  try  to  understand  and 
follow  what  the  word  'Islam'  means  —  'the  total  surrender  of 
the  ego'. 

Bhagavan's  courageous  message,  reminding  us  of  our 
heritage  of  the  rishis  of  old,  gives  us  faith  and  courage  despite 
the  gloom  of  present  day  materialism,  to  seek  liberation  from 
bondage  to  the  non-self,  the  fake  ego,  which  causes  the  sorrows 
and  frustrations  of  life. 


92 


Remembering  Raman  a 

N.  N.  Rajan 
I 

Miracles  and  Bhagavan 

IT  IS  COMMON  to  see  people  flock  to  those  who  exhibit 
occult  powers  and  perform  miracles  like  curing  ailments, 
floating  on  water,  sitting  buried  under  earth  etc.  but  Self- 
realisation  and  miracle  mongering  are  poles  apart.  The  jnani 
does  not  care  for  miracles.  To  the  jnani  the  control  of  the  senses 
leading  to  realisation  of  the  Self  is  the  only  aim.  This  is  really 
the  greatest  miracle,  and  to  achieve  it  is  the  jnanis  goal. 

The  great  jnani  that  he  was,  Bhagavan  Sri  Ramana  always 
revelled  in  the  natural  state  of  supreme  bliss.  He  did  not  wish  to 
perform  miracles.  In  fact,  he  warned  people  against  it.  This 
does  not  mean  that  he  had  no  powers.  He  had  them  in 
abundance,  as  witnessed  by  many,  only  Bhagavan  never  liked 
to  exhibit  them. 

He  behaved  as  any  ordinary  man  would.  Regarding  the 
manifestation  of  powers  seen  by  devotees,  it  might  be  due  to 
his  infinite  compassion  that  the  miracles  happened  and  he  might 
not  have  been  particularly  intent  on  them. 

One  evening,  while  I  was  sitting  outside  Sri  Bhagavans 
hall,  just  in  his  view,  suddenly  I  noticed  an  expressive  gesture  in 


93 


his  face  as  he  leaned  forward  from  his  reclining  position.  It 
looked  as  though  he  was  calling  me  to  say  something.  I  was 
impelled  to  respond  to  the  gesture  by  getting  up  and  going 
near  him  but  he  did  not  tell  me  anything.  I  resumed  my  seat 
only  to  find,  in  a  couple  of  minutes,  another  jerk  and  a  similar 
expressive  movement  in  him  as  before.  This  time  also  I  was 
stirred  and  when  I  went  nearer  there  was  no  further  indication. 
I  took  my  seat  again  but  now  became  restless.  I  could  not  resist 
the  urge  to  leave  the  place  at  once  with  the  expectation  of  some 
urgent  matter  demanding  my  presence.  I  prostrated  to  Sri 
Bhagavan  and  I  left  the  hall  without  a  word. 

A  major  train  accident  had  happened  at  my  headquarters 
station  about  nine  miles  off.  I  had  been  forewarned  by  Bhagavan 
in  a  strange  manner  as  recorded  above  and  due  to  his  grace,  I  was 
free  from  the  blame  of  not  being  on  the  spot  in  the  emergency. 
Obviously  Bhagavans  warning  was  quite  in  advance  of  the  actual 
happening.  The  way  he  did  it  is  most  noteworthy.  There  was  no 
public  demonstration  or  publicity.  An  act  of  grace  to  a  devotee,  in 
his  own  unique  way  and  with  no  means  of  others  knowing  that  a 
miracle  was  actually  performed.  This  is  typical  of  our  Bhagavan. 


II 

His  Divine  Excellence 

"SRI  RAMANA  MAHARSHI  has  kept  India's  spiritual  glory 
alive  in  our  generation.  He  has  in  his  own  way  made  the  name 
of  India  respected  by  wise  and  enlightened  men  spread  all  over 
the  world  " 


94 


Thus  spoke  Sri  C.  Rajagopalachari  when  declaring  open 
the  Pathala  Lingam  Shrine,  once  the  abode  of  Sri  Ramana 
Maharshi. 

Bhagavan  Sri  Ramana  Maharshi  encapsulated  the  whole 
of  the  Vedas  and  Upanishads  into  a  simple  formula  —  his  famous 
'Who  am  I?'  enquiry.  He  was  too  humble  to  claim  any  originality 
for  this.  Such  enquiry  goes  beyond  the  realm  of  seemingly 
impenetrable  mysteries.  But  by  the  grace  of  Sri  Ramana  his 
followers  unmistakably  reach  the  goal. 

During  the  period  of  his  illness  Sri  Maharshi  appeared 
visibly  unaffected  in  spite  of  the  ailment  which  gave  him 
excruciating  pain.  The  doctors  and  other  devotees  were  baffled 
by  the  utmost  unconcern  demonstrated  by  Sri  Maharshi  for 
the  cruel  ailment.  The  total  detachment  with  which  he  looked 
on  his  suffering  body  was  unique.  By  this  he  demonstrated 
practically  for  our  benefit  that  only  the  body  suffers  and  the 
Atman  (Self)  has  no  share  in  it. 

His  radiant  face  did  not  show  even  the  least  trace  of  pain. 
In  fact  his  eyes  sparkled  with  more  divine  brilliance  than  usual. 
Despite  the  pain  he  was  rigidly  attending  to  his  daily  routine, 
like  going  to  the  bathroom,  attending  to  important  letters,  etc., 
without  deviating  from  his  characteristic  punctuality.  "Let  the 
disease  run  its  course  and  let  the  body  suffer,  but  I  am  ever 
immersed  in  unbroken  Bliss"  —  such  was  his  attitude. 

"A  man  established  in  the  Self  is  liberated  while  in  the 
body,  the  fate  of  the  body  does  not  matter":  this  is  the  Vedic 
truth.  Sri  Ramana  had  entirely  forgotten  all  consciousness  about 
his  occupancy  in  the  human  frame  and  automatically  the 
authorship  had  no  existence  at  all.  He  was  full  of  bliss  indicating 
exuberance.  The  following  episode,  which  occurred  during  the 
same  period  was  a  thrilling  sight  to  witness. 


95 


An  old  teacher  of  Sri  Bhagavan  came  to  see  him.  He  was 
87  and  very  feeble.  Nevertheless  an  overmastering  desire  to  see 
the  God-man  whom  he  had  once  taught  in  second  form,  urged 
him  on  to  Tiruvannamalai.  In  Bhagavan's  presence,  he  recalled 
an  incident  from  that  time  with  great  emotion.  Once  he  had 
asked  young  Venkataraman  to  stand  up  on  the  bench  for  a 
minor  misdemeanour.  But  Venkataraman  gazed  at  him  for  a 
while  with  such  steadiness  and  power  that  his  (teacher's)  will 
withered  rapidly  and  he  reversed  his  decision. 

It  was  a  touching  sight  to  see  the  old  teacher  meet  his  Seer- 
pupil.  Then  the  teacher  asked  Sri  Bhagavan  whether  he 
recognised  him.  Sri  Bhagavan  smiled  broadly  and  graciously 
and  answered:  "Why  not?"  The  teacher  was  visibly  moved  at 
this  and  he  again  asked  Bhagavan  about  his  health.  Sri  Bhagavan 
replied  that  he  was  feeling  all  right.  Throughout  this  very  moving 
but  short  interview  Maharshi  displayed  such  graciousness  and 
cordiality  that  neither  the  old  teacher  nor  those  who  were  close 
by  felt  that  there  was  anything  wrong  with  the  Maharshi. 

These  things  make  us  feel  that  Bhagavan  Sri  Ramana 
Maharshi  is  a  perfect  divine  incarnation,  whose  divine  excellence 
was  lying  dormant  till  he  left  his  home. 


96 


The  Fortunate  Boy 

"SEIN" 

BHAGAVAN  SRI  RAMANA  MAHARSHI  is  well  known 
to  all  as  a  great  Saint.  But  only  a  few  know  of  his 
philanthropy  and  humanitarianism.  Still  fewer  are  those  who 
experienced  his  paternal  and  maternal  affection. 

Of  all  these  one  boy  alone  had  the  most  enviable 
opportunity  of  sleeping  with  Bhagavan  and  enjoying  such 
paternal  treatment.  One  and  only  one  had  that  golden  privilege. 

This  was  in  1920.  Bhagavan  had  come  to  Skandasramam 
from  the  Virupaksha  cave  and  a  small  batch  of  devotees  had 
gathered  round  him.  The  greatness  of  the  Saint  echoed  all  over 
the  world.  Devotees  from  all  parts  of  India  were  coming  for  his 
darshan.  While  males  enjoyed  the  privilege  of  staying  in  the 
Asramam  up  the  hill  with  Bhagavan  the  whole  day,  ladies  were 
not  allowed  to  remain  there  after  sun-set. 

Maharshi  had  a  younger  brother  and  sister,  his  elder  brother 
having  passed  away  prematurely.  This  younger  brother  Sri 
Nagasundaram  Iyer  who  was  working  as  a  clerk  in  Tiruvengadu 
temple  had  a  small  son.  Fortunately  for  Sri  Ramanasramam  to 
be  and  unfortunately  for  his  family,  he  took  sannyasa  when  his 
wife  died  leaving  a  two  year  old  boy  uncared  for.  When  both 
the  parents  left  this  child  an  orphan,  Maharshi  s  sister,  popularly 
known  as  Athai'  (aunt),  took  charge  of  the  child  and  brought 


97 


him  up  with  unstinted  love,  affection  and  care.  It  was  not  only 
because  she  had  no  issue  of  her  own  but  also  because  this  boy 
was  the  only  descendant  of  their  whole  family. 

This  lad  was  taken  twice  or  thrice  a  year  to  Tiruvannamalai 
to  see  Bhagavan  and  his  father  (of  the  poorvasramd),  henceforth 
known  as  Sri  Niranjanananda  Swami,  by  Athai  and  her  husband, 
who  were  living  in  the  far  South.  They  were  provided  with  a 
house  near  the  hill  at  Tiruvannamalai.  Every  morning  Athai 
would  go  up  the  hill  and  return  to  town  in  the  evening,  leaving 
the  boy  behind  at  Skandasramam. 

When  at  first  Athai  hesitated  to  do  this  fearing  to  cause 
any  kind  of  inconvenience  to  the  much  loved  boy,  Bhagavan 
said  that  he  would  be  well  under  his  protection. 

In  the  night  the  boy  would  eat  from  the  sacred  hands  of 
Bhagavan  and  Bhagavan  would  make  him  lie  down  beside  him, 
cover  him  with  a  blanket  and  lull  him  to  sleep.  He  bestowed  on 
him  all  care  that  any  sincere  mother  is  capable  of.  Early  in  the 
morning  he  would  take  the  boy  to  the  spring,  clean  his  teeth 
with  powder,  and  wash  his  face.  Athai  would  rush  up  in  the 
morning.  Bhagavan  with  the  lad  seated  on  a  culvert  would  tell 
the  child,  "There  comes  your  Athai.  See  in  what  hurry  she  runs 
up  to  see  you."  As  soon  as  she  came  up,  Bhagavan  would  tell 
her,  "Take  your  boy,  see,  he  is  safe  and  sound." 

This  abundant  affection  for  the  boy  did  not  in  any  way 
prevent  Maharshi  from  being  strict  with  him.  The  following 
incident  makes  it  clear  that  Bhagavan  gave  the  boy  a  practical 
lesson  which  till  now  he  has  not  forgotten. 

At  Skandasramam  lived  a  monkey  named  Nondi,  which 
was  the  pet  of  all.  Maharshi  had  ordered  that  whatever  food  was 
served  to  his  followers  should  also  be  served  to  the  monkey,  and 
in  case  it  was  absent  elsewhere,  then  its  share  should  be  kept 


98 


separate  for  its  return.  In  such  a  case,  the  food  would  be  kept 
near  a  window  inside  the  cave  and  the  shutter  closed  but  not 
bolted.  This  was  the  custom. 

On  one  of  his  periodical  visits  to  the  Asramam  one  day, 
the  boy  had  enjoyed  the  sweet  dishes  served  to  the  devotees.  He 
had  a  little  more  than  the  usual  share.  The  monkey  being  absent, 
its  share  was  kept  near  the  closed  window.  The  boy,  having  had 
his  share,  went  up  to  the  window  and  began  to  eat  out  of  the 
monkeys  as  well.  Suddenly,  the  monkey  came  and  opened  the 
window  only  to  see  the  boy  eating  its  share.  It  gave  the  boy  a 
blow  on  his  cheek.  Shocked  and  terrified,  the  boy  cried  out  and 
devotees  tried  to  console  him.  Bhagavan  came  to  the  spot, 
understood  the  situation  and  told  the  boy:  "You  deserve  it.  Why 
did  you  want  his  (monkey's)  share.  You  have  had  enough  already. 
You  ought  to  have  been  contented  with  that."  Instead  of 
appeasing  the  beloved  child,  Bhagavan  put  him  right.  The  boy 
became  silent  and  heeded  Bhagavan's  words. 

"Do  not  touch  the  property  of  others.  Be  content  with 
what  you  have.  Share  equally  what  you  have.  Divide  it  with  one 
and  all  around  you.  Help  the  needy.  Be  not  blind  when  a  wrong 
is  committed  before  you.  Correct  it  if  possible,  or  at  least  speak 
out  for  the  right."  These  are  some  of  the  golden  truths  the  young 
boy  was  able  to  grasp  from  the  words  of  the  Maharshi  that  day. 

That  blessed  boy  is  Swami  Ramanananda  (Sri  T.N. 
Venkataraman,  former  president  of  Sri  Ramanasramam,  the 
only  descendant  of  Maharshi  s  family). 


eg  so 


99 


Lest  We  Forget  ... 

I 

Dr.  V.  Srinivasa  Rao 

AMONG  THE  FOREMOST  DEVOTEES,  Dr.  V.  Srinivasa 
.  Rao  found  in  Sri  Bhagavan  the  greatest  solace  and  support 
in  his  life.  He  was  born  in  the  former  native  state  of  Pudukottai 
and  is  happily  still  with  us  at  the  age  of  eighty-seven(inl972).  He 
was  intimately  associated  with  the  growth  of  the  Ashram  for  many 
decades.  Childlike  by  nature  and  outspoken,  his  sincerity  and 
frankness  gained  him  easy  access  and  familiarity  with  Sri  Bhagavan 
who  treated  him  like  a  pet  child. 

Born  poor  and  orphaned  when  hardly  four  years  old,  he 
grew  up  to  be  self-reliant.  He  took  his  degree  in  medicine  and 
surgery,  and  prompted  by  the  good  wishes  of  the  doyen  of  his 
days,  Dr.  Singaravelu  Mudaliar,  he  entered  Government  service. 
He  was  medical  officer  in  several  district  headquarters  hospitals 
and  retired  in  1940  as  the  superintendent  of  the  Royapettah 
Hospital,  Madras.  After  this  he  spent  a  good  deal  of  his  time  in 
the  Ashram  in  a  life  of  devotion  and  service  to  Sri  Bhagavan. 

To  begin  with,  Dr.  Srinivasa  Rao  had  no  interest  in  a  spiritual 
life  and  seemed  more  an  agnostic,  if  not  a  downright  atheist. 
Through  the  friendship  of  spiritually  highly  evolved  people  like 
Sri  S.  Doraiswami  Iyer,  one  of  the  oldest  devotees,  he  came  to  Sri 


100 


Bhagavan.  Before  taking  leave  of  Sri  Bhagavan  he  asked  him, 
"Will  I  come  again  for  your  darshanT  Sri  Bhagavan  with  a  tender 
and  compassionate  look  patted  him  on  the  shoulder  saying, 
"What  will  happen  is  sure  to  happen."  That  was  all!  He  felt 
somehow  thrilled  in  the  core  of  his  being  by  his  touch  and  the 
gracious  reply  which  strengthened  his  faith  and  surrender.  Since 
then  remembrance  of  Sri  Bhagavan  was  constant. 

Sri  Bhagavan  directed  his  attention  specifically  to  Upadesa 
Saram  among  his  works  and  emphasised  ekachintana  (fixing  the 
mind  on  one  thought  —  of  the  One)  as  essential  for  the  mind  to 
get  free  of  thoughts;  and  that  constant  remembrance  of  God  is 
better  than  a  recital  of  hymns  or  silent  invocation.  On  one 
occasion  he  told  Sri  Bhagavan,  "It  is  said  that  one  should 
contemplate  on  God  Vishnu  from  head  to  foot.  Is  that  the  correct 
thing  to  do?"  Sri  Bhagavan  reminded  him,  "It  is  all  One  from 
head  to  foot."  Yet  again  he  discussed  the  efficacy  of  Rama  Japa 
and  the  like  and  asked  Sri  Bhagavan,  "Why  not  do  Ramana  Japa 
instead  of  Rama  Japa?"  to  which  Sri  Bhagavan  gave  his  assent. 

After  1940  Srinivasa  Rao  had  the  unique  opportunity  of 
staying  in  the  proximity  of  Sri  Bhagavan  rendering  some 
personal  service  or  other.  He  treasures  the  privilege  he  had  of 
massaging  Sri  Bhagavans  limbs  and  of  ministering  to  him  during 
his  bodily  ailments  as  a  doctor.  His  simple  but  total  love  and 
attachment  to  Sri  Bhagavans  person  generated  many  happy 
incidents.  Once  Sri  Bhagavans  knee  caps  and  legs  did  not 
function  owing  to  stiffness  and  Srinivasa  Rao  with  folded  hands 
implored  him  to  permit  his  massaging  for  a  few  days  only.  Sri 
Bhagavan  would  not  agree  saying,  "If  allowed  to  do  so  you  will 
continue  endlessly."  But  he  beseeched  him  like  a  child  and  Sri 
Bhagavan  yielded  but  said  it  would  be  strictly  for  ten  days.  Sri 
Bhagavan  was  counting  the  days  and  on  the  last  day  when 


101 


Srinivasa  Rao  was  actually  massaging  his  legs  Sri  T.  P.  R.'s  father 
who  arrived  just  then,  entered  the  old  hall  and  perceiving  the 
doctor  massaging  the  legs  of  Sri  Bhagavan  repeated  a  Sanskrit 
sloka  and  exclaimed,  "Oh,  Raoji,  do  not  give  up  what  you  are 
doing.  You  need  no  other  sadhana  for  your  salvation."  Sri 
Bhagavan  burst  out  laughing  and  said:  "Well,  well;  I  have  been 
counting  these  days  and  waiting  for  this  last  day  and  you  have 
come  to  recommend  continuance!"  Leaving  his  massaging,  the 
doctor  stepped  before  Sri  Bhagavan  and  went  on  doing  obeisance 
imploring  Him  to  listen  to  the  elderly  gentleman  if  not  to  him. 
Sri  Bhagavan  yielded  for  another  ten  days! 

During  the  two  years  preceding  Sri  Bhagavans  Maha 
Nirvana  the  doctor  gave  whole-time  attention  and  assistance  to 
Sri  Bhagavans  health  and  comfort  in  collaboration  with  the 
team  of  medical  men  who  devoutly  rendered  service  during  the 
last  illness. 

He  happily  spent  his  days  remembering  Sri  Bhagavan  and 
his  memorable  days  with  him,  and  deriving  all  the  solace  needed 
from  his  writings  and  utterances,  which  he  revered. 


II 

G.  Lakshmi  Narasimham 

SRI  G.  LAKSHMI  NARASIMHAM  (known  as  '  Narasinga 
Rao'  at  the  Ashram),  after  taking  his  B.L.  degree  stayed  at  Sri 
Ramanasramam  for  three  years  from  1930  to  1933,  along  with 
his  mother  and  sister  Lakshmi,  serving  Sri  Bhagavan.  It  was 
Bhagavans  Grace  that  his  apprenticeship  should  be  under  him. 


102 


Lakshmi  Narasimham's  marriage  also  took  place  at 
Tiruvannamalai  and  when  the  new  couple  came  to  do 
namaskaram  (prostration),  Sri  Bhagavan  remarked:  "Now,  your 
name  (Lakshmi  +  Narasimham)  has  become  meaningful!" 

Sri  Niranjanananda  Swami  (also  known  as  Chinnaswami, 
Sri  Bhagavans  brother)  was  the  Manager  of  the  Ashram  then 
and  his  office  was  near  Bhagavans  Hall.  Like  others  Narasinga 
Rao  also  was  meditating  in  Bhagavans  Hall.  Chinnaswami  asked 
him  to  assist  him  in  the  Ashram  correspondence.  Getting 
Bhagavans  approval  for  it,  Narasinga  Rao  began  going  straight 
to  Chinnaswami  after  bowing  to  Bhagavan.  Later  on  this  earned 
the  humorous  remark  of  Bhagavan:  "Oh!  He  belongs  to 
Chinnaswami,  not  to  the  Hall  group!" 

Chinnaswami  was  a  strict  and  conscientious  taskmaster. 
He  spared  no  pains  in  keeping  an  exact  account  of  money 
received  and  spent.  He  looked  upon  Bhagavan  not  as  his  brother 
but  as  God  Himself,  and  so  considered  it  his  first  duty  to  serve 
Bhagavans  devotees,  accommodating  them  and  attending  to 
their  wants.  The  temple,  the  big  dining  hall  and  well  furnished 
accommodations  are  the  results  of  his  labour  of  love.  Actually 
seeing  Chinnaswamis  one  pointed  spirit  of  service,  G.L.N, 
dedicated  himself  to  serve  him  to  the  best  of  his  ability, 
surrendering  himself  thus  to  Bhagavan.  Saraswati  Ammal  and 
Lakshmi  used  to  do  their  bit  of  service  in  the  kitchen.  From 
their  experience  too  they  were  led  to  conclude  that  whatever 
Chinnaswami  did  had  always  the  distinct  approval  of  Bhagavan. 

Gradually  all  the  members  of  Narasinga  Rao's  family 
became  attached  to  Sri  Bhagavan  and  the  Ashram,  by  bonds  of 
devotion  and  reverence.  They  all  regarded  Chinnaswami  as  a 
true  instrument  of  Bhagavan.  His  eldest  brother,  the  late 
Sambasiva  Rao,  was  a  reputed  lawyer  of  Nellore.  Till  he  passed 


103 


away  in  1962,  he  diligently  served  the  Ashram  in  the  legal  and 
other  spheres.  Sister  Lakshmi  and  brother-in-law,  B.  S. 
Ranganadham,  are  great  devotees  of  Bhagavan.  His  third  elder 
brother,  the  late  Satyanarayana  Rao,  a  teacher  at  the  Mahant's 
High  School,  Vellore,  from  about  1925,  was  the  first  to  be  drawn 
to  Bhagavan  and  it  was  his  influence  which  brought  other 
members  of  the  family  to  Bhagavan.  He  was  deeply  devoted  to 
Bhagavan  and  was  blessed  with  the  proximity  and  touch  of  grace 
of  Bhagavan  during  his  last  illness  within  the  Ashram  premises. 
His  fourth  brother,  the  late  Subba  Rao,  a  teacher  at  Nellore, 
used  to  assist  with  his  Scout  troup  during  Bhagavans  Jayanti 
celebrations.  These  celebrations  and  the  taking  out  of  Bhagavans 
picture  in  procession,  started  by  him,  continue  up  to  this  day  at 
Nellore. 

When  G.  L.  N.  came  to  the  Ashram,  he  did  not  know 
even  a  letter  of  the  Tamil  alphabet.  Impelled  by  Bhagavan  s  grace 
he  picked  up  enough  knowledge  of  Tamil  to  read  and  understand 
Sri  Bhagavans  works  in  the  original.  Thus  it  was  nothing  but 
Bhagavans  grace  that  enabled  him-  to  translate  into  Telugu 
Bhagavans  Five  Hymns  to  Arunachala  and  Forty  Verses  on  Reality. 

Chinnaswami  intuitively  hit  upon  some  devotees  to  help 
him  and  trusted  them  completely.  For  instance,  when  he  went 
to  Rangoon  in  1936  to  personally  select  and  purchase  special 
teak  wood  for  the  construction  of  Sri  Matrubhuteswara  Temple, 
he  put  Narasinga  Rao  in  charge  of  the  Ashram  during  his  absence 
of  over  a  month.  During  the  life-time  of  Bhagavan  and 
Chinnaswami  and  even  after,  right  up  to  the  end,  Narasinga 
Rao  had  been  a  devoted  servant  of  the  Ashram. 


104 


How  1  Came  to 
Bhagavan 

I 

Roda  Maclver 

I HEARD  ABOUT  Sri  Bhagavan  for  the  first  time  in  1939 
from  a  friend  who  showed  me  his  photograph.  I  was  very 
much  struck  by  his  eyes  and  wished  to  go  and  see  him.  My 
desire  to  go  to  Tiruvannamalai  to  Sri  Bhagavan's  abode  could 
not  be  fulfilled  until  1942.  A  friend,  who  had  just  finished 
building  a  house  in  Tiruvannamalai  invited  me  to  stay  with  her. 
I  eagerly  accepted  the  invitation.  When  I  arrived  I  was  indisposed 
for  a  few  days  and  could  not  go  to  the  Ashram.I  heard  that  Sri 
Bhagavan  was  in  the  habit  of  going  for  a  walk  on  the  hill  of 
Arunachala  every  day  at  regular  hours,  so  I  went  there  and  waited 
on  the  path.  On  the  crest  of  the  hilly  path  a  head  emerged  like 
the  rising  sun  and  then  I  saw  the  whole  majestic  tall  figure, 
Bhagavan  Sri  Ramana  Maharshi!  Slowly  he  came  towards  me, 
his  attendant  a  few  steps  behind.  He  stopped  for  a  few  moments 
before  me,  smiling  and  looking  at  me  graciously.  My  heart  was 
beating  fast  and  I  could  not  utter  a  word.  I  cannot  describe 
how  I  felt  really.I  experienced  a  coolness. 


105 


During  the  next  two  years  I  was  visiting  the  Ashram 
constantly.  Then  in  1944  one  day  I  went  into  the  hall.  Sri 
Bhagavan  was  reading  some  papers.  I  sat  down  and  looked  at 
him.  Suddenly  he  put  away  the  papers  and  turned  his  luminous 
eyes  on  me.  I  could  not  stand  his  gaze  so  I  closed  my  eyes,  tears 
streaming  down  my  face.When  I  opened  my  eyes  he  was  still 
looking  at  me.  My  heart  was  flooded  with  joy  and  an  inner 
calmness!  Later  I  went  to  see  a  friend  of  mine,  Sri  Munagala 
Venkataramiah,1  and  told  him  in  detail  about  this  occurrence 
in  the  hall.  He  said  that  I  was  very  fortunate  to  have  received 
initiation  from  Sri  Bhagavan.  There  was  no  doubt  about  it! 

Next  morning  when  I  was  in  the  hall  somebody  asked  Sri 
Bhagavan  what  was  the  use  of  sitting  before  him.  Does  he  give 
initiation?  Sri  Bhagavan  replied  that  initiation  can  be  given  in 
three  ways:  by  silence,  by  look  and  by  touch.  When  saying  "by 
look",  he  looked  at  me.  Then  I  remembered  what  I  was  told  the 
day  before  about  my  experience  and  had  no  doubt  that  I  had 
received  initiation  from  Sri  Bhagavan,  my  most  revered  Master! 

After  a  months  stay  I  returned  to  Bombay,  and  there  was  a 
complete  change  in  my  life.  Worldly  pleasures  ceased  to  attract 
me  and  I  wanted  to  be  alone  as  much  as  possible.  I  decided  to 
leave  Bombay  and  settle  down  in  Tiruvannamalai  but  did  not 
know  where  to  stay.  It  was  difficult  in  those  days  to  get 
accommodation  but  I  knew  Sri  Bhagavan  was  guiding  me  and  so 
I  did  not  worry  much.  He  would  arrange  everything.  And  it  so 
happened  that  two  days  before  leaving  Bombay  I  met  my  husband 
to  be.  He  told  me  to  go  and  stay  in  his  house  in  Tiruvannamalai 
and  so  I  left  happily.  Soon  after,  with  Sri  Bhagavan's  blessings,  we 
got  married  and  this  house  became  my  permanent  home. 

1  Later  known  as  Swami  Ramanananda  Saraswati,  compiler  of  Talks  with 
Sri  Ramana  Maharshi  and  author  of  other  books. 


106 


By  Bhagavans  grace  I  am  now  permanently  settled  here 
and  do  not  intend  to  leave.  He  still  helps  and  guides  me  as 
before  and  often  hears  my  prayers.  His  Presence  now  is  even 
more  powerful  than  when  he  was  in  the  physical  body. 

My  love  for  Sri  Bhagavan  sustains  me  and  is  of  the  greatest 
importance  in  my  life! 


II 

M.  S.  Nagarajan 

SRI  M.S.  NAGARAJAN,  a  staunch  devotee  of  Bhagavan, 
comes  from  Mambattu,  a  village  in  the  Polur  Taluk  of  the 
North  Arcot  District  of  the  state  of  Tamil  Nadu.  Even  as  a 
young  boy  he  used  to  accompany  his  parents  when  they  came 
to  Tiruvannamalai  for  the  yearly  Deepam  festival,  at  which 
time  and  on  similar  occasions,  his  father,  who  was  a  devotee 
of  Bhagavan,  used  to  take  him  to  the  Ashram.  Thus  he  came 
to  know  Bhagavan  in  his  childhood.  When  he  was  ten  years 
old,  his  friend,  who  was  a  nephew  of  Echammal,  spoke  to 
him  about  the  greatness  of  Bhagavan.  He  and  this  friend  used 
to  practise  dhyana  and  yogic  asanas  (sitting  postures)  every 
day  in  the  early  morning.  In  the  evening  they  meditated  on 
Bhagavan.  Sri  Nagarajan  used  to  have  frequent  visions  of 
Bhagavan  and  Lord  Murugan  in  his  dreams.  At  about  this 
time  Ranga  Rao,  an  old  devotee  of  Bhagavan,  now  no  more, 
had  set  up  an  ashram  at  Polur  named  Indra  Ashram,  to  which 
other  devotees  of  Bhagavan  used  to  go  and  talk  about  Bhagavan 
and  other  spiritual  matters.  In  1930,  when  Sri  Nagarajan  was 


107 


15  years  old  Ranga  Rao  brought  him  to  Sri  Ramanansramam. 
Here  he  was  allotted  the  work  of  doing  puja,  and  helping  in 
the  bookstall  etc.  But  what  he  valued  most  was  the  privilege  of 
cutting  up  vegetables  and  grinding  the  pulses  and  coconut 
gratings  for  chutney  in  the  kitchen  with  Bhagavan.  But  most 
of  the  time  he  was  in  the  hall  attending  to  some  minor  work 
or  other.  He  had  thus  the  opportunity  of  listening  to  the  replies 
which  Bhagavan  gave  to  the  questions  put  to  him  by  visitors 
and  devotees.  As  a  result  of  this  he  became  a  firm  believer  in 
the  path  of  Self-enquiry  taught  by  Bhagavan. 

At  the  end  of  six  months  Sri  Nagarajan  went  home  but 
soon  returned  and  stayed  on  for  four  years.  Jobs  were  offered 
to  him  but  he  was  not  interested  in  them  since  the  acceptance 
of  a  job  would  mean  parting  from  Bhagavan.  But  one  day  a 
letter  came  from  his  mother  informing  him  that  a  job  had  been 
found  for  him.  This  letter  came  to  the  hands  of  Bhagavan  along 
with  the  Ashram  post.  After  reading  it  Bhagavan  said, "Look 
here,  a  job  has  been  found  for  you.  Go  and  accept  it 
immediately. "Tears  came  into  the  eyes  of  Sri  Nagarajan  at  the 
thought  of  parting  from  Bhagavan.  But  Bhagavan  said  again, 
"You  can  go  on  Wednesday  and  join  duty  on  Thursday." 
Unwillingly  he  left  the  Ashram.  Thereafter  he  came  to  the 
Ashram  as  often  as  he  could  get  leave. 

While  Sri  Nagarajan  was  employed  at  Sattur  from  1955 
to  1958  he  organised  a  Ramana  AfoW^//  where  Bhagavan s  songs 
like  The  Marital  Garland  of  Letters  were  sung  and  devotees 
meditated  every  day.  Talks  were  given  periodically  at  this  Mandali 
—  Bhagavans  Jayanti  and  Aradhana  were  also  celebrated  in  a 
fitting  manner.  Sri  Nagarajan  also  established  a  school  named 
Sri  Ramana  Vidya  Mandiram  Elementary  School  at  Sattur  in 
memory  of  Bhagavan. 


108 


After  holding  several  important  posts  in  the  firm  of 
Burmah  Shell,  Sri  Nagarajan  has  now  retired.  Since  then  he  has 
lived  for  some  time  in  Tambaram  and  later  joined  the  Ashram 
to  render  his  service. 


Ill 


A  Seeker 


THIS  IS  OFFERED  as  homage  to  Sri  Ramana  and  as  testimony 
to  the  truth  that  all  paths  lead  to  the  same  Peak  and  that  without 
Grace  there  is  nothing,  neither  "light"  nor  "darkness",  neither 
"regress"  nor  "progress";  Grace  is  All. 

Born  into  a  non-religious  Jewish  family,  I  was  raised  in  a 
small  Protestant  town  in  the  southern  United  States.  At  twenty 
I  found  myself  in  a  university  in  the  Northeast  and  extremely 
unhappy.  Till  then  God  had  meant  nothing  to  me;  but  abruptly 
things  changed.  Some  Higher  Intelligence  began  hammering 
me  over  the  head  with  the  fact  of  Its  existence  and  by  moving 
me  through  coincidences  in  which  the  whole  universe  seemed 
to  converge  in  direct  answers  to  my  innermost  questions  of  the 
moment. 

That  summer  I  read  an  autobiography  of  a  yogi.  It 
electrified  me,  literally:  after  reading  it  I  lay  relaxed  before 
sleep,  wondering  if  yoga  were  to  be  part  of  my  path.  An 
oscillating  sound  came  to  me  and  raised  my  mind  inwardly; 
suddenly  there  sounded  an  incredibly  beautiful  herald  of 
trumpets  followed  by  a  flash  of  brilliant  light  which  illuminated 
my  whole  being. 


109 


Needless  to  say,  I  took  this  as  a  "yes"  to  my  question,  and 
that  fall  I  took  initiation  from  a  disciple  of  an  enlightened  Indian 
yogi.  By  the  next  summer  I  felt  ready  to  go  to  India.  I  wasn't 
able  to  leave  till  autumn. 

This  Master,  called  Baba,  lived  up  to  all  my  expectations, 
and  more.  He  showered  his  grace  upon  me;  my  prayers  for 
greater  devotion  were  being  answered.  But  then  something 
happened  which  I  cannot  detail.  Here  through  his  words,  actions, 
and  arrangement  of  my  "external"  circumstances,  he  indicated 
unmistakably  that  I  was  to  leave  his  mission,  perhaps  never  to 
see  him  again  physically.  So  I  left. 

Before  departing  from  India  a  friend  and  I  visited  other 
ashrams.  The  message  I  got  was:  all  paths  are  one;  and  the  Guru 
is  within,  so  seek  within.  I  went  halfway  across  the  world  to 
find  someone  to  save  me,  but  those  capable  merely  referred  me 
to  a  mirror. 

Thus  I  returned  to  the  States,  feeling  exalted  by  a  wondrous 
journey  —  it  was  a  perfect  circle  of  experience  —  but  also 
somewhat  confused  as  to  how  to  proceed.  I  was  reading 
Krishnamurti  and  trying  to  Be,  but  I  didn't  feel  comfortable  or 
secure  in  a  practice  which  said,  "Make  no  effort."  I  was  praying 
to  Jesus.  Shortly  after  my  return,  I  had  met  a  devotee  of  Jesus 
who  asked  if  I  had  accepted  Him  in  my  heart.  I  quickly  answered, 
"Yes";  but  upon  reflection  I  realized  that  was  untrue.  So  I  was 
praying  very  fervently  to  Jesus,  that  He  enter  my  heart. 

At  the  same  time  I  was  praying  to  my  first  Guru  ("my" 
Guru's  first  form).  I  had  come  to  feel  that  I  could  be  satisfied 
with  nothing  less  than  absolute  and  eternal  Realization.  It  felt 
almost  blasphemous  to  ask  so  much,  but  what  else  could  I  ask? 

So  all  this  was  going  on,  and  at  the  height  of  it  Baba  came 
to  me  in  a  dream.  I  was  sitting  before  him  in  darshan  with  a  few 


110 


others.  He  asked  if  I  had  been  practising  a  certain  mantra. 
Anxious  to  please  him,  I  blurted  "Yes".  He  said  sternly,  "No, 
you  haven't,"  and  looked  away.  I  began  to  weep,  my  head  against 
his  knee.  Then  something  made  me  look  up  at  him.  Smiling, 
he  said  simply,  "Yours  is  the  path  of  the  Heart." 

Upon  awakening  I  thought  he  might  have  been  referring 
to  the  occasional  feelings  in  the  centre  of  my  chest  that  were 
accompanying  my  practice  of  trying  to  BE  with  all  things.  Or 
maybe  he  meant  something  in  reference  to  my  prayer  to  Jesus. 
I  didn't  know,  and  nothing  was  made  clear. 

By  late  spring  I  was  feeling  pretty  miserable.  No  changes, 
no  breakthroughs.  Some  friends  and  I  had  attempted  to  establish 
a  community;  egoism  aborted  it.  I  was  often  on  the  verge  of 
tears.  One  weekend  I  visited  some  friends  on  a  farm,  people  I 
had  met  in  India.  But  rather  than  feeling  any  satsang,  I  felt  a 
loneliness,  even  paranoia,  that  I  thought  I'd  left  behind  long 
ago.  After  two  days  of  this  misery,  I  picked  up  a  little  pamphlet, 
"Who  am  I?",  with  a  picture  of  the  slender  young  Ramana.  By 
reading  it  I  was  able  at  least  to  regain  my  equilibrium. 

The  next  night,  at  a  friend's  apartment  in  Montreal, 
Quebec,  I  came  across  The  Teachings  of  Bhagavan  by  Arthur 
Osborne.  By  now  quite  interested,  I  read  parts  of  it  and  then 
tried  the  sadhana  the  Maharshi  recommended.  After  fifteen  or 
twenty  minutes  of  asking  mentally,  "Who  am  I?",  and 
concentrating  on  the  right  side  of  my  chest,  suddenly,  from  the 
depths  of  my  Heart  something  opened  up  in  me,  a  piercing 
sensation  followed  by  a  wave  of  bliss.  The  bliss  passed,  and  the 
piercing  sensation  diminished  over  the  next  few  days  —  but 
the  feeling  of  the  Heart  remained. 

Since  then  It  has  never  left  me  —  though  sometimes  I 
leave  It  for  this  thought  or  that,  and  It  remains  on  the  edge  of 


Ill 


consciousness.  Shortly  after  Its  advent  I  came  to  see  that  this  is 
the  path  of  the  Heart,  and  that  I  shall  have  to  find  no  other 
forms  for  my  Guru.  And  then  it  dawned  on  me  that  my  prayer 
to  Jesus  had  been  answered.  For  as  it  is  true  that  no  one  other 
than  Sri  Ramana  vibrates  at  the  Core  of  my  Being,  so  also  it  is 
no  one  other  than  Jesus,  and  no  one  other  than  Baba. 

"Ask,  and  ye  shall  receive;  seek,  and  ye  shall  find."  "Earnest 
efforts  never  fail."  What  else  is  there  to  say?  Full  realization  has 
not  dawned,  but  whether  moments  or  lifetimes  intervene,  it 
cannot  fail  to  come.  Patience  and  perseverance  are  necessary,  as 
Bhagavan  has  said.  It  may  take  long  years  of  practice  to  reach 
the  Goal. 

Yet  the  Grace  he  has  bestowed  upon  me  compels  me  to 
conclude  on  a  different  note.  For  Bhagavan  again  says  we  are 
the  Self,  ever  and  always;  and  Jesus  says  be  alert,  for  you  don't 
know  when  the  Bridegroom  will  arrive.  And  indeed,  young 
Venkataraman  experienced  the  truth  of  this  latter  statement 
most  dramatically,  at  the  moment  of  his  death  and  the  arrival 
of  the  Bridegroom,  Arunachala.  So  we  should  be  patient  and 
persevering,  but  we  shouldn't  give  a  moment's  thought  to  "the 
long  years  ahead"  and  other  such  poison.  For  "the  thought  that 
you  are  not  realized  is  the  obstacle  to  Realization."  If  we  don't 
feel  we  know  Reality,  ever  and  always,  then  we  must  at  least  feel 
continuously  that  its  lightning  flash  is  imminent.  Such  an 
attitude  naturally  allows  sadhana  to  become  the  all-consuming 
flame  it  should  be,  and  thus  "hastens"  the  Coming.  For,  again 
as  Venkataraman  realized,  no  one  walks  that  final  infinite 
distance  to  the  Peak  of  Arunachala  —  but  rather,  in  a  way  too 
inscrutable  for  the  mind  to  comprehend,  and  at  a  speed  far  too 
fast  for  the  ego  to  withstand,  one  is  brought  to  the  Heart-Summit 
by  the  Mountain  Itself. 


112 

Bhagavan's  Solicitude 
for  Devotees 

Kunju  Swami 

An  old  and  well-known  devotee  of  Bhagavan  describes 
some  instances  of  Bhagavan s  solicitude  for  his  devotees, 
especially  for  women  and  old  people. 

BHAGAVAN  WAS  ALWAYS  very  considerate  towards  his 
devotees  in  all  matters.  When  he  was  living  at  Skandashram 
on  the  eastern  slopes  of  the  hill,  he  used  to  wake  up  at  3  o'clock 
in  the  morning.  He  would  not  get  up  immediately  but  recline 
on  the  bed.  We  too  would  wake  up  at  the  same  time  and  sit  in 
meditation  near  him.  Bhagavan's  mother  used  to  sing  some 
devotional  songs  from  within.  Bhagavan's  routine  was  to  go 
out  at  half  past  four  and  return  by  five.  We  would  then  begin  to 
recite  x\\eAksharamanaMalai  (The  Marital  Garland  of  Letters). 
That  was  the  only  song  which  Bhagavan  had  composed  at  that 
time.  I  learned  it  by  heart  by  merely  listening  to  the  chanting 
of  the  other  devotees.  The  recitation  was  over  by  six  o'clock 
which  was  the  time  for  Bhagavan  to  go  for  his  bath. 

There  was  a  large  flat  stone  at  the  spot  where  now  there  is 
the  low  wall  on  the  eastern  side.  Tooth  powder  and  water  were 
kept  on  it  for  Bhagavan's  use.  In  all  weathers  he  used  to  sit  on  it 
facing  the  east  and  clean  his  teeth.  His  body  was  glowing  in  the 
rays  of  the  rising  sun.  If  there  was  heavy  dew  we  tried  to  dissuade 


113 


him  from  sitting  there,  but  without  any  success.  Nor  did  he  tell 
us  the  reason  for  sitting  there  always.  It  was  some  time  afterwards 
that  we  came  to  know  of  it. 

An  old  woman  named  Saubhagyathammal,  living  in  a  house 
near  the  foot  of  the  hill,  and  some  of  her  friends  had  made  it  a 
daily  practice  not  to  take  any  food  until  they  had  had  darshan  of 
Bhagavan  and  Sri  Seshadri  Swami.  They  used  to  come  up  to 
Skandashram  every  day  for  this  purpose.  One  day 
Saubhagyathammal  did  not  come.  If  any  of  his  regular  devotees 
were  absent  on  any  particular  day  Bhagavan  never  failed  to  make 
enquiries  and  find  out  the  reason.  So  when  the  old  woman  came 
the  next  day  he  asked  her  why  she  did  not  come  on  the  previous 
day.  She  replied,"I  had  Sri  Bhagavans  darshan  yesterday."  "But 
you  did  not  come  yesterday",  said  Bhagavan.  "Bhagavan  knew 
that  this  humble  devotee  was  too  feeble  to  climb  the  hill  and  so 
he  made  it  possible  for  her  to  see  him  from  a  place  close  to  her 
house",  was  the  reply.  She  explained  that  she  had  seen  Bhagavan 
while  he  was  sitting  on  the  stone  and  cleaning  his  teeth  and  said 
that  she  was  henceforth  going  to  have  his  darshan  everyday  in  the 
same  way.  From  that  time  onwards  Bhagavan  made  it  a  practice 
to  sit  on  that  stone  for  nearly  half  an  hour  daily.  Later  on  when 
Bhagavan  took  up  his  abode  at  the  foot  of  the  hill  it  was  also 
chiefly  out  of  consideration  for  his  aged  devotees  who  found  it 
difficult  to  climb  to  Skandashram.  After  the  passing  away  of  his 
mother  he  occasionally  came  down  to  her  samadhi.  Aged  devotees 
eagerly  awaited  these  opportunities  to  see  him.  And  so  when  they 
begged  him  to  remain  below  he  began  to  live  there  permanently. 

It  was  the  practice  of  Bhagavans  devotees  to  take  his 
permission  before  proceeding  to  circumambulate  the  hill  and 
to  prostrate  before  him  on  their  return.  Many  came  to  the 
Ashram  all  the  way  from  the  town  for  this  purpose  even  late  in 


114 


the  evening  and  then  proceeded  immediately  to  their  homes  in 
the  town.  Bhagavan  advised  such  devotees  to  break  their 
circumambulation  in  town  in  the  evening  and  to  complete  it 
on  the  following  day  when  they  came  to  the  Ashram  as  usual. 

When  women  devotees  were  ready  to  return  to  town  at 
dusk  he  would  always  make  certain  that  none  of  them  went 
alone.  If  any  of  them  found  no  company  he  would  ask  someone 
to  go  with  her  and  leave  her  at  her  house. 

There  were  some  devotees  employed  in  Madras  who  used 
to  come  every  weekend  to  Tiruvannamalai  and  return  to  Madras 
in  time  to  go  to  their  offices  on  Monday  morning.  Sometimes 
some  of  them  were  so  reluctant  to  part  from  Bhagavan  that 
they  continued  to  overstay  their  time.  They  would  go  as  far  as 
the  railway  station  only  to  return  to  the  Ashram  on  some  pretext 
or  other.  Bhagavan,  therefore,  used  in  such  cases  to  send  someone 
with  them  to  the  railway  station  and  see  that  they  actually  got 
into  the  train  and  left  for  Madras.  He  did  not  like  that  anyone 
should  neglect  his  duties! 

When  a  devotee  came  late  in  the  evening  after  every  one 
had  taken  his  meal  and  gone  to  bed  he  was  not  allowed  to  go 
hungry  on  this  account.  Bhagavan  always  saw  to  it  that  some 
food  was  kept  for  such  late-comers  and  that  they  had  their  meal. 
When  such  a  visitor  arrived  Bhagavan  simply  looked  at  some  of 
us.  That  was  enough  for  us  to  take  him  to  the  dining  hall  and 
give  him  his  meal! 

Bhagavan  never  started  to  eat  before  all  those  who  were 
present  were  served.  The  beggars  waiting  at  the  gate  are  even 
now  given  their  food  before  inmates  and  visitors  are  served.  No 
exception  is  made  to  this  rule  even  on  crowded  occasions  like 
the  Jayanthi  and  the  Aradhana.  All  these  instances  will  show 
how  considerate  Bhagavan  was  to  others! 


115 


Reminiscences 

I 

A.  Venkateswara  Sarma  and  Smt.  Sala 

SRI  VENKATESWARA  SARMA,  a  native  of  Keelapasalai 
Village,  Ramnad  Dt.,  is  an  old  devotee  of  Sri  Bhagavan, 
who  along  with  his  wife,  Smt.  Sala,  equally  devoted  to  Sri 
Bhagavan,  lived  in  Sri  Ramana  Nagar.  Both  are  closely  related 
to  Sri  Bhagavan. 

For  over  a  decade  he  studied  the  Kavya  (poetical  literature 
in  Sanskrit)  gaining  mastery  in  the  same  and  also  became  an 
adept  in  the  science  of  astrology  by  training  he  had  for  years  at 
Vidyalaya  in  Kerala.  In  his  early  days  while  staying  at  Kandanur, 
he  had  a  remarkable  experience.  He  saw  the  portrait  of  Sri 
Bhagavan  in  his  majestic  standing  posture  with  a  penetrating 
look  which  not  merely  seemed  but  was  really  felt  as  directed 
only  to  him  and  which  thrilled  his  whole  being.  This  experience 
provoked  a  great  urge  to  have  Sri  Bhagavan's  darshan 
immediately. 

He  started  the  very  next  day  and  arrived  at  Tiruvannamalai, 
his  luggage  consisting  of  a  panchangam  (almanac)  in  one  hand 
and  an  umbrella  in  the  other.  That  was  in  1920.  He  climbed  up 
the  hill  to  Skandashram,  and  recognising  Sri  Bhagavan  who 
was  seated  then  under  a  nelli  tree  he  hastened  to  prostrate  at  his 
feet,  spontaneously  reciting  in  a  state  of  ecstatic  inspiration  the 


116 


first  sloka  of  Sri  Dakshinamurthi  Ashtakam.  "Look,  look  at  the 
visitor  who  has  come  —  Subbu's  son,  is  it  not?"  So  exclaimed 
Sri  Bhagavan,  turning  to  his  mother  who  was  there.  The  mother 
gave  him  a  hearty  welcome  and  made  him  feel  at  home. 
Delighted  by  the  stay  with  Sri  Bhagavan  that  night,  he  was  guided 
to  perform  giripradakshina  (circumambulation  of  Holy 
Arunachala)  next  day.  He  expressed  an  ardent  desire  to  stay 
with  Sri  Bhagavan  for  good  and  pleaded  that  he  did  not  want 
to  marry  but  wished  to  remain  with  him  and  serve  him  and  do 
pujas.  The  mother  would  have  none  of  it,  he  had  duties  to 
perform,  she  reminded  him  and  an  uncle's  daughter  awaited 
marriage  with  him.  He  was  then  22  years  old.  Sri  Bhagavan 
consoled  him,  "What  does  it  matter  if  you  do  puja  or  get  married 
or  whether  you  are  here  or  elsewhere?"  And  so  he  left! 

Since  then  Sri  Sarma  was  coming  to  Sri  Bhagavan  from 
time  to  time,  often  staying  for  a  month  or  two  and  benefitting 
by  Sri  Bhagavan's  utterances  and  his  silent  influence  with 
devotion  and  piety. 

Though  a  successful  astrologer  by  profession,  especially  in 
the  branch  of  prasna  (astrological  forecasting  on  the  basis  of  the 
exact  time  of  the  client's  question),  Sri  Venkateswara  Sarma  felt 
the  futility  of  leading  a  bread-earning  life  and  hence  came  to 
Sri  Ramanasramam  in  1 939,  along  with  his  wife,  and  lived  with 
Sri  Bhagavan's  sister's  family.  In  1946  they  took  up  abode  at 
Adi  Annamalai,  four  miles  away  from  the  Ashram  on  the 
circumambulation  path,  after  duly  informing  Sri  Bhagavan. 
They  went  round  the  hill  daily  and  sometimes  twice  a  day  and 
thus  had  darshan  of  Sri  Bhagavan  on  the  way. 

Sri  Sarma  compiled  a  short  history  of  Sri  Bhagavan's 
life  consisting  of  120  slokas  in  Sanskrit,  known  as  Ramana 
Charitamrutasaram,  which  Sri  Bhagavan  graciously  perused 


117 


and  corrected.  He  also  composed  songs  in  Tamil  and 
presented  them  to  Sri  Bhagavan,  who  used  to  correct  them 
only  sparingly.  Such  corrections  were  not  only  grammatical 
in  content  but  also  vitally  enriched  them  with  spiritual  depth. 
For  instance,  in  the  following  verse:  "Those  who  are  caught 
in  the  mouth  of  a  great  tiger  are  certain  to  die  in  this  world; 
but  all  those,  caught  in  the  glance  (drishti)  of  the  great  tiger 
adorning  the  slopes  of  Arunachala,  known  as  great  Ramana, 
get  merged  with  natural  ease  in  the  eternal  happiness, 
discarding  fear  of  even  the  Lord  of  Death,"  Sri  Bhagavan 
put  in  the  word  with  natural  ease  \iyal)  in  the  place  of  daily' 
(nidham)  of  Sri  Sarmas! 

Since  1948,  he  settled  with  his  wife  and  only  son  in 
Tiruvannamalai  town.  The  son  passed  away  four  years  later. 
Both  parents  feel  they  survived  that  shock  only  by 
Bhagavan's  Grace.  They  continued  to  render  service  at  the 
Shrines  of  Sri  Bhagavan  and  the  Mother,  assisting  in  the 
daily  routine  —  perhaps  as  a  fulfilment  of  his  former 
sankalpa  (desire)  to  do  puja  to  Sri  Bhagavan!  He  felt:  "Sri 
Bhagavan  is  ever  present  in  my  mind  and  heart,  in  jagrat 
and  swapna  and  his  manifest  Grace  only  is  sustaining  us  in 
all  circumstances  and  at  all  times!" 


II 


M.  S.  Nagarajan 


SRI  BHAGAVAN  HAD  a  unique  method  of  expounding 
profound  truths  with  illustrations  taken  from  everyday  life.  His 


118 


words  were  never  premeditated  but  came  spontaneously,  they 
were  also  apt,  as  the  following  incident  will  show. 

It  was  in  1932,  I  think,  when  I  was  in  charge  of  the  daily 
puja  at  the  Mother's  shrine,  that  a  devotee  known  as  P.W.D. 
Ramaswami  Iyer  arranged  for  a  special  food  offering  of  sarkarai 
pongal  (a  kind  of  rice-pudding)  and  vadai  (a  small  round  cake  of 
blackgram  fried  in  oil)  .They  were  to  be  offered  at  the  time  of  the 
ushah  puja  (puja  conducted  before  day  break  in  the  month  of 
Margasira  (December-January)).  I  had  many  things  to  do  and 
there  was  no  one  to  help  me.  So  I  got  up  very  early,  at  about  half 
past  three,  and  after  taking  my  bath  in  the  Pali  Tirtham,  removed 
the  old  flowers  from  the  shrine,  swept  and  cleaned  the  floor  and 
lit  two  fires,  over  one  of  which  I  placed  the  pot  of  rice  for  the 
pongal  and  over  the  other  the  pan  of  oil  for  the  vadai.  I  then  sat 
down  to  grind  the  black  gram  which  I  had  soaked  in  water 
previously.  By  the  time  the  dough  was  ready,  the  oil  was  sufficiently 
hot.  I  had  not  actually  prepared  vadais  previously  at  any  time. 
But  I  took  some  dough  and  tried  to  spread  it  out  on  the  leaf  in 
the  form  of  a  neat  round  vadai  as  I  had  seen  others  do,  but  it 
would  not  come  out  properly.  I  tried  again  and  again  but  it  was 
of  no  use.  I  then  got  annoyed  and  threw  the  dough  in  disgust 
back  into  the  vessel.  The  next  moment  I  noticed  some  movement 
behind  me.  When  I  turned  round  I  saw,  to  my  consternation, 
Sri  Bhagavan  standing  behind  me  and  watching  my  efforts  to 
make  vadai.  I  was  naturally  agitated  but  he  said  quietly,  "It  doesn't 
matter.  You  have  added  too  much  water  while  grinding  the  black 
gram.  Now  make  round  balls  of  the  dough  and  fry  them.  They 
will  then  be  bondasl"  I  did  accordingly. 

When  the  bondas  were  served  to  the  devotees  at  breakfast, 
as  usual,  Ramaswami  Iyer  said  to  me  angrily,  "Look  here.  Did  I 
not  ask  you  to  prepare  vadai?Then  why  have  you  made  bondas?" 


119 


I  was  afraid  to  say  anything  and  so  merely  looked  at  Sri 
Bhagavan  who  immediately  turned  to  Ramaswami  Iyer  and  said, 
"What  does  it  matter?  If  the  cakes  are  flat  and  circular  they  are 
vadais,  if  spherical,  bondas.  The  stuff  is  the  same  and  the  taste  is 
the  same.  Only  names  and  forms  are  different.  Eat  the prasadam 
(food  offered  to  a  deity)  and  don't  make  a  fuss."  Everyone  was 
astonished  at  the  ready  and  apt  reply  of  Sri  Bhagavan. 
Ramaswami  Iyer  could  not  contain  his  joy!  He  exclaimed, 
"Wonderful,  Wonderful!"  Later  in  the  day,  when  he  saw  me,  he 
said,  "I  say,  you  are  a  lucky  fellow.  Sri  Bhagavan  himself  is 
supporting  you." 

The  world  consists  of  names  and  forms.  These  are  naturally 
many,  but  what  lies  behind  them  is  one  and  the  same.  Names 
and  forms  are  not  real  although  we  think  that  they  are.  Brahman 
which  underlies  them  is  real,  but  we  forget  it.  What  wisdom  lay 
in  Sri  Bhagavans  words! 


eg  so 


120 


How  1  Came  to  the 
Maharshi 

I 

Swami  Paresananda 

Major  General  V.  N.  Parameswaran  Pillaiy  O.B.E., 
retired  from  service  as  G.  O.  C,  Travancore-Cochin  State  Forces 
in  the  year  1950.  Even  while  in  service  he  had  a  deeply 
religious  bent  of  mind  and  he  used  to  visit  holy  places  and 
personages.  Afier  retirement  he  made  a  pilgrimage  to  all  holy 
places  in  India  and  to  Kailas-Manasarovar.He  was  initiated 
by  Sri  Sivanandaji  Maharaj  of  Rishikesh  when  he  visited 
Trivandrum  in  1950.  Sri  Swami  Purushottamanandaji 
Maharaj  ofVasistha  Guhagave  him  sannyasa  diksha  in  1958. 
Since  then  he  is  known  as  Swami  Paresananda.  He  had  his 
own  Ashram  at  Kanyakumari,  Neyyathinkaray  and 
Trivandrum. 

IT  WAS  in  the  year  1936  that  I  had  the  good  fortune  of  having 
darshan  of  Sri  Bhagavan.  I  had  heard  about  him  before,  and 
was  longing  to  go  to  Tiruvannamalai  but  the  opportunity  never 
came  till  then.  This  is  how  it  came  about. 

I  was  then  a  Captain  in  the  Travancore  State  Forces  and 
an  A.D.C.  to  His  Highness  the  Maharaja.  His  Highness  and 


121 


the  Royal  Mother  had  been  to  Madras  from  where  they  paid  a 
visit  to  Sri  Ramanasramam  on  the  counsel  of  the  Dewan,  Sir 
C.  P.  Ramaswami  Iyer,  who  was  a  devotee  of  Sri  Ramana 
Bhagavan.  I  came  to  know  of  this  when  Their  Highnesses 
returned  to  Trivandrum  and  was  wondering  whether  it  was  not 
my  bad  luck  that  I  was  not  taken  as  A.D.C.  on  that  tour.  In  the 
meantime,  one  morning,  my  friend  Sri  I.  S.  Narayana  Pillai, 
the  Controller  of  Stationery,  who  was  a  devotee  of  Maharshi, 
informed  me  over  the  phone  that  he  was  starting  for  Sri 
Ramanasramam  the  next  day  and  asked  whether  I  would  like 
to  join  him.  It  was  his  general  practice  to  inform  me  whenever 
he  went  to  some  place  of  pilgrimage  and  I  had  accompanied 
him  to  many  places.  But  this  time  I  was  not  confident  of  getting 
permission  from  His  Highness  at  such  short  notice  and  I  replied 
that  I  would  not  be  able  to  go  with  him. 

Mysterious  indeed  are  the  ways  of  Bhagavan!  A  few  hours 
later,  when  I  reported  for  duty  at  the  Palace,  His  Highness  said, 
of  his  own  accord,  that  if  I  also  wanted  to  visit  Sri 
Ramanasramam  I  could  go.  Yes,  His  Highness  knew  very  well 
that  I  was  fond  of  visiting  religious  places  and  saints.  This  sudden 
and  unexpected  permission  made  me  speechless  for  a  few 
seconds.  I  felt  it  was  all  due  to  Bhagavan s  grace. 

Sri  I.  S.  and  I  reached  the  Ashram  the  second  day.  My 
companion  was  a  frequent  visitor,  so  everyone  knew  him.  He 
introduced  me  to  the  Sarvadhikariy  Sri  Niranjanananda  Swami 
who  made  arrangements  for  our  stay.  Then  we  proceeded  to 
the  hall  for  Sri  Bhagavans  darshan.  Bhagavan  was  reclining  on 
a  couch,  turning  to  one  side.  The  hall  was  almost  full  with  visitors 
from  various  parts  of  the  country  and  from  the  west.  As  we 
entered  the  hall,  the  scene  brought  to  my  memory,  slokas  from 
Dakshinamurti  Stotra.  I  felt  Dakshinamurti  Himself  was 


122 


reclining  on  the  couch.  I.  S.  took  me  to  a  vantage  point,  sitting 
where  we  could  see  the  Maharshi  without  any  obstruction. 
Bhagavan  noticed  us.  After  a  while  he  sat  up  and  beckoned  me. 
We  did  not  know  whom  he  was  summoning  and,  as  I  was  a 
stranger,  my  companion  thought  he  was  being  called  and  he 
got  up.  Bhagavan  signalled  '  No  Others  enquired  whether 
this  or  that  person  was  meant  by  pointing  to  some  persons 
sitting  nearby  but  the  answer  was  in  the  negative. 

At  last  I  was  pointed  out  and  Maharshi  nodded  assent. 
Everybody  was  surprised  and  became  curious  about  me.  I  was 
also  surprised.  I  approached  him  immediately,  placed  the  flowers 
and  fruits  I  had  brought,  and  prostrated  before  him.  He 
beckoned  me  to  come  nearer  and  gazed  at  me  for  a  while  and 
smiled.  Then  he  told  his  attendant  "Bring  that  book."  It  was 
brought  and  Maharshi  presented  it  to  me.  It  was  a  Malayalam 
translation  of  Maharshi's  Tamil  work,  Gitasaram.  I  was 
overwhelmed  with  joy  and  devotion.  After  a  few  seconds 
Maharshi  took  the  book  from  me,  made  some  corrections  in 
his  own  hand  and  then  handed  it  back  to  me  touching  my 
hand,  I  considered  myself  highly  blessed  to  receive  Maharshi's 
Grace  in  this  manner. 

Then  it  was  time  for  the  midday  meal.  We  were  also  invited; 
so  we  entered  the  dining  hall.  Maharshi  asked  me  to  sit  in  the 
opposite  row,  just  facing  him  and  I  did  so.  While  eating,  he 
enquired  tenderly,"How  is  the  preparation?"  and  so  on.  I  replied 
that  everything  was  very  nice.  Again  he  said,"Take  enough  rice, 
curry,  etc.  Eat  slowly",  and  so  on,  and  asked  the  servers  to  serve 
me  more  curry  etc.  Throughout  he  was  talking  to  me  only  in 
the  dining  hall  and  this  made  others  wonder  who  this  favoured 
one  might  be.  As  for  me,  I  had  had  various  such  experiences 
before  and  I  felt  that  it  was  all  due  to  some  merit  accumulated 


123 


in  past  lives.  "Omnipresent  and  Omniscient  as  he  is,  Maharshi 
understands  the  heart  of  every  one",  this  belief  of  mine  was 
confirmed. 

My  friend  I.  S.  was  a  regular  visitor  to  the  Ashram  but 
Maharshi  had  never  spoken  to  him.  When  I  received  such 
favours  from  him,  it  was  natural  for  I.  S.  to  feel  that  there  was 
something  lacking  in  him.  Maharshi  could  easily  understand 
this.  The  same  day  he  presented  a  book  to  I.  S.  also  and  made 
him  feel  deeply  gratified. 

More  than  thirty-seven  years  have  elapsed  but  the  whole  thing 
is  still  green  in  my  memory.  And  the  book  that  Maharshi  gave  me, 
corrected  in  his  own  hand,  is  still  with  mel  keep  it  as  a  treasure. 


II 

Sunyata 

Sunya  Baba  —  Emmanual  Sorensen  in  his 
purvashrama  —  refers  to  himself  always  in  the  third  person 
in  the  article. 

IT  WAS  IN  THE  YEAR  1929  that  Poet  Rabindranath  Tagore 
and  his  secretaries  (Arya  Nikam  and  Amiya  Chakravarti)  met 
him  and  I  befriended  him  at  Dartington  Hall  in  Devonshire, 
England.  And  it  was  the  Poet's  casual  invitation  to  the 
simple,  uneducated'  gardener  to  come  to  Bharat  to  teach  Silence' 
to  the  ebullient  Bengalis,  which  called  him  here.  He  discerned 
in  the  simpleton's  Being  a  quality  of  Sunya-Santi-Silence  and 
intuitive  awareness  which  was  felt  to  be  congenial  and 


124 


appreciated  in  India.  The  invitation  gave  the  sadhu-type  the 
needed  push  or  pull,  to  venture  forth  simply  and  solitarily  into 
India,  and  the  proposed  3  or  4  months'  stay  stretched  into  45 
years  of  Himalayan  ananda-grace.The  solitary  pilgrim  in 
Consciousness  had  come  £  Home'.  In  India  he  read  the  Vedas, 
the  Upanishads  and  the  writings  of  genuine  Masters. 

He  heard  of  Sri  Ramana  Maharshi  while  in  Kashmir  and 
Tibet  from  Lamas,  and  later  from  Paul  Brunton  and  Dr.  W.  Y. 
Evans Wentz.  After  spending  several  years  in  the  Himalayas  and 
other  sanctuaries,  he  came  to  Sri  Ramana  Maharshi  in  the  year 
1936  for  the  first  time  and  was  introduced  to  the  Maharshi  by 
Paul  Brunton.  He  also  came  three  times  or  more  later  at  a  few 
years'  intervals.  He  had  no  problem,  no  disease,  and  no  quest 
and  so  asked  no  questions.  Maharshi,  however,  did  ask  him 
some  questions  which  he  has  now  forgotten. 

But  the  first  darshan  of  the  Maharshi  remains  an 
unforgettable  experience,  especially  Sri  Ramana's  casual,  as  it 
were,  statement  '  We  are  always  aware';  and  this  made  a  most 
powerful  impact  on  him.  It  resounded  in  his  consciousness 
like  a  chime  and  continued  to  linger  in  his  memory  like  a 
mantra  or  an  echo  of  Sri  Arunachala  or  Dakshinamurti.  He 
also  remembers  some  passages  mentioned  from  the  Bible:  the 
phrase,  CI  AM  THAT  I  AM',  'Be  Still  and  know  that  I  am 
God',  'Know  ye  not  that  you  are  Gods?'  and  the  words  Jesus 
exchanged  with  Nicodemus. 

He  found  Ramana  Maharshi's  was  pure  advaita-experience, 
and  his  chief  language,  radiant  Silence,  to  which  only  mature 
souls  familiar  with  solitude  could  easily  respond.  When  Ramana 
was  questioned  by  officious  officials  and  was  later  asked  if  it  had 
tired  him,  he  said:  "No;  I  did  not  use  my  mind".  He  was 
mind-free  and  ego-free. 


125 


As  for  Sunya,  there  was  from  babyhood  no  sense  of  guilt, 
no  sin-complex  and  no  ego-pitiful  grievance  against  What  Is. 
Very  little  friction,  imposition  or  conditioning,  and  so  no 
ego-importance.  Affectionate  detachment  from  forms  and 
things,  is  natural  in  the  conscious  awareness  that  there  is  no  real 
division,  no  real  detachment  in  the  Reality  we  ever  are,  ego-free 
and  death-free.  There  is  no  ambition  to  'become'  this  or  that 
and  no  reaching  out  for  power  or  self-possessions,  security.  Yet, 
there  is  intuitive  Light- awareness,  a  flair  for  essence,  wholeness 
and  esoteric  grace-awareness;  a  secure  contentment  in  the 
fundamental  all-Rightness  of  things  and  happenings  as  Siva  Lila, 
Self-interplay. 


Ill 

Satya  Narayan  Tandon 

IT  WAS  AT  THE  END  OF  1944  that  I  first  heard  about 
Bhagavan  Ramana  Maharshi.  I  was  sitting  with  a  religious 
teacher,  when  a  visitor  said:  "Maharshi  is  Mount  Everest  and 
others  mere  hillocks."  Since  then  I  had  a  persistent  urge  to  have 
darshan  of  Sri  Bhagavan. 

In  the  summer  of  1946,  when  I  was  sitting  in  the  presence 
of  Paramsant  Mahatma  Raghuber  Dayal,  a  Sufi  saint,  a 
fellow-devotee  who  had  been  to  Tiruvannamalai  began  to  speak 
about  Sri  Bhagavan,  the  Ashram  and  his  experiences  during  his 
stay  there.  Chachaji,  (as  we  used  to  call  the  saint)  who  had 
listened  attentively  to  his  devotee's  narration,  spoke  very  highly 
about  Sri  Bhagavan.  This  only  strengthened  my  desire  to  have 


126 


his  darshan.  But  I  did  not  get  the  opportunity  for  it  —  one 
hindrance  or  another  always  came  in  my  way. 

Early  in  April  1950,  when  I  was  planning  to  go  to 
Arunachala,  my  younger  brother,  Sri  Jagatnarayan,  told  me  that 
he  along  with  a  friend  was  to  leave  for  Tiruvannamalai  the  same 
evening.  To  me  this  was  a  bolt  from  the  blue,  as  we  both  could 
not  leave  the  station  simultaneously.  I  could  not  speak  out  my 
mind,  and  he  left  for  Tiruvannamalai.  He  was  fortunate  to  have 
Sri  Bhagavans  darshan  —  standing  in  a  queue.  He  stayed  there 
for  a  few  days  and  on  the  return  journey  somewhere  near 
Nagpur,  got  the  information  that  Sri  Bhagavan  had  shed  the 
body. 

My  younger  brother  again  went  to  Sri  Ramanasramam  in 
1956.  On  hearing  from  him  about  the  Ashram  and  his 
experiences  there,  the  longing  to  visit  the  Shrine  was  aroused 
afresh. 

It  was  late  in  1957  at  the  insistence  of  my  wife,  that  my 
longing  to  visit  the  shrine  of  Sri  Ramana  Maharshi  was  fulfilled. 

Since  1957,  Sri  Bhagavan  has  been  graciously  pleased  to 
call  us  to  his  Shrine  of  Grace  practically  every  year. 

An  accident  that  occurred  at  Allahabad  Railway  station  on 
the  morning  of  January  23,  1972  is  worth  recording. 

With  my  younger  son,  his  wife  and  one  of  my  grandsons, 
I  was  coming  back  to  Kanpur  from  Allahabad  by  Howrah-Kalka 
Mail.  After  locating  our  berths,  I  was  talking  on  the  platform 
with  people  who  had  come  to  see  us  off.  I  could  not  hear  the 
whistle  of  the  electric  engine,  and  the  train  began  to  move.  I 
caught  hold  of  the  handle  of  the  compartment  to  get  into  it. 
But  I  lost  the  grip  and  fell  on  the  track.  In  the  meantime  the 
train  had  gathered  momentum.  When  my  son,  who  was  at  the 
other  door  of  the  compartment,  enquired  about  me,  a 


127 


fellow-passenger  told  him  that  he  saw  an  old  man  falling  down 
while  trying  to  get  into  the  compartment.  My  son  immediately 
pulled  the  chain,  but  the  train  stopped  only  two  furlongs  away. 

As  soon  as  I  fell  on  the  track,  I  saw  the  face  of  Sri  Bhagavan 
repeating  like  a  mantra,  "Don't  lift  the  head."  Where  I  was  on 
the  track  I  cannot  say.  But  I  saw  the  wheels  moving  faster  and 
faster. 

When  the  entire  train  had  moved  beyond  the  place  where 
I  was,  I  got  up  though  my  head  and  left  eye-brow  were  badly 
wounded,  so  much  so  that  my  woollen  coat  had  become 
drenched.  The  guard  who  was  in  charge  of  the  train  said  that 
eight  bogeys  had  passed  over  me  and  that  it  was  a  miracle  that  I 
had  escaped  death.  It  was  all  his  benign  Grace  that  he  saved  this 
body,  for  what  purpose  is  known  to  him  only.  For  the  first  few 
days  after  the  wounds  had  been  stitched  and  I  was  in  great  agony 
and  pain,  I  was  kept  under  sedation  but  I  felt  Sri  Bhagavan 
sitting  by  my  side  and  at  times  moving  his  hands  over  the  wounds 
that  had  been  stitched. 

My  cap  and  spectacles  that  had  fallen  on  the  track  were  all 
received  by  my  people  without  any  damage  whatsoever.  The 
same  glasses  and  the  same  frame  I  used  for  years  thereafter. 

May  this  head  remain  at  his  Lotus  feet  for  the  rest  of  my 
days  on  earth. 


eg  so 


128 


Awareness  Absolute 


Visvanatha  Swami 

IT  WAS  AT  Skandasramam  on  Arunachala  that  I  first  met 
Bhagavan  Ramana  (in  January  1921).  He  was  standing  on 
the  open  space  in  front  of  the  Ashram  building  facing  the 
entrance  as  I  approached.  The  very  sight  of  him  was  thrilling; 
something  very  subtle,  seemingly  with  its  centre  in  that  body 
shone  forth  unlimited  engulfing  everything  else.  Needless  to 
say  I  felt  swallowed  up  by  it.  I  stayed  for  a  week  with  Bhagavan 
in  that  atmosphere  of  utter  purity  and  serenity.  I  heard  from 
him  how  he  came  to  Arunachala,  irresistibly  attracted  and  swept 
off  his  feet  by  a  tremendous  benevolent  force;  how  he  was  one 
with  it  deep  down  within  his  heart  almost  oblivious  of  his  body 
and  surroundings;  and  how  only  later  on  he  gradually  regained 
the  use  of  his  senses  and  mind  and  was  able  to  look  about  and 
commune  with  others  when  they  approached  him. 

Subsequently  too,  when  I  had  come  to  Bhagavan  for  good, 
the  effect  of  his  proximity  continued  the  same  way  and  I  may 
say  that  there  was  no  necessity  for  any  sadhana  in  particular  on 
my  part.  Along  with  a  few  other  inmates  I  had  my  share  in  the 
work  of  the  Ashram  in  the  elevating  company  of  Bhagavan  and 
I  studied  his  few  works,  devotional  and  philosophical,  and  heard 
his  replies  to  various  questions  put  by  visitors.  But  the  most 
important  thing  was  the  mere  Presence,  the  spiritually  uplifting 


129 


company  of  Bhagavan.  As  Bhagavan  says  in  the  Supplement  to 
the  Reality  in  Forty  Verses'.  "If  one  associates  with  Sages,  where  is 
the  need  for  any  other  rigorous  sadhanat  No  one  looks  for  a 
fan  when  there  is  the  pleasant  southern  breeze." 

The  climax  of  my  spiritual  experience  in  the  proximity 
of  Bhagavan  was  during  his  'last'  moments.  As  I  stood  in  that 
small  room  along  with  a  very  few  others,  everything  became 
shadow  enveloped  by  one  indivisible  Pure  Awareness,  the  one 
and  only  ever-present  Reality.  And  so  there  was  not  the  least 
feeling  of  any  separation  from  Bhagavan  or  the  least  vestige 
of  sorrow  on  that  account.  Not  only  that,  there  was  a  positive 
ecstasy  and  elation  of  spirit  which  is  nothing  but  the  Natural 
State  of  the  Self. 

All  those  who  approached  Bhagavan  with  spiritual 
earnestness  have  had  this  experience  of  direct  contact  with  the 
Divine  at  the  very  first  sight  of  Bhagavan.  Ganapati  Muni,  the 
great  poet  and  tapaswin,  saw  an  adept  (a  Siddha  Purusha,  a 
Perfect  Being)  in  Bhagavan,  the  moment  he  first  beheld  him  by 
chance  on  the  Hill  in  the  Ashram  of  Jataiswami.  The  scholar 
became  a  disciple.  Venkataramanier  of  Satyamangalam  saw 
Bhagavan  as  a  clear  manifestation  of  the  all-pervading  Supreme 
Self  and  sang  his  five  superb  Hymns  in  Praise  of  Ramana. 
Humphreys  saw  Bhagavan  as  a  glowing  centre  of  Divine 
Radiance.  Achyuta  Dasa,  Narayana  Guru  and  so  many  others 
seeing  Bhagavan  recognised  his  unique  spiritual  greatness. 
Pascaline  Mallet,  a  French  lady,  who  stayed  with  Bhagavan  for  a 
few  months  sang  in  a  poem  in  praise  of  Bhagavan:  "One  Light, 
One  Life,  One  Love,  shining  through  Thee,  we  see."  And  Grant 
Duff  (Douglas  Ainslee),  the  cultured  scholar  and  poet,  says  in 
his  preface  to  Bhagavans  Five  Hymns  to  Arunachala:  "I  was  in 
direct  contact  with  one  who  had  passed  beyond  the  boundaries 


130 


of  the  senses  and  was  merged  in  the  Absolute  Self.  I  do  not 
need  any  proof  of  the  divinity  of  Ramana  Maharshi,  just  as  I  do 
not  need  any  to  prove  the  existence  of  the  Sun." 

What  is  the  secret  behind  the  common  experience  of 
Divine  Glory  which  so  many  intelligent  devotees  have  had  in 
the  presence  of  Bhagavan?  Here  is  the  answer  given  by  Ganapati 
Muni  in  his  remarkable  hymn  of  Forty  Verses  in  Praise  of 
Bhagavan'.  "Bow  down  to  the  holy  Guru  Ramana  who  reaching 
the  hidden  source  of  the  ego  within  has  effaced  all  differentiation 
and  shines  forth  as  the  One  Self  of  all  beings  with  various  mental 
propensities  and  who  is  resplendent  as  the  One  Reality 
transcending  the  body  and  the  entire  world-manifestation."  "I 
bow  to  Sri  Ramana,  the  Great  Teacher,  the  remover  of  all  sorrow, 
who  established  in  the  Eternal  Abode  of  Pure  Awareness  dispels 
the  ignorance  of  earnest  seekers,  who  though  seeing  and  moving 
within  the  world  stands  as  the  Supreme  Being  transcending  it." 

Whatever  is  seen  is  non-self  and  the  Seer  alone  is  the 
unchanging  Self.  When  we  take  to  Self-enquiry  holding  on  to 
this  fundamental  principle  of  Vedanta,  the  physical  body,  the 
life-current  operating  in  it  and  the  mind  are  eliminated  as 
non-self.  Even  the  intellect,  the  highest  known  principle  in  man 
with  its  reasoning  faculty,  has  to  be  discarded  as  non-self  as  it  is 
only  the  faculty  of  one  behind  it,  claiming  it  as  his.  Who  is  he? 
He  cannot  stand  by  himself  and  so  he  disappears.  What  then 
remains  as  the  source  of  the  elusive  I-sense  in  us  is  the  ultimate 
Self,  which  is  ever  there  as  the  Ground  of  all  that  appears  and 
disappears,  of  all  perception  in  the  waking  and  dream  states 
and  non-perception  of  anything  in  deep  sleep. 

Though  the  truth  of  the  ultimate  Self  is  explained  within  a 
few  steps  like  this,  the  enveloping  power  of  a  mysterious  force 
of  darkness  known  as  avarana  in  Vedanta  is  such  that  it  gets 


131 


eradicated  only  after  a  vigilant  self-enquiry  constantly  carried 
on.  The  inherent  tendencies  (vasanas)  of  the  mind  based  on  a 
phantom  ego  get  annihilated  only  after  a  continuous  earnest 
attempt  to  abide  at  the  Heart,  the  Source.  So,  Sankara  says  in 
his  Vivekachudamani  that  liberation  (mukti)  is  nothing  but  the 
complete  eradication  of  the  ego  with  all  its  vasanas.  Bhagavan 
says  in  his  song  on  Atma  Vidya  that  Grace  is  needed  for  the 
dawn  otjnana  as  well  as  earnest  aspiration  and  devotion  on  the 
part  of  the  seeker  to  deserve  it.  When  earnest  effort  and  Grace 
meet,  then  there  is  the  achievement  of  the  highest  spiritual 
aspiration  of  man,  viz.,  spontaneous  inherence  in  the 
ever-present  Self. 

The  Self  is  Pure  Awareness,  unalloyed  Awareness  itself, 
whereas  the  mind  is  awareness  of  this  and  that.  The  mind  cannot 
stand  for  a  moment  without  an  object,  because  it  is  by  its  very 
nature  a  subject-object  phenomenon.  It  disappears  when  it  is 
divested  of  objects,  unable  to  stand  by  itself.  And  there,  the 
Self,  the  one  indivisible  absolute  Awareness  shines  for  ever  as 
stated  in  Sri  Ramana  Gita  (Ch.  vii,  v. 5):  "When  the  ego  which 
is  but  a  phantom  of  the  Self  totally  disappears,  what  remains  is 
the  real  Self  alone  in  all  its  plenitude  and  perfection."  This  is 
jnana  and  this  is  mukti  (liberation). 

For  one  established  in  it  thus,  the  subject-object  phenomena 
may  appear  and  disappear  but  he  will  remain  for  ever  unsullied 
as  Pure  Awareness,  since  nothing  has  any  existence  apart  from 
it.  This  is  known  as  Tanmaya  Nishta.  Being  the  Self  is  Awareness 
of  the  Self. 

From  a  relative  standpoint,  the  proximity  of  such  a  Sage, 
normally  established  in  the  Self  under  all  circumstances  of  life, 
serves  as  an  eye-opener  for  those  in  the  clutches  of  delusion  and 
as  an  invaluable  aid  supporting  them  in  their  spiritual  quest. 


132 


The  operation  of  the  Spiritual  Force  of  such  enlightened  Ones 
is  not  limited  to  the  lifetime  of  their  physical  body.  It  continues 
for  ever  and  those  who  think  of  them,  surrender  themselves  to 
them,  study  their  life  and  teachings  and  try  to  follow  them  do 
get  into  the  ambit  of  their  Grace,  non-different  from  Supreme 
Divine  Grace.  This  is  the  experience  of  so  many  spiritual 
aspirants  who  had  not  met  Bhagavan  during  his  lifetime  but 
devoted  themselves  to  him  on  hearing  of  him  or  coming  to 
know  of  him  somehow  or  other.  The  enlightened  Ones  who 
are  themselves  timeless  belong  to  all  time  and  by  their  very 
nature  shed  light  on  the  path  of  seekers  and  help  them  in  ever 
so  many  ways. 

Ultimately  one  sees  that  one  has  no  existence  apart  from 
Pure  Awareness,  that  there  is  no  world  apart  from  it  and  that 
there  is  no  other  God  than  Pure  Awareness.  Blissful  Awareness 
is  the  sole  Reality.  Manifestation  as  the  Many  is  nothing  but  its 
Lila.  Every  one,  in  manifestation,  has  to  play  his  part  knowing 
at  heart  that  it  is  all  nothing  but  Lila,  the  only  Reality  being 
Absolute  Blissful  Awareness. 


133 


Sri  Bhagavan's 
Bodily  Health 

K.  Lakshmana  Sarma 

AN  INEVITABLE  CONSEQUENCE  of  Bhagavan's  state 
l.  as  zjivan  mukta,  permanently  established  in  the  egoless 
State,  was  that  he  could  not  claim  any  rights,  even  the  right  to 
choose  what  shall  be  done  or  not  done  to  his  body,  because 
from  his  point  of  view,  that  body  was  not  his.  Also,  he  was  so 
full  of  compassion,  that  he  could  not  bear  to  hurt  anyone's 
feelings.  Anyone  that  came  to  him  offering  edibles  or  medicine, 
was  sure  of  its  being  accepted,  though  he  did  not  want  it.  Once 
he  said,  "Nature  cure  is  right.  But...."  And  he  did  not  complete 
the  sentence. 

Yet  he  showed  his  real  view  of  drugs  by  implication.  When 
a  quantity  of  a  drug  had  to  be  taken  for  a  certain  period,  he 
would  take  only  one  dose  and  would  never  take  a  second;  that 
is,  he  would  not  follow  the  prescription  as  one  who  believed  in 
the  goodness  of  the  drug  would  do,  so  as  to  benefit  by  it. 

The  same  was  the  case  when  an  operation  was  proposed. 
He  submitted  to  the  operation  only  to  please  the  person  who 
wanted  to  do  him  good. 

On  the  last  occasion,  when  a  number  of  doctors  and 
surgeons  who  came  from  Madras  wanted  to  operate  on  him  to 


134 


remove  the  cancer  he  was  having,  he  first  very  gently  suggested 
that  it  was  not  necessary.  He  did  that  because  he  knew  the  future, 
that  the  end  was  near.  The  doctors  did  not  take  the  hint.  They 
insisted  on  operating  and  hence  Sri  Bhagavan  submitted  to  the 
operation  without  an  anaesthetic.  The  operation  lasted  for  nearly 
three  hours  and  produced  a  severe  shock,  from  which  the  body 
never  recovered. 

When  all  these  medical  efforts  had  failed,  a  number  of 
devotees  came  to  him  and  prayed  to  him  to  use  his  spiritual 
powers  to  heal  the  disease.  Bhagavan  replied,  "I  did  not  want 
any  treatment.  It  was  you  that  wanted  it."  After  a  brief  pause  he 
added,  "In  two  more  days  it  will  become  all  right".  What  he 
meant  was  that  the  end  would  come  then.  And  it  came  exactly 
as  he  said. 


eg  so 


135 


Treatment  to  Sri 
Bhagavan  -  An  Account 

Dr.  Shankar  Rao 

Dr.Shankar  Rao,  a  retired D.  M.  O.,  who  was  attending 
on  Sri  Maharshi  almost  from  the  start  of  his  illness,  details  in 
this  article  an  intimate  and  vivid  picture  of  the  Maharshis 
ailment  and  the  way  he  bore  with  it. 

TO  HAVE  SERVED  Bhagavan  Sri  Ramana  Maharshi  as  a 
doctor  for  over  a  year  is  no  ordinary  privilege  and  no 
ordinary  experience.  It  was  an  education  of  the  highest  type,  a 
training  of  a  unique  character.  It  provided  me  with  vivid  glimpses 
into  the  human  as  well  as  the  superhuman  and  godlike 
personality  of  Sri  Maharshi. 

For  one  whole  year  I  watched  the  ailment  sapping  the 
strength  and  vitality  of  the  physical  frame  of  Sri  Maharshi  with 
cruel  success.  It  failed  to  affect  his  detachment  and  composure 
and  I  found  for  the  first  time  that  this  disease  with  its  brood  of 
pain  and  suffering  had  somehow  met  with  an  ignominious  defeat. 
This  will  be  borne  out  in  the  following  account  of  the  history 
of  the  ailment  which  culminated  in  the  Maharshi  shaking  off 
the  mortal  sheath. 


136 


I  first  came  to  Sri  Ramanashram  in  the  second  week  of 
December,  1948.  At  that  time  Sri  Bhagavan  had  a  small  nodule 
under  the  skin  behind  the  elbow  about  the  size  of  a  split  pea. 
When  I  asked  him  about  it  he  said  that  it  might  have  been  due 
to  a  fall  he  had  some  three  months  back.  On  pressing,  it  used  to 
be  painful.  Within  a  month  it  grew  to  the  size  of  a  small  marble. 
Sri  Bhagavan  used  to  feel  pain  whenever  he  put  his  elbow  on 
any  hard  surface  and  so  I  suggested  its  removal.  It  was  removed 
on  9th  February  1949.  The  wound  completely  healed  up  during 
the  course  of  a  week. 

In  the  first  week  of  March,  it  was  again  noticed  to  be 
growing.  About  the  middle  of  March,  Dr.  Raghavachari  of 
Madras  came  with  his  assistants  and  removed  it  completely, 
together  with  a  good  deal  of  surrounding  tissues  and  also  the 
skin  over  it.  A  microscopic  examination  revealed  that  it  was  a 
sarcoma. 

Sarcoma  is  a  malignant  tumour  of  the  flesh  which  occurs 
generally  in  young  people,  while  older  ones  get  cancers  which 
are  growths  from  the  skin  or  mucous  membranes.  These 
malignant  tumours  are  not  enclosed  in  sheaths  or  capsules  like 
simple  tumours.  Even  small  microscopic  cells  anywhere  in  the 
tissues  surrounding  the  tumour  could  start  to  grow  into  another 
tumour.  Some  cells  may  be  carried  through  the  blood  vessels  to 
other  parts  of  the  body  and  produce  similar  secondary  tumours. 

The  wound,  after  the  second  operation,  did  not  heal  and 
after  a  few  days,  a  new  growth  appeared  and  this  started  bleeding 
profusely.  Doctors  and  radiologists  came  from  Madras  and 
applied  radium  to  afford  temporary  relief.  They  advised  that 
amputation  of  the  limb,  a  couple  of  inches  above  the  tumour 
alone  could  cure  the  disease.  The  consensus  of  opinion  amongst 
the  devotees  of  Sri  Bhagavan  was  against  amputation.  Sri 


137 


Bhagavan  also  said  that  it  was  not  necessary.  The  idea  of 
amputation  was  given  up. 

The  tumour  growth  subsided  a  little  as  a  result  of  radium 
treatment  but  in  July  1 949  it  again  began  to  grow.  Some  of  the 
devotees  wished  that  ayurvedic  treatment  should  be  tried  and  a 
local  ayurvedic  physician  started  treatment.  Sri  Bhagavans 
health  deteriorated,  sepsis  set  in  and  the  tumour  continued  to 
grow  very  rapidly. 

Surgeons  from  Madras  were  again  requested  to  come.  They 
advised  an  operation  as  the  only  remedy  and  the  tumour  together 
with  the  white  area  of  tissues  all  around  were  removed  with  a 
diathermic  knife.  Radium  was  then  applied.  This  was  on  14th 
August. 

The  result  appeared  to  be  very  favourable  in  as  much  as 
no  tumour  growth  appeared  for  three  months  and  even  scrapings 
taken  from  the  raw  surface  of  the  wound  were  reported  to  be 
negative.  Early  in  December  1949  however,  there  was  a 
suspicion  of  a  small  nodule  appearing  in  the  middle  of  the  arm, 
several  inches  away  from  the  site  of  the  original  tumour  growth. 
Then  again  doctors  from  Madras  came  and  having  diagnosed  it 
as  a  secondary  growth  and  that  too  a  very  small  one,  they 
expected  to  remove  it  easily. 

On  19th  December  the  growth  was  operated  on  but  when 
the  deeper  tissues  were  cut  into,  for  removing  the  tumour,  it 
was  found  that  the  growth  had  spread  deep  into  the  muscles. 
A  much  larger  operation  became  necessary  and  in  spite  of 
this,  the  surgeons  felt  that  the  chances  of  recurrence  could 
not  be  ruled  out. 

As  the  surgeons  had  given  up  hope  of  a  cure,  homeopathy 
was  tried.  By  about  the  middle  of  February,  the  tumour  again 
started  growing  on  the  upper  end  of  the  operation  wound  and 


138 


as  the  homeopath  who  was  treating  Sri  Bhagavan  was  unable  to 
prevent  recurrence,  an  ayurvedic  physician  from  Malabar  was 
sent  for  and  he  started  treatment.  This  too  having  been 
unsuccessful,  Kaviraj  Jogendranath  Sastry  from  Calcutta  was 
invited  by  one  of  the  devotees  to  treat  Sri  Bhagavan.  During  all 
this  period  the  general  health  of  Sri  Bhagavan  continued  to 
deteriorate  and  the  tumour  growth  increased  rapidly. 

By  about  the  2nd  of  April  I  felt  that  the  end  was  near.  On 
the  night  of  Sunday  the  9th  of  April  the  pulse  became  very 
feeble  and  gradual  deterioration  of  the  functions  of  the  heart 
brought  about  exhaustion.  Sri  Bhagavan  who,  until  that  day, 
had  been  able  to  walk  to  the  adjoining  bathroom  could  not  do 
so  and  was  confined  to  bed. 

Since  February  the  blood  pressure  of  Sri  Bhagavan  started 
dropping.  A  fortnight  before  the  end  it  was  88/48,  the  lowest 
point  reached  being  66/36.  The  expected  end  came  at  8.47  pm 
on  1 4th  April. 

Sri  Bhagavan s  attitude  towards  his  body  was  one  of  complete 
detachment.  Disease  and  pain  left  no  impression  on  his  mind.  If 
he  allowed  himself  to  be  treated  for  the  ailment,  it  was  more 
because  his  devotees  wanted  it  than  because  he  desired  relief.  His 
attitude  was  always  supreme  indifference  to  bodily  ailments. 

So  he  was  an  ideal  patient  implicitly  undergoing  any 
treatment  that  was  decided  upon  by  his  devotees.  Whenever  he 
allowed  any  change  in  treatment  his  only  concern  was  that  there 
should  be  an  agreement  amongst  his  devotees  about  which 
particular  type  of  treatment  should  be  given  a  trial.  As  far  as  he 
personally  was  concerned,  he  did  not  care. 

To  everyone  who  was  by  his  side,  the  way  in  which  he 
bore  with  pain,  which  was  at  times  of  an  extremely  excruciating 
nature,  without  even  showing  the  signs  of  suffering  on  his  face, 


139 


was  a  wonder.  On  one  occasion  during  the  later  stages  of  the 
ailment  when  he  was  having  shooting  pains  down  his  limb,  a 
gentlemen  who  had  come  for  his  darshan  bowed  down  and  said 
that  he  was  leaving  Tiruvannamalai.  Sri  Bhagavan  gave  him  his 
usual  gracious  look  and  smile  as  if  there  was  nothing  wrong 
with  him  at  the  time.  And  it  was  only  after  the  gentleman  left 
that  Sri  Bhagavan  admitted  that  the  pain  was  severe  and  allowed 
himself  to  be  treated  for  it. 

The  tumour  in  the  later  stages  of  his  illness  grew  to  such 
proportions  that  even  medical  men  who  were  used  to  those 
sights  were  shocked  when  they  saw  it.  When  it  was  being  dressed, 
Sri  Bhagavan  used  to  look  at  it  and  often  make  jokes  about  it. 
He  even  helped  the  doctors  to  adjust  the  bandage. 

On  one  occasion  when  the  skin  around  the  tumour  was 
being  cleaned  with  rectified  spirit,  some  of  it  bathed  the  rest  of 
the  arm  and  fell  on  the  body  also.  Sri  Bhagavan  jokingly  said 
that  he  was  having  a  spirit  bath  and  quoted  the  last  stanza  of 
Atma  Bodha  by  Sri  Shankaracharya.  It  was  not  only  a  joke  but 
also  carried  with  it  a  profound  spiritual  teaching. 

One  night  when  there  was  heavy  bleeding  from  the  tumour 
as  it  was  being  dressed,  two  or  three  bhaktas  couldn't  conceal 
their  emotion.  He  looked  at  them  and  said,  "Where  will  1  go? 
And  where  can  I  go?"  And  whenever  he  said  T,  with  emphasis, 
he  always  meant  the  Atman. 

Some  time  ago  when  treating  the  tumour  it  was  suggested 
that  Sri  Bhagavan  should  have  a  sun  bath  and  the  tumour  was 
exposed  to  the  sun  for  a  few  minutes.  To  prevent  flies,  some 
incense  was  put  in  an  oven  and  placed  just  below  the  chair 
upon  which  he  sat.  Sri  Bhagavan  jokingly  said  that  we  were 
offering  worship  to  the  tumour  to  go  away  by  burning  incense 
and  waving  lights  (dhoopam  and  deepam)  before  it. 


140 


One  of  my  friends  took  photographs  of  Sri  Bhagavan  one 
afternoon.  During  the  night  when  we  both  went  together  and 
I  was  dressing  the  wound,  Sri  Bhagavan  referred  to  the  photos 
and  gave  a  profound  spiritual  discourse  using  the  science  of 
photography  as  an  illustration.  Said  Sri  Bhagavan, 

"When  taking  a  picture  the  silver  salts  are  coated  over  a 
film  in  the  dark  and  when  the  film  is  exposed  in  the  camera, 
you  get  an  impression  caused  by  light  outside.  If  the  film  is 
exposed  to  light  before  you  put  it  in  the  camera  there  can  be  no 
impression  on  it.  So  is  it  with  our  jiva.  When  it  is  still  in  darkness, 
impression  can  be  made  on  it  by  the  little  light  that  leaks  in. 
But  when  the  light  of  knowledge  has  already  flooded  it,  there  is 
no  impression  of  external  objects  to  be  obtained."  In  a  similar 
fashion,  he  used  to  entertain  his  medical  attendants  with  jokes 
interspersed  with  profound  spiritual  education. 

Throughout  the  period  of  illness,  his  desire  not  to  embarrass 
his  medical  attendants  in  whatever  system  of  medicine  they 
belonged,  resulted  in  a  perfect  code  of  medical  etiquette  that  could 
not  be  excelled.  When  he  was  having  treatment  of  a  particular 
system  of  medicine  such  as  ayurveda  or  homeopathy,  if  any  one 
suggested  a  remedy  for  the  intense  pain  he  was  having,  he  would 
always  refer  him  to  the  doctor  that  was  in  attendance  and  ask  him 
to  get  his  consent.  On  one  occasion  when  the  surgeons  who  operated 
on  him  had  confessed  that  nothing  short  of  an  amputation  could 
cure  Sri  Bhagavan,  a  devotee  of  many  years  standing,  brought  an 
eminent  physician  of  another  system  of  medicine.  This  gendeman 
saw  Sri  Bhagavan  and  had  a  talk  with  him.  Sri  Bhagavan  received 
him  with  his  usual  gracious  smile  and  the  new  physician  believed 
that  Sri  Bhagavan  wished  him  to  treat  him. 

It  was  characteristic  of  Sri  Bhagavan  —  and  this  was 
observed  by  many  of  his  devotees  —  that  when  each  individual 


141 


went  to  him,  he  returned  with  a  feeling  that  the  Master  had 
poured  his  grace  on  him  alone  and  that  he  was  the  most  loved 
amongst  his  devotees!  I  knew  this  and  therefore  took  this 
physician  to  Sri  Bhagavan  and  asked  him  to  obtain  his  consent 
for  the  treatment.  Sri  Bhagavan  smiled  at  this  and  said,  "Do 
you  know  doctor  so  and  so  who  is  now  treating  me?  Have  you 
had  a  talk  with  him  and  what  did  he  say?"  The  gentleman  was 
nonplussed  and  had  to  go. 

To  watch  Sri  Bhagavan  and  listen  even  to  his  day-to-day 
talk  was  an  education  to  those  who  were  near  him.  There  was 
no  need  to  read  books  on  religion  or  philosophy.  His  whole 
philosophy  and  the  philosophy  of  ages  were  in  Sri  Bhagavan's 
life.  For  his  life  was  an  exposition  of  the  highest  philosophy.  He 
did  not  lecture.  He  did  not  write  books  for  the  edification  of 
learned  scholars  outside  but  by  living  the  life  of  perfection,  he 
gave  to  those  that  came  in  contact  with  him,  a  greater  education 
than  any  books  could  provide.  With  the  passing  of  the  greatest 
spiritual  personality  of  modern  times,  the  world  has  lost  a  living 
teacher,  a  guru  in  its  highest  sense. 


142 


The  End  was  Peaceful 


Eye-witness  Account  of  a 

Medical  Officer  Who 
Attended  on  Sri  Maharshi 

Lt.  Col.  P.V.  Karamchandani 

How  Shri  Maharshi  responded  with  spontaneous 
quickness  to  sincere  requests  and  prayers,  even  during  his  last 
moments,  is  here  detailed  by  a  reputed  physician  who  skethes 
the  sombre  yet  touchingly  majestic  setting  of  the  Masters 
mahanirvana. 

THE  EXTRAORDINARY  PRIVILEGE  of  attending  on 
Bhagavan  Sri  Maharshi  during  the  last  two  months  came  to 
me  rather  unexpectedly  and  without  any  planning  on  my  part. 

About  fifteen  years  ago  while  I  was  working  in  Trichy,  a 
friend  from  North  India  wrote  to  me  asking  particulars  about 
Tiruvannamalai  and  Sri  Ramana  Maharshi.  I  wrote  back  saying 
that  I  had  neither  seen  nor  heard  about  the  town  and  the  sage 
and  that  I  was  interested  in  neither. 

In  December  last  year  I  was  posted  to  North  Arcot  and 
very  soon  after,  a  medical  officer  came  to  me,  invited  me  to  visit 
the  hospital  at  Tiruvannamalai  and  also  added  that  the  occasion 
could  be  availed  of  to  see  Sri  Ramana  Maharshi.  Though  the 


143 


casual  mention  of  Tiruvannamalai  evoked  memories  of  my 
friend  s  query,  I  had  no  impelling  urge  to  go  to  the  district  town. 

Official  work  however,  took  me  to  Tiruvannamalai  after 
some  months.  When  my  inspection  work  was  over,  it  was 
suggested  to  me  that  I  could  pay  a  visit  to  the  Ashram.  I  agreed. 
I  went  to  the  Ashram  and  there  saw  Sri  Bhagavan. 

Before  I  saw  Sri  Maharshi,  I  had  been  told  that  he  was 
four  times  operated  on,  for  sarcoma.  When  I  examined  him,  I 
found  a  small  ulcer  in  his  arm  above  the  elbow.  At  the  upper 
end  of  the  ulcer  there  was  a  swelling.  I  couldn't  be  certain  as  to 
whether  this  was  the  tumour  growth  coming  up  again  after  the 
operation  or  whether  it  was  ordinary  inflammation.  I  suggested 
penicillin  to  eliminate  this  doubt.  Penicillin  was  not  given  and 
in  course  of  time  it  proved  to  be  a  tumour  growth. 

I  was  called  again  to  Tiruvannamalai  only  after  six  weeks. 
When  I  saw  Sri  Bhagavan  this  time,  I  found  a  big  growth  almost 
covering  the  upper  left  arm  except  for  a  two  inch  space  in  front. 
This  growth  was  bleeding  and  losing  serum,  thereby  directly 
depleting  the  system  of  bodily  fluids.  Added  to  this  there  was 
pain,  which  was  exhausting  the  body.  More  than  haemorrhage 
and  loss  of  serum,  pain  was  the  distressing  feature. 

The  variety  of  tumour  that  Sri  Bhagavan  had  was  spindle 
shaped  sarcoma,  probably  arising  from  the  sheath  of  the  ulnar 
nerve.  This  is  a  very  painful  tumour  with  its  speciality  of  shooting 
pain.  In  medical  language  we  call  it  lacinating  pain  but  Sri 
Bhagavan  described  it  as  something  like  insects  creeping  up  and 
down  the  arm!  He  bore  with  this  pain  as  though  the  body  did 
not  belong  to  him.  Whenever  I  asked  him  whether  there  was 
pain,  Sri  Bhagavan  said  that  it  was  nothing. 

Within  this  period  I  came  again  and  found  the  tumour 
furiously  growing,  draining  the  system  fast  and  also  arousing 


144 


some  sensation  of  pain  in  the  impregnable  and  imperturbable 
personality  of  Sri  Bhagavan.  I  could  only  illustrate  this  by  one 
tiny  incident.  A  few  days  before  Sri  Bhagavan's  departure 
someone  touched  the  cloth  on  the  tumour  and  there  appeared 
an  expression  of  pain  on  his  face.  The  attendant  who  touched 
the  cloth  said  that  he  touched  only  the  cloth  on  the  tumour  and 
not  the  tumour  itself.  To  which  Sri  Bhagavan  replied  that  the 
cloth  bore  the  weight  of  mountains! 

I  came  to  see  Sri  Bhagavan  at  about  midnight  on  the  13th 
instant.  I  found  him  resting  with  closed  eyes.  When  he  opened 
them,  he  asked  all  the  attendants  to  clear  out  of  the  room.  He 
repeated  this  half  a  dozen  times  and  this  was  interpreted  as 
delirium.  But  I  examined  him  and  found  him  to  be  fully  conscious 
and  not  at  all  delirious.  I  asked  the  attendants  to  obey  Sri 
Bhagavan's  instructions  by  going  out  of  the  room.  Throughout 
the  night  I  sat  with  him.  There  was  respiratory  embarrassment 
(Cheyne  Stoke  breathing  as  we  call  it).  Pain  was  very  intense 
because  even  the  least  movement  brought  forth  evidence  of  pain. 

I  left  in  the  morning  and  came  back  in  the  evening,  just 
two  hours  before  Sri  Bhagavan's  last  breath.  This  privilege  of 
being  by  his  side  at  that  time  was  something  which  I  prayed  for 
but  which  I  little  expected.  When  I  entered  his  room,  Sri 
Bhagavan's  eyes  were  closed.  He  was  propped  up  on  his  bed  and 
breathing  was  very  hard.  The  lips  were  parched  and  I  gave  him 
some  drops  of  water.  I  thought  that  a  little  fruit  juice  would  be 
better.  I  asked  him,  "Bhagavan,  shall  I  give  you  some  orange 
juice?"  I  repeated  the  question  twice  and  each  time  Sri  Bhagavan 
shook  his  head  to  mean  no'. 

Then  a  strange  thing  happened.  I  stood  beside  him 
prayerfully  repeating  the  question  within  my  mind.  Suddenly, 
Sri  Maharshi  nodded  his  head  to  mean  yes'  and  opened  his 


145 


mouth.  I  gave  him  three  teaspoons  of  juice.  Each  time  he  opened 
his  mouth  and  swallowed  the  juice.  This  was  the  last  nourishment 
that  Sri  Bhagavan  had.  This  was  at  about  7.45  pm. 

At  ten  minutes  to  eight,  Sri  Maharshi's  pulse  was  still 
perceptible.  A  big  crowd  of  devotees  was  sorrowfully  waiting 
outside  expecting  and  fearing  that  the  last  breath  would  be  taken 
at  any  minute.  I  felt  that  it  was  not  a  question  of  minutes  and 
to  relieve  the  prevailing  tension,  a  bulletin  was  issued  to  the 
effect  that  there  was  no  immediate  danger  to  life.  This  relieved 
the  assembled  devotees  a  little.  At  twenty  five  minutes  to  nine, 
the  pulse  was  still  perceptible  and  the  breathing  was  very  hard 
and  laborious.  It  was  distressing  beyond  words  to  see  that  mighty 
personality  suffering  such  pains.  I  asked  within  myself  why  such 
a  great  soul  should  undergo  such  agonies.  Had  he  taken  on 
himself  the  karma  of  others?  If  he  should  suffer  such  pains  what 
about  others?  Could  not  Sri  Bhagavan  relieve  himself  of  the 
pain?  Thoughts  like  these  weighed  in  my  mind  as  I  stood 
watching  Sri  Bhagavan. 

As  though  to  provide  an  answer  to  my  suffering,  the  picture 
changed  and  changed  suddenly.  The  pulse  disappeared  and  breathing 
became  slow  and  easy,  a  very  unusual  feature  at  such  a  time  and 
stage.  The  breathing  became  slower  and  slower  till  it  completely 
stopped  at  thirteen  to  nine.  The  last  breath  was  as  easy  and  slow  as 
any  other  previous  breath.  We  were  able  to  decide  the  last  breath 
only  from  the  fact  that  there  were  no  breaths  after.  The  jerk,  the 
struggle  and  the  gasps  that  usually  announce  the  last  breath  in  the 
case  of  ordinary  people  were  not  there  in  the  case  of  Sri  Bhagavan. 

And  so  slowly  and  smoothly  Sri  Bhagavan  secured  his 
release  from  his  physical  encasement.  That  was  the  end. 

No.  How  could  that  be?  Sri  Bhagavan  has  no  beginning 
and  no  end. 


146 


Aradhana  Day 


I 

Major  Chadwick 

(These  articles  were  written  to  commemorate  Bhagavans 
third  Aradhana^ 

ON  MAY  1 1TH  the  Ashram  celebrates  Sri  Bhagavans  third 
Aradhana,  when  one  will  be  carried  back  to  that  momentous 
night  three  years  ago  when  he  passed.  One  can  still  see  the  tense 
crowds  seated  in  rows  under  the  veranda  of  the  new  hall,  waiting, 
waiting,  waiting  till  the  last  breath  should  be  breathed  and  the 
one  they  all  loved  so  much  should  once  and  for  all  relinquish  his 
body.  Most  of  us  felt  it  would  be  a  happy  release.  We  prayed  he 
might  be  spared  any  further  suffering.  The  sickness  and  pain  had 
been  so  long  drawn  out,  it  was  an  agony  to  watch  the  loved  one 
being  slowly  wasted  away  by  the  malignant  disease. 

Doubtless  he  was  zjnani  and  was  beyond  all  suffering,  he 
was  dwelling  in  the  bliss  of  the  Self,  but  suffering  there  undoubtedly 
was,  though  he  himself  would  have  asked,  "To  whom  is  the 
suffering?"  It  is  a  mystery  beyond  my  comprehension.  Vaguely,  I 
sense  that  if  one  is  liberated,  one  is  free  from  all  pain  as  the  Self  is 
all  bliss.  Behind  even  suffering  there  must  be  a  special  bliss  for 
such.  It  is  only  a  surface  appearance,  though  very  real  and  painful 
for  the  onlooker. 


147 


Swami  Ramathirtha  used  to  say  that  when  he  had  high 
fever  he  experienced  the  most  ecstatic  bliss  during  meditation, 
more  so  than  when  he  was  in  normal  health.  At  first  people  felt 
lost,  they  had  relied  too  much  on  the  personal  form,  though 
Bhagavan  himself  had  repeatedly  warned  them,  "You  attach  too 
much  importance  to  this  body." 

Still  it  was  only  natural  that  this  body  should  be  missed, 
although  as  time  went  on,  the  loss  became  gradually  less  keen. 
His  presence  was  felt  so  strongly  in  the  Ashram,  and  daily  the 
feeling  of  this  actual  presence  grew.  A  visitor  remarked  to  me 
lately,  "One  does  not  miss  the  presence  of  Bhagavan  in  the 
Ashram,  he  is  there  just  as  he  was  before."  And  this  is  true.  He  is 
there  and  he  is  surely  working  and  the  Ashram  will  grow  in 
strength  and  renown  as  time  goes  on.  There  have  been  dark 
days  since  that  night  three  years  ago,but  those  days  are  now 
past.  The  Ashram  takes  on  a  new  life.  There  is  a  new  feeling  in 
the  air  and  the  stagnation  is  over.  The  school  has  been  revived 
and  pujas  are  performed  so  carefully  and  enthusiastically  that 
the  whole  place  rings  with  the  vibrations  thus  set  up. 

I  went  away  never  to  return,  but  he  brought  me  back.  And 
now  I  thank  him  every  day  that  I  have  been  allowed  to  take  part 
in  this  renaissance.  It  is  thrilling  to  the  core  to  feel  it  happening. 
One  should  have  known  that  it  was  bound  to  be  like  this  all  the 
time.  How  could  anything  happen  to  the  place  he  had  sanctified 
with  his  presence  for  so  long?  The  whole  of  India  was  blessed  by 
his  life,  how  much  more  so  the  place  in  which  he  made  his  home. 

I  have  one  piece  of  advice  to  offer  to  one  and  all.  Do  not 
believe  the  stories  you  hear  about  Sri  Ramanasramam  because 
you  can  always  test  the  truth  of  such  tales  for  yourself  without 
relying  on  hearsay.  It  is  very  easy.  Come  and  see  for  yourself. 
You  will  not  be  disappointed. 


148 


II 


Mouni  Sadhu 

THREE  YEARS  AGO  the  sad  news  of  the  departure  from  the 
physical  body  of  Bhagavan  Sri  Ramana  Maharshi  came  to  me 
and  his  other  devotees  scattered  throughout  the  world.  I  do  not 
wish  to  praise  or  compare  the  great  Being  at  whose  feet  the 
Almighty  allowed  me  to  abide. 

For  how  could  we,  from  our  lower  level  of  consciousness, 
describe  exactly  this  Being  whose  mission  was  to  give  us 
something  of  his  infinite  light?  And  for  adequate  assessing  of 
his  greatness,  one  must  at  least  be  on  the  same  level  of  spiritual 
glory.  All  that  I  can  do  is  try  to  convey,  what  I  found  in  my 
own  heart,  when  I  received  news  of  his  departure. 

The  light  from  those  luminous  eyes  of  Sri  Bhagavan,  was 
for  ever  engraved  on  my  memory  when  leaving  the  Ashram. 
And  now  the  account  of  his  death  lies  before  me.  Does  it  mean 
that  those  eyes  cannot  any  more  radiate  their  silent  initiation? 
That  the  light  of  eternity  has  been  really  extinguished?  That 
would  be  ridiculous,  I  know  this  light  is  not  a  material  one, 
though  it  was  conveyed  through  a  material  body.  This  is  a 
mystery  but  not  a  paradox.  I  found  in  my  heart  no  urge  to 
discover  that  mystery  through  the  mind.  I  feel  that  the  fact  was 
so,  even  though  unexplainable  by  the  thinking  process.  So  his 
death  did  not  deprive  me  of  his  reality. 

I  was  sitting  quietly,  as  in  preparation  for  meditation,  but 
this  time,  the  usual  process  was  changed.  Perhaps  he  saw  that 
the  human  heart,  not  yet  free  from  all  its  weaknesses,  needs 
sometimes  some  consolation.  And  then,  instead  of  a  void,  the 
well  known  and  beloved  picture  arose  before  me. 


149 


There  were  most  mysterious  and  inspiring  evenings  at  the 
Ashram,  when  the  beautiful  hymn  "In  praise  of  the  Lord  of  the 
Universe"  {Five  hymns  on  Arunachala)  was  sung  in  the  hall.  Sri 
Bhagavan  evidently  loved  the  hymn,  for  there  would  appear  a 
peculiar  expression  of  other  than  human  beatitude  and  delight 
on  his  face.  I  felt  that  the  hearts  of  those  who  were  present  in 
that  blissful  hour  of  evening  contemplation  were  deeply  attuned 
to  it.  Perhaps  his  penetrating  inner  sight  saw  the  beneficial  process 
in  it,  and  his  silent  blessing  was  the  answer.  How  can  we  fathom 
what  is  unfathomable?  And  now  I  experienced  once  again,  as 
with  all  those  others  who  were  present,  the  same  beautiful  melody 
heard  before  with  my  outer  ears.  It  was  as  if  I  reviewed  a  film. 
There  was  no  sadness  any  more.  Could  it  be  otherwise?  The 
true  legacy  of  the  Master  could  never  be  less  than  joy  this  sublime 
and  silent  joy  of  Being,  untroubled  by  the  waves  of  the 
surrounding  illusory  world  or  maya.  This  was  his  peace  which 
he  bequeathed  to  us. 

Later  came  letters  from  devotees  from  other  continents. 
My  distant  friends  gave  their  own  accounts  of  how  the  tragic 
news  affected  them.  They  tried  their  best  to  console 
themselves  and  me,  saying  that  the  physical  departure  of  the 
Master  could  not  break  our  spiritual  link  with  him.  And  yet 
the  ink  in  the  last  paragraphs  of  such  letters  was  often  blurred 
as  from  fallen  tears. 

It  is  said  that  love  was  the  force  that  created  the  Universe. 
Perhaps  it  is.  But  to  me  the  force  of  such  unselfish  love  as  his,  is 
just  that  power  that  purifies  our  hearts,  when  all  other  methods 
prove  useless.  No  occult  training  nor  any  other  method  can 
give  the  disciple  the  true  peace  which  the  Master  gives. 

Sri  Maharshi  was  a  centre  of  love  such  as  this,  to  his 
disciples.  He  left  us  his  love  and  where  else  in  the  world  could 


150 


be  found  a  purifying  power  such  as  this  to  bring  peace  to  our 
hearts? 

The  anniversaries  of  the  mahasamadhi  of  Sri  Bhagavan 
will  come  one  after  another  and  one  year  will  see  the  last  one 
for  me  on  this  earth.  But  at  the  last  moment  he  will  be  with  me, 
as  with  every  one  of  you  who  knew  him,  if  you  keep  to  the  end, 
his  legacy  of  love. 


151 


Bhagavan  is 
Everywhere 

S.G.  Devaraj 

I HAD  SEEN  Bhagavans  pictures  and  heard  about  him,  but 
was  not  particularly  drawn  to  him  until  1975.  One  afternoon 
in  September  of  that  year  in  a  busy  street  in  an  American  city,  I 
saw  a  man  walking  ahead  of  me  with  a  bag  on  his  back  on  which 
the  Sankskrit  word  AUM  was  embroidered.  Prompted  to  talk  to 
this  man,  I  invited  him  to  have  a  cup  of  tea  in  a  nearby  restaurant. 
I  asked  him  how  it  happened  that  his  bag  bore  the  Sanskrit  word 
AUM.  He  opened  the  bag  and  took  out  the  book  Talks  with  Sri 
Ramana  Maharshi  and  a  few  other  books  about  the  Maharshi. 
We  talked  for  a  while  and  this  north  American  told  me,  "I  was  an 
ordinary  person  like  the  rest  here  in  this  country.  I  had  a  job  and 
a  good  income,  a  car  and  friends  and  relatives.  Everything  was 
OK  but  I  was  worried  about  my  possessions  being  stolen  and  I 
had  to  make  sure  that  my  apartment  was  properly  locked.  I  was 
worried  all  the  time  about  losing  my  possessions.  Somehow  I  got 
some  books  about  Bhagavan  and  read  them  and  then  things  started 
changing.  Now  this  bag  is  all  I  have.  I  do  not  have  a  place  I  call 
mine.  I  do  not  have  a  job.  If  I  need  money  I  work  for  a  few 
hours  or  for  a  day  and  what  I  earn  could  get  a  meal  with  no 
questions  asked.  All  the  time  I  spend  reading  these  books  about 


152 


Bhagavan.  I  keep  reading  them  again  and  again,  but  each  time  I 
learn  something  new." 

It  was  this  strange  encounter  with  an  unknown  person  in 
a  city  far  away  from  Arunachala,  who  gave  up  all  his  possessions 
except  the  bag  on  his  back,  that  prompted  me  to  make  a  trip  to 
Bhagavans  Ashram.  We  reached  the  Ashram  around  3p.m.  on 
the  25th  anniversary  of  his  mahanirvana.  Putting  our  bedding 
and  luggage  in  a  room  and  getting  a  copy  of  the  Ashram 
schedule,  we  went  up  the  Hill  to  Skandashram,  drank  the  spring 
water,  spent  a  few  minutes  in  the  room  there  and  returned  in 
time  for  the  evening  meal  at  the  Ashram.  During  our  1979 
visit,  my  daughter,  looking  at  Bhagavans  picture  in  the  old 
meditation  hall  and  said  to  her  mother,  "Amma,  I  see  light  in 
those  eyes".  In  April  of  1982,  I  was  planning  to  visit  India  to 
bring  my  family  back  to  the  US  to  join  me.  In  the  same  city 
where  I  met  the  strange  person  who  gave  up  all  his  possessions 
except  the  bag  on  his  back,  circumstances  brought  me  into 
contact  with  another  American  just  a  couple  of  days  before  I 
was  to  start  my  trip  to  India.  My  new  friend,  learning  of  my 
trip  to  India,  wanted  me  to  go  to  Tiruvannamalai  and  meet  his 
friends  (whom  he  named)  in  the  Ashram! 

This  encounter  with  a  total  stranger  was  for  me  a  blessing 
and  a  welcome  to  this  home  by  Bhagavan  Himself.  Since  the 
first  trip  in  1976,  Sri  Bhagavan  made  it  possible  for  me  to  come 
to  his  feet  no  less  than  six  times.  Not  only  that,  he  made  it 
possible  for  me  to  go  to  Madurai  and  spend  some  time  in  the 
spot  where  he  had  his  realisation.  What  I  was  at  the  time  of  my 
first  trip  and  what  I  am  now,  only  I  know  and  he  knows.  At 
present  I  am  far,  far  away,  physically,  but  again  and  again  he 
makes  his  presence  felt  in  innumerable  ways.  HE  IS 
EVERYWHERE. 


153 

Bhagavan  Sri  Ramana 
is  Personally 
Present  Here 

Swatantra 

(Sri  Bhagavan  is  very  much  alive!  His  continued 
Presence  at  Sri  Ramanasramam  is  sure  to  be  felt  by  sincere 
seekers  of  Truth,  stresses  the  author  of  this  article.) 

BHAGAVAN  SRI  RAMANA  is  personally  present  here.  To 
demand  proof  is  like  wanting  proof  that  the  sun  is  shining 
overhead.  His  presence  is  known  or  'seen  by  those  with  eyes  to 
see.  For  others  even  a  positive  proof  would  be  useless. 

If  a  few  phenomenal  incidents  are  cited  to  prove  his 
personal  presence  here,  the  logical  mind  may  well  dismiss  them 
all  as  too  fantastic  or  merely  imagination.  A  man  of  faith  could 
accept  the  facts  on  hearing  them  but  would  that  instill 
conviction  of  Sri  Ramanas  presence  as  a  living  reality? 

For  those  who  come  to  visit  Sri  Ramanasramam,  I  would 
like  to  offer  my  advice.  Please  do  not  come  like  a  tourist  merely 
with  an  idea  that  you  are  going  to  sight  —  see  an  Ashram.  Even 
if  it  bears  the  name  of  one  of  the  greatest  Rishis  of  modern 
times.  Don't  go  through  the  ritual  of  offering  prayers  and  puja 


154 


at  various  shrines,  receiving  prasadam  and  vibhuti  only  to  go 
back  satisfied  that  you  have  'done'  with  another  holy  place. 

Of  course,  visiting  holy  places  does  have  great  effect,  but 
that  in  itself  is  not  enough.  It  may  be  enough  for  the  uninitiated, 
but  seekers  of  the  Truth  require  a  sense  of  holy  presence,  such  as 
can  be  experienced  at  Sri  Ramanasramam.lt  is  a  fact  that 
Bhagavan  is  here. 

Towards  the  end  of  his  bodily  manifestation,  he  said,  "They 
say  that  I  am  going,  but  where  can  I  go?  I  am  here". 

Once  when  someone  wrote  a  booklet  criticising  Sri 
Ramanasramam,  Sri  Bhagavan  remarked  that  the  author  had 
done  a  great  service  to  the  cause  of  Truth.  When  asked  for  an 
explanation,  he  said  that  this  book  would  keep  away  the  insincere 
and  superficial  people  and  only  the  sincere  Truth-seekers  would 
continue  to  come.  In  the  same  way  the  Maharshi  himself  has 
done  a  great  service  to  the  cause  of  Truth  by  withdrawing  himself 
from  the  physical  plane.  He  has  made  himself  unavailable  to 
the  worldly  eye,  while  to  the  seeker  with  spiritual  sight  his  living 
presence  is  very  much  here. 

Om  Namo  Bhagavathe  Sri  Ramanaya! 


155 


How  1  Came  to 
Bhagavan 

Muhammad  Abdulla 

I WAS  BROUGHT  UP  in  rather  religious  surroundings  and 
grew  up  a  religious  man.  Later  when  I  went  to  college  and 
abroad  my  outlook  changed.  I  became  an  agnostic  if  not  a 
downright  atheist.  This  condition  lasted  till  my  late  thirties.  All 
this  time,  off  and  on,  I  tried  to  regain  my  faith  but  to  no  avail. 
Somehow  the  idea  of  an  anthropomorphic  God  did  not  appeal 
to  me.  I  could  not  see  any  reason  why  God  created  the  world. 
If  He  wanted  to  prove  Himself  to  Himself,  it  seemed  rather  a 
poor  reason.  To  create  the  world  as  a  puppet  show  and  enjoy  it 
as  a  spectator  also  seemed  ungodly  and  rather  cruel. 

Many  questions  troubled  me.  What  is  God?  What  is  life? 
What  is  it  all  about?  Scriptures  did  not  satisfy  me  for  they  demanded 
faith  to  begin  with,  which  I  did  not  have.  I  studied  psychology  but 
there  was  nothing  beyond  the  unconscious  mind.  I  turned  to 
dialectical  materialism  but  then  again  I  found  that  its  adherents 
were  at  loggerheads  on  trivialities.  Turning  to  existentialism,  I  found 
it  too  morbid  and  depressing.  Finally  I  turned  to  metaphysics  and 
mysticism  and  that  is  where  luck  favoured  me. 

While  I  was  searching  for  a  clue  to  my  problem,  by  chance 
I  got  hold  of  a  book  from  the  library  shelf.  It  was  an  old  edition 


156 


of  Day  by  Day  with  Bhagavan.  I  was  not  particularly  interested 
when  I  started  reading  it,  but  as  I  progressed  my  indifference 
gave  way  to  astonishment.  Well,  here  at  last  there  was  someone 
who  was  reaching  me.  I  read  on  with  great  enthusiasm  and 
finished  the  book  with  a  thirst  for  more.  I  placed  an  order  to 
the  Ashram  Book  Depot  for  all  the  books  about  Bhagavan.  I 
had  never  waited  more  eagerly  for  anything  than  the  book 
parcel.  When  it  came  I  studied  everything  from  cover  to  cover 
drinking  deep  from  this  source  of  true  wisdom. 

For  a  couple  of  months,  I  was  immersed  heart  and  soul  in 
the  teachings  of  Bhagavan.  Here  at  last,  all  my  questions  were 
answered,  all  my  doubts  cleared.  When  I  had  imbibed  his 
teaching,  I  planned  a  visit  to  the  Ashram. 

Now  I  must  say  a  word  or  two  about  the  visits  to  the 
Ashram.  There  is  something  in  coming  to  and  going  from 
this  place.  Some  mysterious  force  takes  charge  of  you  the 
moment  you  decide  to  go  there.  I  met  by  chance  an  old 
devotee,  Prof.  K.  Swaminathan,  who  is  in  charge  of  Ramana 
Kendra  in  New  Delhi.  He  encouraged  me  to  make  the  visit. 
I  left  New  Delhi  and  arrived  at  the  Ashram  two  days  later.  It 
was  2.30  p.m.  I  sat  in  the  meditation  hall  facing  Bhagavan's 
picture.  He  seemed  so  much  alive.  Such  a  kind  and 
benevolent  smile!  I  could  not  move  my  eyes  away  from  him. 
I  had  no  idea  of  the  time  when  suddenly  the  dinner  gong 
was  sounded  at  7.30  p.m. 

I  lived  in  the  Ashram  for  a  month,  and  meditated  morning 
and  evening.  I  found  to  my  surprise  that  the  problems  which 
seemed  monumental  gradually  receded  to  the  background.  The 
past  became  shadowy.  Yesterdays  desires  made  no  sense  and  made 
me  laugh.  Apprehension  for  the  future  dwindled  to  nothing.  I 
felt  happy. 


157 


A  month  was  quickly  over  and  I  travelled  back  with  a 
heavy  heart.  I  had  only  one  prayer  when  I  took  leave  of 
Bhagavan.  I  wanted  to  come  again.  I  also  prayed  to  Bhagavan 
to  help  me  maintain  the  peace  I  had  found  for  a  long  time. 
Both  my  prayers  were  answered.  I  came  again  and  again. 
Bhagavan  never  forsook  me  in  my  hours  of  trials.  I  never  let  go 
of  Bhagavan  nor  does  he  let  go  of  me! 


158 


Ramana's  Universal 
Philosophy 

Dr.  ML  Hafiz  Syed 
I 

Ramana  Maharshi's  Spiritual 
Philosophy  of  Life 

IT  IS  ONLY  the  sage  who  has  realised  the  Truth  Eternal  that 
keeps  the  flame  of  spiritual  wisdom  alive.  He  is  the  perennial 
source  of  inspiration  to  the  earnest  aspirant  on  the  path  of 
spiritual  development.  Without  him  the  world  would  not  have 
had  the  light  of  the  spirit  to  dispel  the  darkness  of  material 
existence. 

Of  such  wisdom  is  sage  Sri  Ramana,  who  embodies  in 
himself  the  Truth  that  is  beyond  time  and  space,  who  stands 
supreme  in  the  realm  of  spiritual  attainment  and  who  is  the 
true  benefactor  of  the  whole  of  the  human  race.  In  him  we  see 
that  glorious  realization  which  at  once,  includes  and  transcends 
all  religions  through  the  revelation  that  the  only  true  religion  is 
the  religion  of  the  heart.  His  teachings  give  the  clearest  expression 
to  that  one,  inexpressible,  universal,  spiritual  experience,  seeking 


159 


which,  every  earnest  aspirant  treads  the  path  of  inward  spiritual 
development.  To  such  an  aspirant  the  Maharishi  s  teachings  are 
a  revelation  of  that  Truth  Eternal  which  ever  resides  as  one  and 
is  identical  with  himself. 

The  nature  of  the  world  —  Reality  —  whatever  it  be  — 
is  no  hurdle  to  one  who  follows  the  path  pointed  out  by  the 
Maharshi.  His  insistence  is  not  so  much  on  deciding  the 
unreality  of  the  world  as  on  discovering  the  Self.  In  one  of 
the  books  published  some  years  ago  by  the  Ashram,  the 
Maharshi  brings  out  his  point  of  view  in  a  striking  manner  in 
reply  to  a  question  as  to  whether  the  objectivity  of  the  world 
is  not  an  indisputable  fact  of  sense  perception  and  whether 
this  objectivity  is  not  itself  proof  positive  of  the  world's  reality. 
Here  is  the  Maharshi's  answer:  "The  world,  which  you  say  is 
real  is  really  mocking  you  for  seeking  to  prove  its  reality,  while 
of  your  own  Reality  you  are  ignorant."  Even  if  we  are  of  the 
world,  the  Maharshi  wants  us  to  see  things  in  their  proper 
perspective.  Discussions  about  the  Reality  or  otherwise  of  the 
world,  should  be  of  secondary  importance  to  the  earnest  seeker 
whose  one  aim  should  be  to  seek  the  Self,  the  T  of  which  he 
can  have  the  least  doubt  and  the  quest  whereof,  can  alone  lead 
him  to  the  one  that  alone  is  real. 

That  Reality  requires  no  proof,  for  it  is  Self-evident.  It 
requires  no  proof,  for  it  is  Self-existing  (Svata-siddhd).  It  requires 
no  scholarly  exposition,  for  it  is  Self-luminous  (Svaprakasa) . 
What  is  required  is  not  the  proof  or  refutation  of  anything,  but 
the  poise  in  and  the  realization  of  the  ever-existent,  unchanging 
Self  or  the  Atman. 

It  would  be  interesting  to  note  in  this  connection  what  the 
Maharshi  says  regarding  the  true  nature  of  sleep,  for  this  will  give 
us  an  idea  as  to  what  the  state  of  pure  consciousness  would  be  in 


160 


relation  to  life  as  we  know  it.  One  is  not  really  enveloped  in 
ignorance,  says  the  Maharshi,  when  one  is  actually  asleep.  Sleep 
is  not  a  state  of  non-  existence  nor  mere  blankness  as  we  suppose 
it  to  be.  It  is  a  pure  state.  And  what  we  call  the  waking 
consciousness  does  not  necessarily  contribute  to  true  knowledge. 

It  is  really  a  state  of  ignorance,  because  as  a  rule  we  are 
forgetful  or  unaware  of  our  real  nature.  The  Maharshi  uses  a 
striking  paradox  in  order  to  impress  on  us  the  all-comprehensive 
nature  of  pure  consciousness.  He  says,  "There  is  full  awareness 
in  sleep  and  total  ignorance  in  the  waking  state,"  and  adds, 
"The  Self  is  beyond  both  knowledge  and  ignorance."  To  put  it 
briefly,  sleep,  dream  and  waking  are  only  different  modes  of 
our  higher  consciousness. 

ETERNAL  AWARENESS:  What  then  is  realization?  What 
is  the  relation  between  our  life  experience  of  ignorant  existence 
and  the  state  of  realization  which  is  all-embracing?  The 
Maharshi's  exposition  on  this  point  is  most  illuminating. 
"Realization",  he  declares,  "is  here  and  now.  It  is  nothing  to  be 
gained  afresh.  The  Self  is  not  'reached',  you  are  the  Self." 

Most  of  us  are  prone  to  think  we  have  not  yet  realized  the 
Self,  that  we  are  ajnanis,  but  the  Maharshi  reminds  us  that  this 
is  merely  our  own  thought  about  ourselves  and  that  is  the  real 
obstacle  in  the  way.  It  is  not  some  objectified  Self  that  is  declared 
to  be  eternal.  Our  awareness  of  the  Self  is  itself  eternal.  They 
are  one  and  identical.  In  the  words  of  the  Maharshi  there  has 
never  been  a  time  when  we  are  not  aware  of  That,  the  Self.  It  is 
the  never-ending,  timeless  state  and  it  is  in  It  that  we  live,  move 
and  have  our  being. 

CLEAREST  DEFINITION:  Elucidating  further  the  same 
point  Maharshi  says  that  the  happiness  the  mind  feels  when 
agreeable  things  are  presented  to  it  is  nothing  but  the  happiness 


161 


inherent  to  the  Self.  On  these  occasions  it  is  verily  into  the  Self 
that  one  dives.  But  the  association  of  ideas  is  responsible  for 
foisting  the  inherent  bliss  in  us  on  things  extraneous,  because 
the  plugging  into  the  Self  was  unconsciously  done.  If  you  do  so 
consciously,  with  the  conviction  that  comes  from  experience 
that  you  are  identical  with  that  happiness  which  is  verily  the 
Self,  the  only  Reality,  you  call  it  realization.  That  is  the  most 
realistic  definition  of  Self-realization,  and  shorn  of  all  mystery 
it  is  the  clearest  one  you  can  have  on  the  subject. 

A  SHACKLE:  Answering  the  question  from  the  particular 
point  of  view  of  the  individual  who  has  to  do  some  specific 
work,  the  Maharshi  reiterates  in  his  own  words  what  Sri  Krishna 
taught  five  thousand  years  ago.  "Work  performed  with 
attachment  is  a  shackle,  whereas  work  done  with  detachment 
does  not  affect  the  doer  who  may  be  said  to  be  in  solitude,  even 
while  he  is  free  from  attachment  and  has  no  desire." 

Just  as  renunciation  is  not  retirement  into  the  forest,  solitude 
is  not  seclusion  from  life.  The  Maharshi  considers  that  solitude  is 
related  more  to  the  inner  working  of  the  mind  of  man  than  in 
keeping  away  from  the  active  life  of  the  outer  world.  Solitude  is  of 
the  mind,  not  of  the  body.  It  is  the  attitude  of  supreme  serenity 
with  which  one  views  the  flow  of  events  in  life  and  does  not  signify 
from  the  highest  point  of  view  living  in  seclusion  and  retirement. 

One  of  the  finest  definitions  of  renunciation  ever  given  is 
vouchsafed  to  us  by  the  Maharshi,  who  says,  "The  Self  alone  is 
permanent.  Renunciation  is  the  non-identification  of  the  Self 
with  the  not-Self.  When  the  ignorance  which  identifies  the  Self 
with  the  not-Self  is  removed,  the  latter  ceases  to  exist  and  that  is 
true  renunciation." 

This  definition,  so  simple  yet  so  profound,  is  at  once  concise 
and  comprehensive. 


162 


One  enquirer  was  puzzled  as  to  what  would  be  the  effect 
of  his  daily  actions,  right  or  wrong,  in  afterlife.  The  ideal  Vedantin 
that  the  Maharshi  is,  his  answer  is  pregnant  with  meaning, 
revealing  to  us  an  insight  into  the  philosophy  of  life  as  taught 
by  the  ancient  rishis.  "The  Self  of  man  has  no  beginning  and 
no  end.  It  is  never  born  and  It  never  dies."  If  this  truth  is 
accepted,  no  question  of  birth  and  death  can  arise.  What  is 
subject  to  birth  and  death  is  the  earthly  vesture  of  man,  whose 
essential  being  is  deathless. 

WHAT  IS  MIND?  To  the  aspirant  on  the  path  of 
Self-realization,  there  is  no  question  so  puzzling  and  so  vital  as 
that  of  mind  control.  Many  are  the  methods  and  remedies 
suggested  and  most  of  them  have  been  practised  with  varying 
degrees  of  success,  but  Maharshi  s  solution  to  this  age-long  problem 
is  all  his  own  and  sheds  new  light  on  this  apparently  hopeless 
problem.  The  Maharshi  says  that,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  there  is  no 
mind  to  control,  if  the  Self  is  realized.  The  Self  shines  when  the 
mind  vanishes.  In  the  realized  man  the  mind  may  be  active  or 
inactive,  but  the  Self  alone  exists.  For  the  mind,  body  and  the 
world  are  not  separate  from  the  Self.  They  cannot  remain  apart 
from  the  Self.  Can  they  be  other  than  the  Self?  When  one  is 
aware  of  the  Self  and  has  fully  established  oneself  in  it,  one  has  no 
reason  to  worry  about  these  shadows  which  cannot  in  the  least 
affect  the  serenity  of  the  immutable  Self. 

In  order  to  have  a  clear  grasp  of  the  Maharshi  s  unique 
teachings  on  this  point,  the  question  has  to  be  considered  in  a 
little  more  detail.  According  to  him  the  problem  of  mind  control 
ceases  to  be  a  problem  when  the  mind  seeks  its  source  within. 

What  is  mind?  Does  it  exist  apart  from  the  thoughts  that 
come  and  go?  What  is  the  T  with  which  the  mind  identifies 
itself?  What  is  the  one  basis  of  the  entire  thought  activity?  It  is 


163 


the  endeavour,  made  here  and  now,  to  gather  in  and  converge 
the  mind  at  its  source,  to  attune  it  to  the  Self  which  is  the  support 
of  all  thought  activity.  This  is  the  most  natural,  direct  and 
immediately  effective  method  of  controlling  the  mind.  Every 
other  conceivable  practice  has  this  fundamental  defect,  namely 
it  tries  to  control  the  mind  by  sustaining  it.  These  other  methods 
of  practice  retain  the  veil  of  the  mind  and  can  therefore  never 
reveal  the  Self.  When  one  dives  within,  seeking  the  source  of 
thought  and  has  a  glimpse  of  the  Self,  one  knows  the  true  nature 
of  the  mind  as  nothing  but  an  unreal  manifestation  of  the  one 
Reality,  the  Self. 

NO  SUCH  THING:  The  two  essential  aspects  of  this 
question  of  mind  control,  which  the  Maharshi  seeks  to  impress 
on  the  earnest  aspirant  are  (1)  that  from  the  true  and  ultimate 
point  of  view  of  the  one  Reality  —  the  Self  —  there  is  no  such 
thing  as  the  mind,  and  (2)  that  the  endeavour  to  control  the 
mind  on  the  contrary  assumption  that  there  is  really  something 
called  the  mind  to  be  controlled,  is  bound  to  prove  futile. 
Because  the  mind,  considered  as  real,  will  never  allow  itself  to 
be  controlled,  just  as  the  thief  will  never  allow  himself  to  be 
caught  by  turning  himself  into  a  policeman.  Under  the 
pretentious  garb  of  a  policeman,  he  would  elude  his  own  arrest 
all  the  more  effectively.  Even  so,  if  we  give  the  mind  the  garb  of 
reality  we  would  never  be  able  to  control  it.  The  Maharshi, 
therefore,  expects  us  to  disregard  all  limitations,  which  pertain 
only  to  the  mind,  and  plunge  headlong  into  a  dauntless  search 
for  the  real  Self  in  us.  When  our  attention  is  fully  riveted  to  the 
Self  as  the  source  of  thought,  the  mind  is  subdued  and  controlled 
quite  naturally  and  without  any  effort. 

This  in  short,  is  the  direct  and  right  way  to  what  is  called 
peace  of  mind.  Maharshi's  method  of  approach  to  the  control 


164 


of  mind  deserves  fullest  consideration  and  sincere  efforts  if  we 
have  failed  in  trying  other  methods  of  mind  control. 


II 

Testimony  of  Islam  to  Bhagavan's 
Life  and  Teachings 

THE  GREATNESS  OF  Ramana  Maharshis  unique  life  and 
teachings  consists  in  the  fact  that  he  was  unacquainted  with  the 
scriptures  of  the  world  and  yet  after  his  Self-realization  the 
knowledge  of  Infinity  was  open  to  him.  To  quote  a  line  from 
Patanjali  s  Yoga  Sutra,  "When  an  unlettered  persons  mind  is  made 
one-pointed,  the  inner  and  outer  knowledge  is  revealed  to  him. 
He  comes  in  direct  contact  with  the  supreme  Source  of  his  Being." 

The  devotees  of  Ramana  are  acquainted  with  his  simple 
and  uneventful  life.  He  lived  a  plain  life  to  the  end.  He  was 
without  any  pose  or  pretensions.  Not  only  that  he  was  a  great 
teacher  and  lived  in  a  high  plane  of  his  own  but  he  was  utterly 
human  in  every  day  life.  He  had  love  and  sympathy  for  every 
living  creature  as  a  true  Brahmin  should  have.  He  mended  his 
own  stick,  took  part  in  the  cutting  of  vegetables  and  cooking 
some  food  now  and  then.  His  sense  of  unity  and  equality  of 
mankind  was  so  great  that  he  never  accepted  anything  prepared 
for  himself  but  had  it  distributed  equally  to  all  persons  present 
in  his  hall.  Men  of  every  race,  caste,  creed,  sex,  high  and  low, 
rich  and  poor,  visited  him  and  to  him  all  were  alike.  He  never 
showed  any  preference  to  men  of  position  or  looked  down 
upon  a  pariah  or  a  panchama.  To  him  all  were  accessible. 


165 


So  was  the  Prophet  of  Islam.  He  believed  in  the  brotherhood 
of  man  and  treated  all  men  alike.  He  used  to  say  to  his  followers, 
Ana  mislakum,  that  is  "I  am  one  like  you".  To  him  Jew  or  gentile, 
Muslim  or  non-  Muslim  were  alike.  Whenever  a  non-Muslim 
visited  him  when  he  was  sitting  in  his  mosque  engaged  in  prayer 
he  would  at  once  rise  up  from  his  seat,  spread  his  own  cloak  and 
seat  him  respectfully.  He  mended  his  own  shoes  and  patched  up 
his  own  worn-out  garment.  Nothing  was  left  in  his  household 
for  the  morrow.  All  that  he  received  during  the  course  of  a  day 
was  distributed  to  the  needy  and  the  poor.  He  often  said  Al faqr 
fakhri,  that  is  to  say,  poverty  is  my  pride'.  He  took  keen  interest 
in  the  welfare  of  human  beings  and  used  to  retire  to  a  cave  for 
spiritual  meditation.  Thus  we  see  there  is  a  close  similarity  between 
his  life  and  that  of  our  beloved  Maharshi. 

We  all  know  how  Maharshi  repeatedly  enjoined  us  to 
surrender  completely  to  Gods  will  and  be  at  peace  with  all, 
sink  and  bury  our  differences.  In  fact  once  he  said,  "Burn  them 
and  turn  to  the  abode  of  peace,  your  own  heart."  Islam  is  derived 
from  the  root  Salama  which  means  peace,  tranquillity  and  finally 
surrender  of  oneself  to  the  Divine.  'The  word  Islam',  says 
Deutch,  a  German  writer,  'implies  absolute  submission  to  God's 
will'.  Hazrat  Ali,  the  fourth  Caliph,  the  son-in-law  of  the  Prophet 
said  that  "No  one  can  have  any  conception  of  God  unless  he 
knows  his  own  Self."  Thus  confirming  Bhagavan's  repeated 
teachings  in  all  his  well  known  books. 

One  mystic  poet  says,  "What  I  have  done  with  myself,  no 
one  has  ever  done  it  for  himself.  Within  my  own  house  (body) 
I  have  lost  the  owner  of  my  house  (that  is  my  own  self)".  Does 
it  not  bear  testimony  to  Bhagavan's  inspiring  words? 

Further  it  is  said  in  the  Quran,  "We  are  of  God  and  to 
Him  shall  we  return" {Quran,  Chapter  II,  verse  1 56).  This  clearly 


166 


indicates  whence  we  came  and  whither  we  are  going.  Man's 
inherent  divinity  is  expressed  in  these  unequivocal  words  of  the 
Quran.  "God  breathed  His  own  breath  in  the  nostril  of  man. 
Man  was  created  after  the  face  of  God." 

In  the  Ghaznavids  and  Early  Saljuq's  period  there  was  a 
great  philosopher-poet  Nasir-e-Khusrau,  who  was  acknowledged 
as  a  mystic  of  a  great  order.  In  his  poem  Raushani  nama  on 
Self-knowledge  he  writes,  bearing  full  testimony  to  Bhagavan's 
well-known  teachings: 

Know  yourself;  for  if  you  know  yourself 

You  will  also  know  the  difference  between  good  and  evil. 

First  become  intimate  with  your  own  inner  being, 

Then  become  the  commander  of  the  whole  company. 

When  you  know  yourself,  you  know  everything; 

When  you  know  that,  you  have  escaped  from  all  evil. 
You  don't  know  your  own  worth,  because  you  are  like  this; 

You  see  God  Himself,  if  you  see  yourself. 

The  nine  spheres  and  seven  stars  are  your  slaves, 

Yet  you  are  your  body's  servant:  that's  a  pity! 

Don't  be  fettered  to  bestial  pleasures 

If  you  are  a  seeker  of  that  supreme  blessedness. 

Be  a  real  man  and  abandon  sleep  and  fasting; 

Pilgrim-like,  make  a  journey  into  yourself. 

What  are  sleep  and  fasting?  The  business  of  brute  beasts; 

It  is  by  knowledge  that  your  soul  subsists. 

Be  wakeful  for  once:  how  long  have  you  been  sleeping? 

Look  at  yourself:    you're  something  wonderful  enough. 

Reflect  now;  regard  from  where  you've  come 

And  why  you  are  now  in  this  prison. 

Break  the  cage;  depart  to  your  own  celestial  station; 

Be  an  idol-breaker  like  Abraham,  Azar's  son. 


167 


You  were  created  after  this  fashion  for  a  purpose; 

It  will  be  a  shame,  if  you  neglect  that  purpose. 

It  is  a  shame  for  an  angel  to  take  orders  from  a  devil; 

It  is  a  shame  for  a  king  to  be  servant  to  a  doorkeeper. 

Why  must  Jesus  be  blind? 

It  is  wrong  for  Karun  to  be  one-eyed. 

You  have  snakes  coiled  over  your  treasure: 

Kill  those  snakes,  and  be  free  of  pain. 

But  if  you  feed  them,  you  will  become  fearful, 

You'll  have  nothing  of  that  boundless  treasure. 

There's  a  treasure  in  your  house,  yet  you're  a  beggar; 

You  have  a  salve  in  your  hand,  yet  your  heart  is  wounded. 

You  are  asleep;  how  will  you  reach  journey's  end? 

You  weave  charms,  and  are  heedless  of  the  treasure.  Quick, 
break  the  charm  and  take  the  treasure: 

Take  a  little  pain,  and  rid  yourself  of  pain. 

Jalaluddin  Rumi,  prince  of  mystics,  quoted  by  R.A. 
Nicholson  in  his  Rumi,  Poet  and  Mystic,  says: 

Jalalu'l-Din  was  asked,  "Is  there  any  way  to  God  nearer 
than  the  ritual  prayer?"  "No,"  he  replied,  "but  prayer  does  not 
consist  in  forms  alone.  Formal  prayer  has  a  beginning  and  an 
end,  like  all  forms  and  bodies  and  everything  that  partakes  of 
speech  and  sound;  but  the  soul  is  unconditioned  and  infinite: 
it  has  neither  beginning  nor  end.  The  prophets  have  shown 
the  true  nature  of  prayer.  .  .  .  Prayer  is  the  drowning  and 
unconsciousness  of  the  soul,  so  that  all  these  forms  remain 
without.  At  that  time  there  is  no  room  even  for  Gabriel,  who 
is  pure  spirit.  One  may  say  that  the  man  who  prays  in  this 
fashion  is  exempt  from  all  religious  obligations,  since  he  is 
deprived  of  his  reason.  Absorption  in  the  Divine  Unity  is  the 
soul  of  prayer." 


168 


"When  a  fly  is  plunged  in  honey,  all  the  members  of  its 
body  are  reduced  to  the  same  condition,  and  it  does  not  move. 
Similarly  the  term  istighraq  (absorption  in  God)  is  applied  to 
one  who  has  no  conscious  existence  or  initiative  or  movement. 
Any  action  that  proceeds  from  him  is  not  his  own.  If  he  is  still 
struggling  in  the  water,  or  if  he  cries  out,  'Oh,  I  am  drowning', 
he  is  not  said  to  be  in  the  state  of  absorption.  This  is  what  is 
signified  by  the  words  Andl-Haqq,  'I  am  God'.  People  imagine 
that  it  is  a  presumptuous  claim,  whereas  it  is  really  a 
presumptuous  claim  to  say  Andl-'abd?  'I  am  the  slave  of  God' 
and  'Andl-Haqq,'  'I  am  God',  is  an  expression  of  great  humility. 
The  man  who  say s,Andl-abd  'I  am  the  slave  of  God,'  affirms 
two  existences,  his  own  and  God's,  but  he  that  says  Andl-Haqq 
'I  am  God'  has  made  himself  non-existent  and  has  given  himself 
up  and  says,  'I  am  God,'  i.e. 'I  am  naught,  He  is  all:  there  is  no 
being  but  God's.'  This  is  the  extreme  of  humility  and  self- 
abasement." 

These  two  quotations  bear  fullest  and  clearest  testimony 
to  Bhagavan's  teachings  as  embodied  in  his  books  Self  Enquiry 
and  Who  am  I?  and  others. 


0*5  SO 


169 

Bhagavan  Sri  Ramana, 
The  Light  Divine 

Dr.  T.M.P.  Mahadevan 

(Excerpts  from  a  speech  delivered  on  a  Jayanti  day) 

IT  IS  DIFFICULT  to  speak  on  Advaita.  It  is  more  difficult  to 
speak  about  Bhagavan.  I  am  not  going  to  speak  as  an 
intellectual,  nor  as  a  professor  of  philosophy,  I  am  going  to  speak 
to  you  as  one  would  to  his  brothers  and  sisters.  I  think  I  will 
succeed  in  expressing  at  least  a  little  of  what  I  feel  about  Bhagavan 
only  when  you  forget  my  personality  totally.  It  is  only  when  the 
speakers  individuality  completely  recedes  into  the  background 
that  the  Advaita  can  be  understood  at  all;  and  Bhagavan  Ramana, 
as  I  am  fond  of  saying,  is  pre-eminently  an  Advaita  avatara. 

Today  is  the  most  blessed  day  for  us,  who  by  a  stroke  of 
good  fortune,  have  come  under  the  protective  wings  of  our 
Bhagavan.  The  ardra  day  has  been  an  auspicious  day  in  the  Hindu 
calendar.  But  it  has  been  made  more  auspicious  because  Bhagavan 
chose  to  be  born  on  that  day,  and  this  year  his  birthday  has  come 
on  the  eve  of  another  holy  day,  Makarasankranti.  We  will  be  able 
to  appreciate  the  greatness  and  grandeur  of  the  life  and  teachings 
of  Bhagavan  if  we  ponder  for  a  moment  over  the  significance  of 
these  two  great  festivals — Ardra  and  Makarasankranti.  Ardra 
marks  the  victory  of  Lord  Siva  over  the  demon  Andhaka.  The 


170 


very  name  Andhaka  means  the  'dark'  and  the  'blind',  and 
Andhaka  is  an  allegory  for  ajnana,  avidya,  ignorance  or  maya. 
It  was  on  the  Ardra  day  that  the  Lord  vanquished  Andhaka  in 
order  that  the  world  may  be  saved,  in  order  that  humanity  may 
see  the  face  of  goodness.  The  myth  of  the  conquest  of  Andhaka 
signifies  the  victory  of  the  forces  of  light  over  those  of  darkness, 
of  vidya  over  avidya,  of  the  supreme  good  over  all  that  is  evil. 

After  killing  the  demon  Andhaka  the  Lord  danced  his 
cosmic  dance,  the  expression  of  supreme  joy,  which  alone  sustains 
the  Universe.  It  is  in  commemoration  of  this  great  event  that 
the  image  of  Nataraja  is  taken  out  of  the  temples  in  procession 
on  the  Ardra  day.  In  the  year  1879,  on  this  auspicious  day  the 
Nataraja  image  of  the  temple  atTiruchuli  was  being  taken  into 
the  temple  at  the  conclusion  of  the  procession.  It  was  at  this 
moment  that  Bhagavan  Ramana  was  born.  So,  it  is  significant 
that  our  Lord  chose  the  auspicious  day  of  Ardra  for  making  His 
advent  into  this  world. 

Makarasankranti,  again,  marks  the  dawn  of  the  day  of  the 
gods  —  the  beginning  of  Uttarayana.  Students  of  the  Mahabharata 
will  remember  that  the  great  Bhishma  lay  on  a  bed  of  arrows 
awaiting  the  dawn  of  Uttarayana.  Today  the  gods  are  awake.  They 
have  begun  to  have  another  bright  day.  The  month  proceeding 
Makarasankranti  is  also  a  holy  month  for  us  Hindus.  The  month 
of  Mirgasirsha  is  to  the  gods  what  the  Brahmamuhurtam  is  to 
humans.  Therefore  we  prepare  ourselves  during  this  month  for  the 
dawn  of  the  divine  day  by  rising  early  in  the  morning  and  singing 
the  praise  of  the  Lord.  In  the  south,  especially  in  the  Tamil  area, 
even  today  we  find  groups  of  devotees  rising  early  in  the  morning 
and  singing  the  praise  of  God  in  the  villages  and  towns,  singing 
and  awakening  those  who  slumber  and  who  will  not  otherwise 
hear  the  call  of  the  divine. 


171 


The  drama  of  bridal  mysticism  as  portrayed  in  the 
Tiruppavai  of  Andal  and  the  Tiruvembavai  of  Manikavachakar 
is  the  great  drama  of  the  communion  of  the  soul  with  God.  And 
it  is  this  consummation  that  is  sought  to  be  achieved  by  observing 
the  vrata  (penanace)  in  the  month  of  Mirgasirsha.  This  year  after 
that  preparatory  penance  we  have  today  entered  the  path  of  light, 
the  path  of  divine  light.  It  is  supremely  significant  that  we  should 
be  thinking  of  Bhagavan  the  light  divine'.  Bhagavan  Ramana  is 
the  supreme  and  eternal  light,  which  alone  can  save  us  from 
degradation  and  spiritual  death.  I  am  reminded  of  a  mantra  of 
the  Isavasya  Upanishad  which  describes  in  graphic  terms  the  lot 
of  those  who  are  killers  of  the  soul. 

Those  who  are  slayers  of  the  Self  go  to  demoniac  worlds 
of  blinding  darkness  enveloped  in  ajnana.  If  we  do  not  want  to 
share  the  fate  of  the  soul-killers,  we  must  turn  our  eyes  away 
from  those  regions  of  blinding  darkness  and  take  to  the  straight 
path  of  spiritual  light  emblazoned  before  us  by  Bhagavan  Sri 
Ramana.  So  on  this  auspicious  occasion  may  we  meditate  on 
Bhagavan  as  the  light  divine. 

The  symbol  of  light  as  representing  spiritual  illumination 
is  as  universal  as  religion  is.  In  mysticism  and  in  spirituality 
there  is  no  better  symbol  of  the  spirit  than  light.  In  Christianity 
the  symbol  of  light  is  employed  to  denote  the  heavenly  Father 
and  the  heavenly  Son  equally.  One  of  the  pictures  that  impressed 
me  when  I  was  young  and  continues  to  fascinate  me  is  that  of 
Jesus  Christ  holding  a  lighted  lantern  in  one  hand  and  knocking 
at  the  door  of  a  house  with  the  other,  bearing  the  inscription, 
"Behold  the  light  of  the  world." 

The  Buddha  has  been  described  as  the  light  of  Asia. 
Zoroastrianism  thinks  of  God  as  the  luminous  Fire.  The  Konarak 
Temple,  which  I  visited  recently,  is  a  great  monument  of  the 


172 


devotion  of  the  Hindu  for  the  symbol  of  the  sun.  One  finds 
there  various  aspects  of  the  solar  principle  expressed  in  beautiful 
sculpture.  Sun-worship  is  not  foreign  to  India.  The  sun  cult 
(Saura-mata)  is  one  of  the  oldest  forms  of  Hinduism.  In  the 
mantras  of  Rig  Veda  we  have  different  aspects  of  the  solar 
principle  adored  and  we  come  across  names  of  various  solar 
deities.  The  Gayatri  mantra  signifies  a  grand  mode  of  meditating 
on  the  principle  that  is  behind  the  sun.  The  adored  principle  is 
the  worshipful  splendour  of  the  solar  deity. 

The  supreme  splendour  of  the  solar  deity  we  invoke  and 
meditate  on  every  day  so  that  our  intellects  may  be  purified 
thereby.  To  characterise  the  Vedic  deities  as  the  personification 
of  natural  phenomena  is  not  to  understand  what  the  ancient 
seers  and  saints  saw  in  their  inward  turned  vision.  It  was  not  the 
physical  phenomena  that  they  worshipped,  but  the  spiritual 
principle  behind  nature.  They  also  discovered  that  the  same 
principle  pervades  everything,  objective  as  well  as  subjective. 
Between  the  external  and  the  internal  there  is  correspondence 
in  principle.  For  instance,  all  Upanishadic  text  identifies  the 
god  that  is  in  the  sun  with  the  principle  that  is  in  the  right  eye. 
What  is  in  the  macrocosm  is  identical  with  what  is  in  the 
microcosm.  We  find  this  truth  expressed  exquisitely  in  the  form 
of  a  prayer  in  the  Isavasya  Upanishad. 

No  poet  of  mean  order,  no  worshipper  of  the  natural 
phenomena  could  have  composed  this  grand  verse.  The  spiritual 
principle  behind  the  solar  phenomena  is  recognised  here,  and  it 
is  this  spiritual  principle  that  is  prayed  to  in  this  verse.  Consider 
the  grand  closing  of  this  mantra,  where  there  is  a  Mahavakya 
uttered:  yosavasan  purusah  soham  asmi.  The  principle  that  is 
yonder,  miles  and  miles  away,  in  the  sun  is  the  same  principle 
that  is  within  me.  I  am  He.  Thus  in  Hinduism  we  find  the  true 


173 


significance  of  sun-worship  expressed.  Then  we  are  told  that  the 
consummation  of  such  worship  is  the  realisation  of  non-duality, 
the  realisation  of  abedha,  non-difference.  The  symbol  of  light  is 
not  an  empty  symbol.  It  is  sublime  in  its  significance.  Sri  Ramana 
represents  the  supreme  light  of  spirituality  which  knows  no 
distinction  and  which  knows  no  difference. 

The  birth  of  Bhagavan  is  itself  a  manifestation  of  that 
spiritual  illumination.  In  order  to  lift  us  to  the  spiritual  heights, 
in  order  to  attract  us  to  the  supreme  goal,  he  incarnated  himself 
as  a  human  being,  and  lived  and  moved  in  our  midst.  We  know 
that  Bhagavan  as  a  student  did  not  belong  to  the  extraordinary 
type.  He  was  not  brilliant,  nor  even  studious.  But  how  this 
ordinary  lad  received  illumination  all  of  a  sudden  cannot  be 
explained.  How  this  could  happen  passes  our  understanding. 
The  little  candle  of  our  intellect  cannot  illumine  the  self-effulgent 
sun.  To  attempt  to  understand  the  secret  of  Bhagavans  life  is 
bound  to  end  in  failure.  All  that  we  can  do  is  to  meditate  on 
him  as  the  light  eternal,  the  light  supreme. 

Look  at  another  marvel.  Some  relative  of  his  who  came  to  his 
uncles  house  in  Madurai  one  day  said  that  he  was  coming  from 
Arunachala.  But  what  Arurnachala  was,  what  it  meant,  our 
Bhagavan  did  not  know.  Yet  this  word  acted  like  a  magic  spell  and 
drew  him  out  of  his  uncles  house  to  that  Hill  which  is  no  ordinary 
Hill,  but  which  is  the  Hill  of  spiritual  light.  The  Hill  which  represents 
spiritual  light  drew  unto  itself  the  light  that  was  born  in  Tiruchuli. 
This  light  travelled  to  'The  Hill  of  the  Holy  Beacon ,  and  what 
appeared  as  two  lights  were  recognised  to  be  one. 

The  story  about  Tiruvannamalai  (Arunachala)  is  itself 
significant,  as  are  the  festivals  connected  with  Bhagavans  birth. 
The  Creator  Brahma  and  the  Protector  Vishnu  are  said  to  have 
quarrelled  between  themselves  as  to  who  was  superior.  In  order 


174 


to  teach  them  a  lesson  Lord  Siva  appeared  as  a  column  of  light 
without  top  or  bottom.  Brahma  and  Vishnu  could  not  discover 
the  limits  of  the  light-column.  It  is  this  limitless  light  that 
Arunachala  represents.  Bhagavan  found  in  Arunachala  the  light 
supreme,  which  he  himself  is. 

Bhagavan  did  not  leave  the  precincts  of  Arunachala  after 
his  arrival  there.  Why  should  he  go  anywhere?  When  the  world 
was  ready  to  go  to  him,  why  should  he  go  to  the  world?  The 
world  should  go  to  the  guru.  There  is  no  use  of  the  guru  going 
to  the  world.  Because  if  he  goes  to  the  world  he  would  only  be 
misunderstood.  Even  Sri  Krishna  had  to  confess  that  he  was 
not  being  understood  by  the  people. 

"Because  I  have  taken  birth  as  a  human  being  people  do 
not  understand  me.  On  the  contrary,  they  scold  me,  they  abuse 
me,  they  revile  me." 

The  world  knows  only  to  revile  things!  Even  Arjuna, 
Krishna's  own  cousin  and  dear  disciple,  could  not  understand 
the  magnificence  of  the  supreme  Master.  The  Lord  had  to  reveal 
his  cosmic  form  in  order  to  drive  sense  into  Arjuna's  head. 
Arjuna  repents  for  his  past  behaviour  and  says,  "Out  of  familiarity 
and  not  knowing  your  greatness,  I  have  called  you, '  O  Krishna, 

0  Yadava,  O  friend.'  Please  forgive  me  for  whatever  disrespect 

1  have  shown  towards  you."  Because  of  his  easy  accessibility  Sri 
Krishna  was  not  understood  by  the  world.  The  world  seldom 
understands  the  guru  who  goes  to  it. 

It  is  only  when  the  world  has  learned  to  go  to  the  guru 
that  the  world  will  feel  inclined  to  listen  to  him.  Sri  Ramana 
had  no  need  of  going  to  the  world  whilst  he  lived  in  Arunachala. 
The  world,  even  the  western  world  went  to  him.  Why  did  this 
happen?  Bhagavan  was  the  light  transcendent  which  cannot  be 
resisted.  If  you  try  to  resist  it  today,  by  a  greater  force  you  will 


175 


be  attracted  to  it  tomorrow.  Light  does  not  require  darkness  for 
making  it  acceptable.  Only  darkness  does.  You  need  not  paint 
light  because  it  is  all  luminous.  Without  advertisement,  without 
any  drum  beating,  without  any  concerted  propaganda,  the  light 
that  was  at  Arunachala  spread  far  and  wide,  and  it  is  on  that 
light  that  we  should  meditate.  We  saw  before  our  eyes  the  grand 
manifestation  of  that  majestic  light.  We  saw  the  grandeur  of 
that  spiritual  light  before  us.  If  we  could  not  see  it,  it  was  our 
fault,  and  not  that  of  the  light.  In  order  that  you  may  understand 
light,  the  light  need  not  speak  to  us.  It  is  only  when  there  is 
darkness  that  you  require  the  help  of  speech  in  order  to  identify 
the  things  around,  but  when  there  is  light  and  when  your  eyes 
are  all  right  you  need  not  be  told  what  is  around  you. 

And  so,  for  the  most  part,  Bhagavan  Ramana  kept  silent. 
Silence  was  his  mode  of  communication.  Today  people  all  over 
the  world  are  striving  hard  to  find  out  new  means  of 
communication.  But  in  spite  of  the  many  devices,  communication 
becomes  more  and  more  difficult.  Here,  without  any  verbal 
communication  for  the  most  part,  the  blessed  Lord,  seated  or 
reclining  on  his  couch  in  the  corner  of  the  old  hall  in  the  Ashram, 
was  communicating  not  only  with  those  who  sat  before  him,  but 
with  devotees  who  were  even  far  away.  Though  most  of  us  may 
not  understand  for  the  moment  the  language  of  silence,  we  are 
sure  to  understand  it  eventually.  Our  Bhagavan  did  not  move 
out  of  Arunachala  and  seldom  did  he  speak.  Even  his  speech  was 
of  a  quality  that  is  far  different  from  the  speech  that  we  are 
accustomed  to.  His  speech  was  scarcely  distinguishable  from 
silence.  Some  of  us  had  opportunities  of  watching  the  grand  silent 
drama  that  was  being  enacted  constantly  in  that  auspicious  hall. 
People  came,  strangers  came  with  long  lists  of  questions  to  test 
the  Maharshi,  but  often  it  so  happened  that  those  who  came  with 


176 


doubts  forgot  all  about  them.  They  forgot  to  question  because 
there  was  no  need  to  ask.  What  they  had  come  for  had  already 
been  fulfilled. 

The  most  remarkable  feature  about  Bhagavans  form  was 
his  eyes,  extremely  penetrating  and  profoundly  fascinating. 
Once  you  had  come  within  the  range  of  those  beaming  eyes, 
there  was  no  need  for  any  other  sadhana.  Once  those  eyes  had 
rested  upon  you  there  was  no  more  fear  or  worry  for  you.  The 
very  first  European  to  see  our  Master,  Humphrys,  who  sent 
reports  to  a  magazine  in  England,  has  made  this  statement: 
Tor  half  an  hour  I  looked  into  the  Maharshi's  eyes,  which  never 
changed  their  expression  of  deep  contemplation.'  This  was 
written  as  early  as  in  1911.  Those  of  us  who  met  the  Master 
much  later  could  testify  that  the  brightness  of  those  eyes  did 
not  diminish  at  all,  not  even  on  the  last  day  of  the  his  earthly 
existence. 

Last  summer  in  Honolulu  some  American  professors  of 
philosophy  happened  to  look  at  the  picture  of  the  Master  that 
appears  as  frontispiece  in  the  book  Ramana  Maharshi  and  His 
Philosophy  of  Existence.  Many  of  them  wanted  to  have  copies  of 
this  book  even  before  reading  what  was  written  there,  just  because 
the  face  of  the  Master  fascinated  them,  enraptured  them.  All  of 
them,  without  exception  remarked  about  the  remarkable  eyes. 
From  those  eyes,  light  shone  forth  from  which  no  one  could 
escape.  Bhagavan  out  of  compassion  for  us,  who  cannot 
understand  the  language  of  silence,  did  sometimes  speak,  but 
not  for  the  sake  of  speaking  as  most  of  us  do.  He  wrote  not  for 
the  sake  of  writing,  because  he  was  no  writer  at  all.  He  spoke 
and  wrote  because  he  wanted  to  save  us. 

There  is  a  fine  sloka  in  the  Aankaradigvijaya  where 
Vidyaranya  offers  obeisance  to  Dakshinamuthi  and  Sankara: 


177 


"Rising  from  his  seat  beneath  the  banyan  tree,  and  breaking 
His  silence,  Dakshinamurti,  out  of  compassion  for  humanity 
which  is  being  burnt  in  the  forest-fire  of  samsara,  took  form  as 
Sankara  who  moved  about  constantly  and  spoke  profusely.  The 
silent  Dakshinamurti  became  the  speaking  Sankara.  The 
unmoving  began  to  move." 

Bhagavan  Ramana  struck  a  compromise  between  the 
silence  and  stasis  of  Dakshinmurti  and  the  speech  and  movement 
of  Sankara,  because  today  we  require  the  message  of  both  atchara 
and  chara,  mauna  and  vak.  Bhagavan  Ramana  spoke  and  wrote 
in  order  that  we  may  understand  him.  The  path  of  light  that  he 
has  expounded  in  what  he  has  written  and  spoken  is  the  same 
path  of  light  which  has  come  from  the  ancient  sages  and  seers 
of  the  Upanishads.  The  light  of  jnana  is  what  we  ought  to  strive 
for  and  gain.  It  is  this  which  can  save  us.  And  this  is  the  central 
message  of  Bhagavan,  the  light  divine.  What  is  this  light?  It  is 
the  light  ofAtma  vichara,  the  light  of  Self-enquiry.  This  light 
can  be  gained  by  anyone,  any  human  being,  no  matter  what 
his  beliefs  are,  or  where  he  is  born.  The  Upanishads  set  forth 
various  modes  of  Self-enquiry.  Only  our  Bhagavan  has  made 
Self-enquiry  easy  for  us,  and  has  simplified  it  so  that  all  of  us 
can  adopt  it  and  follow  it  and  gain  what  it  alone  can  give  us. 
And  also  he  has  given  us  a  technique  by  which  we  can  register 
quick  results.  He  rediscovered  for  us  the  heart  that  is  on  the 
right  side  of  the  chest.  By  fixing  the  attention  on  this  heart,  the 
spiritual  heart,  the  path  of  enquiry,  a  discovery  made  in  Vedanta, 
our  Bhagavan  has  given  to  us  out  of  compassion. 

It  will  be  interesting  to  note  that  the  great  Upanishadic 
sage  Yagnavalkya  in  one  of  his  teachings  to  King  Janaka  employs 
the  significant  phrase,  'hrdyantar-jyotiti,  in  describing  the  self— 
the  Atma,  the  light  which  is  within  the  heart. 


178 


One  day  when  the  Sage  walked  into  the  kings  court,  the 
king  put  to  him  a  question.  It  was:  "What  serves  as  the  light  for 
man: 

The  Master  began  by  saying  that  "the  sun  is  light  for  man." 
"During  daytime  it  is  by  the  light  of  the  sun  that  we  work". 

Then  the  king  asked,  'When  the  sun  has  set,  what  is  man's 
light?"  "The  moon",  came  the  answer.  "We  do  work  with  the 
help  of  the  light  of  the  moon;  when  the  sun  has  set,  the  moon 
acts  as  the  light  for  us." 

"But  what  happens  during  the  absence  of  moonlight?" 
asked  the  king.  "What  serves  as  the  light  then?"  "Fire!"  said  the 
master.  "You  may  light  a  fire,  you  may  burn  a  lamp  and  work 
with  the  help  of  the  light  it  gives." 

"And  when  fire  goes  out,  what  has  one  to  do?  There  is  no 
sun,  moon,  or  fire!" 

"In  such  a  situation  speech  can  serve  as  the  principle  of 
illumination.  For  instance,  when  we  go  through  a  dark  region 
where  no  light  is  there,  we  clap  our  hands  or  we  speak  in  order 
to  hearten  those  who  may  follow  us",  continued  the  master. 

"When  speech,  sir,  is  also  not  there,  what  serves  as  light  for 

man: 

The  final  reply  of  the  Master  came,  "The  Self.  The  Self, 
Self  luminous  light." 

What  happens  to  us  when  we  dream?  There  is  not  the 
external  sun,  nor  the  moon,  nor  fire,  nor  even  speech,  and  yet 
there  is  experience.  The  Self  of  the  dream  state  is  therefore  called 
taijasa  (made  of  light).  In  the  absence  of  any  light  there  is 
experience,  there  is  luminosity.  The  Self  is  of  the  nature  of 
consciousness.  It  is  that  which  shines  in  the  recesses  of  one's 
heart.  This  is  the  great  teaching  of  Vedanta  and  Bhagavan.  So 
long  as  we  trust  the  light  of  the  mind,  we  are  sure  to  be  misguided. 


179 


It  is  only  when  we  turn  to  the  light  of  the  heart  that  we  shall  be 
saved.  The  great  danger  that  confronts  the  modern  man  is  that 
he  believes  in  the  omnipotence  of  the  light  of  the  mind.  He 
scans  space.  He  wants  to  travel  through  it.  He  wants  to  know 
what  is  on  the  other  side  of  the  moon.  He  wants  to  colonise  the 
planets  and  the  stars  if  he  can,  all  with  the  help  of  this  light  of 
the  mind.  He  has  not  opened  the  door  of  his  heart,  and  so  he  is 
threatened  by  what  he  has  created  by  the  light  of  his  mind. 
What  man  has  created  now  dominates  him  like  a  Frankenstein 
and  threatens  him  with  utter  destruction. 

What  does  Bhagavan  teach  us?  He  does  not  want  us  to 
shut  out  the  light  of  the  mind.  "With  the  help  of  the  mind,  he 
says,  "let  us  enter  the  region  of  the  heart."  When  you  turn  to 
the  light  of  the  heart,  you  will  know  that  the  mind  shines  only 
by  borrowed  light.  The  original  light  is  there.  It  is  that  resplendent 
light  which  is  the  supreme  Self.  It  is  this  which  is  called 
Hrdyantar-jyotih  (light  within  the  heart). 

Bhagavan  found  its  location  on  the  right  side  of  the  chest. 
It  is  not  the  physical  heart  which  is  on  the  left  side,  it  is  the 
spiritual  heart.  Not  that  it  is  there  physically.  The  surgeon's  knife 
cannot  exhibit  it.  It  is  the  spiritual  heart  which  Bhagavan  Ramana 
located  on  the  right  side  of  the  chest,  so  that  we  may  meditate 
on  it  and  gain  progress  in  the  path  otjnana.  How  should  one 
enquire?  Bhagavan  has  given  us  a  wondrous  method.  It  is  the 
simple  enquiry  of 'Who  am  I?'  Bhagavan  Ramana  held  that  the 
word  'Aharri,  is  the  most  sacred  of  all  mantras,  more  sacred 
even  than  the  Pranava  itself.  It  is  more  efficacious  than  all  the 
mantras.  This  again  is  a  true  discovery  of  Bhagavan.  It  is  true 
that  the  Pranava  is  the  sound-symbol  of  Brahman.  But  what  is 
easier  to  understand  is  cAham'(I).  You  may  deny  everything  else 
but  you  cannot  deny  the  Self. 


180 


Aham  is  often  meant  to  signify  the  non-Self.  Even  the  T 
thought  is  not  the  real  T.  It  is  the  pseudo  T.  In  order  to 
overcome  this,  it  has  to  be  used  in  a  judicious  way.  One  must 
trace  the  T  thought  to  its  source.  When  this  is  done,  with 
constant  and  persistent  inquiry,  the  distinction  between  the 
thinker  and  thought  is  found  to  vanish  and  then  the  Self  which 
is  pure  experience  will  be  realised.  This  path  is  the  same  as  the 
asparsa-yogdi  taught  by  Gaudapada.  It  is  the  path  that  leads  to 
non-duality,  the  path  which  takes  us  away  from  the  non-Self. 
Ordinarily,  man  runs  along  the  mental  current,  goes  out  through 
the  sense-channels  and  gets  lost  in  the  external  world.  But  one 
in  a  million,  the  hero,  dhira  as  the  Upanishads  call  him,  has  the 
strength  to  go  against  the  current,  swim  in  the  reverse  direction, 
and  reach  the  source  of  the  mental  current.  This  is  the  path  of 
vichara  which  is  easy  and  yet  difficult.  Seemingly  easy,  even  a 
child  can  pursue  this  course  at  the  beginning,  but  he  cannot 
gain  its  end  if  he  chooses  to  remain  childish  all  the  time.  It  is 
true  that  anyone  can  take  to  it  but  he  must  pay  the  price  for  it. 
The  price  is  dispassion.  This  does  not  mean  that  one  must  neglect 
one's  duties.  When  sadhakas  asked  Bbagavan,"Is  it  necessary 
that  one  should  leave  one's  house,  change  the  colour  of  one's 
clothes  and  go  to  the  forest,"  Bhagavan  used  to  say,  "No,  it  is 
wrong  to  think  that  you  will  become  a  new  man  by  simply 
leaving  home.  If  you  go  to  the  forest  your  home  will  haunt 
you,  it  will  follow  you.  Can  you  leave  your  mind  behind,  your 
sense  organs  or  your  body?  What  binds  you  is  not  your  family, 
or  home,  but  your  mind.  How  to  renounce  the  mind?  To 
renounce  does  not  mean  sitting  in  a  place  closing  the  eyes  and 
thinking  'I  have  renounced.'  That  is  not  true  renunciation. 
True  renunciation  is  to  become  mindless.  How  is  this  to  be 
accomplished?  Through  inquiry.  Trace  the  mind  to  its  source 


181 


with  the  help  of  the  mind  itself.  Catch  the  thief  with  the  help 
of  the  thief.  Through  Atma  vichara,  we  get  to  the  end  where 
there  is  no  mind  at  all.  If  you  cannot  do  this,  if  you  do  not  have 
the  strength  to  follow  this  method,"  says  Bhagavan,  "surrender 
yourself  to  God.  Absolute  self-surrender  is  bhakti.  "In  Bhagavan's 
hymns  on  Arunachala  we  have  a  glorious  philosophy  of 
devotion.  The  quintessence  of  this  philosophy  is  to  negate 
yourself  in  the  Lord  and  you  will  find  fulfilment.  Let  God 
pervade  your  being  then  you  will  be  saved.  Even  this  is  difficult 
for  many  of  us.  We  worship  God  with  commercial  spirit.  We 
seek  earthly  benefits  from  Him. 

A  sanyasin  went  to  the  palace  of  a  king  in  the  hope  of 
receiving  alms.  The  king  was  engaged  at  the  time  in  worshipping 
his  chosen  deity.  His  prayer  was,  "Give  me  this,  give  me  that." 
The  sanyasin  was  listening  to  this  prayer;  and  after  a  while  he 
rose  to  leave  the  palace.  The  king  came  out  and  asked  him  why 
he  was  leaving.  The  sanyasin  said,  "I  came  to  beg  but  I  now  find 
that  you  are  a  greater  beggar.  How  can  I  beg  of  you  when  you 
yourself  beg  for  this  and  that  in  your  private  shrine?" 

We  go  to  God  for  gaining  selfish  ends.  There  are  phalasrutis 
which  say  'If  you  recite  this  prayer,  you  will  get  your  desires 
fulfilled'.  I  am  not  condemning  or  criticising  this,  but  I  want 
you  to  understand  the  significance  of  the  phalasrutis.  When  a 
phalasruti  says, '  If  you  recite  the  Vishnu-sahasra  nama  your  desires 
will  be  fulfilled',  this  is  only  with  a  view  to  making  people  turn 
God- ward  and  recite  His  name.  But  when  once  you  have  tasted 
the  sweetness  of  the  name  you  will  not  care  for  the  earthly  benefits. 

When  you  go  to  God  therefore,  what  you  should  do  is  to 
surrender  yourself  to  Him  completely.  But  this  too  is  difficult. 
And  so  what  should  one  do?  We  must  resign  ourselves  into  the 
hands  of  the  guru,  Bhagavan  Ramana.  This  is  the  purpose  of  a 


182 


celebration  like  this.  If  we  can  surrender  ourselves,  especially 
those  of  us  who  have  seen  him  and  have  heard  him  speak,  we 
shall  be  saved.  Even  others  can  follow  this  course  because  he  has 
not  gone  away  from  us.  It  is  not  that  he  is  no  longer  with  us. 
Even  now  he  guides  those  who  go  to  him.  The  reality  which  is 
the  Self  shines  within  those  who  go  to  him.  Even  today  he  will 
guide  us  provided  that  we  seek  his  guidance. 

Bhagavan  has  declared  in  two  short  lines  the  entire  teaching 
of  Vedanta: 

Ekam  aksharam  hrdi  nirantaram, 

bhasate  svayam  likhyate  katham. 

The  Reality  which  is  the  Self  shines  within  the  heart  always. 
How  can  one  write  about  it? 

If  we  can  realise  within  the  heart  the  supreme  Spirit,  if  we 
can  feel  its  presence,  if  we  allow  ourselves  to  be  illumined  by  it, 
we  shall  have  no  fear  at  all.  At  the  commencement  of  the  fourth 
chapter  of  the  Mandukya-kharika  Gaudapada  offers  obeisance 
to  Lord  Narayana,  the  first  guru.  We  may  offer  the  same 
obeisance  to  our  Bhagavan.  Jnana  is  like  akasa,  the  supreme 
Self  which  is  to  be  known  through  jnana  is  also  like  ether.  The 
various  objects  we  see  in  the  world  as  well  as  the  souls  are  like 
ether.  Therefore,  who  is  to  know  which?  What  is  to  be  known 
by  what?  The  supreme  realization  is  that  there  is  no  plurality. 
True  knowledge  is  distinctionless.  That  knowledge  is  the  Self, 
the  Light  Divine.  That  knowledge  is  Bhagavan  Ramana. 

May  we  offer  our  obeisance  to  this  supreme  Lord  who 
came  to  save  the  world  and  who  still  abides  and  will  ever  abide 
with  us  in  order  to  make  us  perfect! 

May  we,  on  this  auspicious  occasion,  renew  our  faith  in 
our  Bhagavan  and  pay  homage  to  Him  so  that  not  only  we,  but 
the  entire  world  may  be  saved! 


183 

Sri  Ramana: 
A  Pure  Channel  for 
a  Higher  Power 

Paul  Brunton 

FORTY  YEARS*  have  passed  since  I  walked  into  his  abode 
and  saw  the  Maharshi  half-reclining,  half-sitting  on  a  tiger- 
skin  covered  couch.  After  such  a  long  period  most  memories  of 
the  past  become  somewhat  faded,  if  they  do  not  lose  their 
existence  altogether.  But  I  can  truthfully  declare  that,  in  his 
case,  nothing  of  the  kind  has  happened.  On  the  contrary,  his 
face,  expression,  figure  and  surroundings  are  as  vivid  now  as 
they  were  then.  What  is  even  more  important  to  me  is  that  -  at 
least  during  my  daily  periods  of  meditation  -  the  feeling  of  his 
radiant  presence  is  as  actual  and  as  immediate  today  as  it  was  on 
that  first  day. 

So  powerful  an  impression  could  not  have  been  made, 
nor  continued  through  the  numerous  vicissitudes  of  an 
incarnation  which  has  taken  me  around  the  world,  if  the 
Maharshi  had  been  an  ordinary  yogi  -  much  less  an  ordinary 


*  Written  in  1971 


184 


man.  I  have  met  dozens  of  yogis,  in  their  Eastern  and  Western 
varieties,  and  many  exceptional  persons.  Whatever  status  is 
assigned  to  him  by  his  followers,  or  whatever  indifference  is 
shown  to  him  by  others,  my  own  position  is  independent  and 
unbiassed.  It  is  based  upon  our  private  talks  in  those  early  days 
when  such  things  were  still  possible,  before  fame  brought 
crowds;  upon  observations  of,  and  conversations  with,  those 
who  were  around  him;  upon  his  historical  record;  and  finally 
upon  my  own  personal  experiences,  whatever  they  are  worth. 

Upon  all  this  evidence  one  fact  is  incontrovertibly  clear  - 
that  he  was  a  pure  channel  for  a  Higher  Power. 

This  capacity  of  his  to  put  his  own  self-consciousness  aside 
and  to  let  himself  be  suffused  by  this  Power,  is  not  to  be 
confounded  with  what  is  commonly  called  in  the  West, 
spiritualistic  mediumship.  For  no  spirit  of  a  departed  person  ever 
spoke  through  him:  on  the  contrary,  the  silence  which  fell  upon 
us  at  such  times  was  both  extraordinary  and  exquisite.  No  physical 
phenomena  of  an  occult  kind  was  ever  witnessed  then;  nothing 
at  all  happened  outwardly.  But  those  who  were  not  steeped  too 
far  in  materialism  to  recognise  what  was  happening  within  him 
and  within  themselves  at  the  time,  or  those  who  were  not 
congealed  too  stiffly  in  suspicion  or  criticism  to  be  passive  and 
sensitive  intuitively,  felt  a  distinct  and  strange  change  in  the  mental 
atmosphere.  It  was  uplifting  and  inspiring;  for  the  time  being  it 
pushed  them  out  of  their  little  selves,  even  if  only  partially. 

This  change  came  every  day,  and  mostly  during  the  evening 
periods  when  the  Maharshi  fell  into  a  deep  contemplation.  No 
one  dared  to  speak  then  and  all  conversations  were  brought  to 
an  end.  A  grave  sacredness  permeated  the  entire  scene  and 
evoked  homage,  reverence,  even  awe.  But  before  the  sun's 
departure  brought  about  this  remarkable  transformation,  and 


185 


for  most  of  the  day,  the  Maharshi  behaved,  ate  and  spoke  like  a 
perfectly  normal  human  being. 

That  there  was  some  kind  of  a  participation  in  a  worldless 
divine  play  during  those  evenings  -  each  to  the  extent  of  his 
own  response  -  was  the  feeling  with  which  some  of  us  arose 
when  it  all  ended.  That  the  Maharshi  was  the  principal  actor 
was  true  enough  on  the  visible  plane.  But  there  was  something 
more  . 

In  his  own  teachings  Sri  Ramana  Maharshi  often  quoted, 
whether  in  association  or  confirmation,  the  writings  of  the  first 
Acharya  Shankara,  who  lived  more  than  a  thousand  years  ago. 
He  considered  them  unquestionably  authoritative.  He  even 
translated  some  of  them  from  one  Indian  language  to  another. 

In  the  temple  of  Chingleput  I  interviewed  His  Holiness 
the  Shankaracharya  of  Kamakoti  Peetam,  a  linear  successor  of 
the  first  Guru.  When  the  meeting  was  concluded  but  before  I 
left,  I  took  the  chance  to  ask  a  personal  question.  A  disciple  of 
the  Maharshi  had  come  to  me  and  wanted  to  take  me  to  his 
Guru.  None  of  those  I  asked  could  tell  me  anything  about  him, 
nor  had  even  heard  of  him.  I  was  undecided  whether  to  make 
the  journey  or  not. 

His  Holiness  immediately  urged  me  to  go,  and  promised 
satisfaction.  He  is  still  alive  and  still  active  in  the  religious  world 
of  Southern  India. 

Sometimes,  as  I  looked  at  the  figure  of  Ramana  Maharshi 
on  the  couch,  I  wondered  if  he  would  ever  come  to  England.  If 
so,  how  would  he  be  dressed,  how  would  he  behave  in  those 
teeming  London  streets,  how  would  he  eat,  live  and  work?  But 
he  was  uninterested  in  travelling  and  so  he  never  came,  not  in 
the  physical  body:  what  did  come  was  his  spirit  and  mind,  which 
have  awakened  sufficient  interest  among  the  English. 


186 


Again  and  again  he  gave  us  this  teaching,  that  the  real 
Maharshi  was  not  the  body  which  people  saw;  it  was  the  inner 
being.  Those  who  never  made  the  journey  to  India  during  his 
life  time  may  take  comfort  in  this  thought  that  it  is  possible  to 
invoke  his  presence  wherever  they  are,  and  to  feel  its  reality  in 
the  heart. 


PART  III 


On 

Miscellaneous 

topics 


189 


The  Eternal  Now 


Major  A.W.  Chadwick  (Sadhu  Arunachala) 

IN  MANY  OFFICES  one  finds  the  encouraging  notice, 
D  o 
it  Now!'  Although  this  is  undoubtedly  good  advice,  it  is 
hardly  to  my  present  point,  as  I  contend  that  we  can  never  do 
it  any  "when"  else.  It  always  is  NOW  and  the  sooner  we  realize 
this  the  quicker  will  problems  and  worries  disappear.  Sri 
Bhagavan  has  the  following  verse  on  the  subject  of  time  in  his 
Forty  Verses  (verse  XV) 

The  future  and  the  past  are  only  seen 
With  reference  to  the  present.  They  in  turn 
Are  present  too.  The  present  s  only  true. 
As  well  to  search  for  future  and  for  past 
Outside  the  eternal  present  of  the  Self, 
As  think  to  count  without  unit  One, 
Which  sums  up  the  subject  succinctly. 
I  have  long  been  intrigued  by  this  question  of  time.  Some 
few  years  ago  I  saw  Anand  Coomaraswamy  s  book  Time  and 
Eternity,  but  unfortunately  neglected  to  take  notes  of  the  many 
apposite  quotations  contained  therein  on  the  subject.  The  few 
that  do  follow  I  have  noted  myself,  at  various  times  in  my 
varied  reading. 

St.  Augustine,  that  pillar  of  Christianity,  was  himself  much 
puzzled  by  this  question  and  prayed  to  God  for  enlightenment. 
In  his  book  'Confessions  ,  he  has  the  following:  'Neither  the 


190 


past  nor  the  future,  but  only  the  present  really  is;  the  present  is 
only  a  moment  and  time  can  only  be  measured  while  it  is  passing. 
Nevertheless,  there  really  is  time  past  and  future'.  We  seem  here 
to  be  led  into  contradictions.  The  only  way  we  can  avoid  this  is 
to  say  that  the  past  and  future  can  only  be  thought  of  as  present. 
Past  must  be  identified  with  memory,  and  future  with 
expectation,  memory  and  expectation  both  being  present  fact. 

This,  after  all,  is  much  the  same  as  Bhagavan's  verse 
although  St.  Augustine  is  not  quite  certain  of  himself  and  hesitates 
to  speak  outright. 

One  of  the  last  of  the  great  western  philosophers,  Kant, 
found  in  time,  one  of  the  basic  premises  of  his  whole  philosophy. 
He  declared  that  "time  is  not  an  empirical  concept  derived  from 

any  experience"         "only  on  the  presupposition  of  time  can 

we  represent  to  ourselves  a  number  of  things  as  existing  at  one 

and  the  same  time  or  at  different  times"  

"Time  is  a  necessary  representation  that  underlies  all 
intuition.  We  cannot  in  respect  of  appearances  in  general  remove 
time  itself,  though  we  can  quite  well  think  time  as  devoid  of 
appearances.  Time  is  therefore  given  a  priority".  In  other  words 
we  cannot  think  outside  time.  Time  is  one  of  the  modes  of  our 
minds  as  thinking  machines.  Bhagavan  also  asks  in  Forty  Verses 
(verse  XVI):  "Do  time  and  space  exist  apart  from  us?"  Implying 
thereby,  the  contrary. 

In  our  objectification  of  the  world,  we  create  it  in  terms 
of  time  and  space,  thus  only  can  we  see  it  apart  from  ourselves. 
In  the  'eternal  now'  it  ceases  entirely  to  exist.  We  find  it  hard  to 
realize  this  as  our  minds  are  restless  machines  and  refuse  to  give 
up  activities  which  necessitate  time  for  their  functioning.  We 
are  always  trying  to  become  something  else,  other  than  what 
we  are,  or  rather  think  we  are  at  the  moment  -  happy  and 


191 


virtuous,  failing  to  see  that  all  becoming  must  change,  so  that 
this  happiness  gained  will  change  back  into  its  opposite 
eventually,  that  is  into  unhappiness.  It  is  only  in  'being'  or  the 
now'  that  we  can  ever  find  rest.  Plato  also  says  that  time  and 
creation  come  into  existence  together,  in  fact  all  appearance  is 
only  in  time.  And  Schopenhauer  opines  that  matter  is  actual, 
(using  actual  in  its  original  meaning),  that  is  only  in  its 
functioning,  which  is  in  time,  so  does  it  exist  at  all? 

My  reading  of  the  Hindu  Scriptures  is  defective,  though 
undoubtedly,  they  must  say  exactly  the  same  repeatedly.  I  find  I 
am  unable  to  quote  from  them  as  I  should  to  substantiate  my 
thesis,  but  I  know  one  quotation  from  the  Vishnu  Purana,  which 
finds  its  place  here.  Parasuram  says,  "Time  is  only  a  form  of 
Vishnu,  for  change  is  only  possible  for  things  which  are  imagined 
with  reference  to  a  substratum." 

But  the  whole  picture,  all  our  waking  experiences,  is  only 
one  moment  in  eternity.  We  see  only  a  part  and  through 
continuing  time,  a  strip.  It  all  depends  on  the  angle  from  which 
we  look  at  it,  as  to  what  we  see.  If  we  look  repeatedly  from  the 
same  angle  we  see  the  same  isolated  picture  or  strip.  The  picture 
never  changes,  it  is  only  our  point  of  view.  The  prophet  is  able 
to  see  a  larger  expanse  of  the  picture  than  the  layman.  To  merge 
entirely  in  the  picture  is  to  know  eternity  and  from  that  view 
point  there  is  no  picture  as  we  know  it,  and  no  time. 

Boethus,  the  old  Roman  statesman  awaiting  his  death  in 
prison  also  said,  "Eternity  is  the  simultaneous  and  complete 
possession  of  Infinite  Life."  It  would  be  hard  to  find  it  summed 
up  better  than  this.  For  eternity  is  the  now',  it  does  not  flow  in 
time,  there  is  no  before  or  after  in  it,  no  birth  and  no  death. 

Heraclitus,  the  Greek  famous  for  the  aphorism: 
"Everything  flows,"  said  that  fire  was  the  cause  of  all.  By  this 


192 


he  did  not  mean  the  physical  fire,  but  rather  the  energy  of  the 
modern  scientists,  though  an  energy  that  was  not  just  material 
but  rather  spiritual.  For  him  this  central  fire  is  eternal  and 
never  dies,  "the  world  was,  is  ever,  and  ever  shall  be,  an 
ever-living  fire."  Although  fire  itself  is  everlastingly  changing, 
this  change  would,  like  phenomena,  seem  to  be  apparent,  but 
essentially  fire  remains  the  same  fire.  Change  in  appearance  is 
its  nature,  as  1:9  Mandukyopanishad has  it:  'Others  think  that 
manifestation  is  for  the  purpose  of  God's  fulfilment.  While 
still  others  attribute  it  to  mere  diversion.  But  it  is  the  very 
nature  of  the  effulgent  being,  for  what  desire  is  possible  for 
him  whose  desire  is  always  fulfilled?' 

Substitute  fire  for  effulgent  being,  which  is  after  all  a 
legitimate  substitution,  for  what  is  fire  but  effulgent?  And  do 
not  both  of  these  essentially  agree? 

In  Bergson  I  find  the  following  sentence:  "Pure  duration 
is  the  form  which  our  conscious  states  assume  when  our  ego  lets 
itself  live,  when  it  refrains  from  separating  its  present  state  from 
its  former  states."  This  apparently  goes  beyond  the  tenets  of 
Advaita,  as  he  seems  to  be  referring  to  the  reincarnating  ego  in 
his  reference  to  former  states,  nevertheless  it  is  pregnant  with 
meaning,  for  we  are  undoubtedly  conscious  when  we  rest  in 
the  now,  although  we  do  not  individualise.  Surely  it  is  only 
then  that  we  do  really  live! 

For  many  of  the  philosophers,  time  was  a  problem,  with 
the  exception  of  those  who  considered  it  to  be  something  real, 
although  we  are  little  interested  at  the  moment  in  their 
conclusions  as  we  are  trying  to  picture  the  verity  of  the  eternal 
now',  in  contrast  to  the  unreality  of  time,  which  slips  through 
our  fingers  like  a  running  stream  when  the  hand  is  plunged 
into  the  water  to  stay  its  course. 


193 


Leaving  the  realms  of  metaphysics  let  us  glance  at  the 
hypotheses  of  some  of  the  scientists.  They  have  certainly  been 
intrigued  by  the  problem  and  well  understood  that  it  was  not 
to  be  ignored.  Especially  since  Einstein  sprang  on  the  world  his 
theory  of  relativity.  He  himself  says  in  one  place  that  distance  is 
between  events  and  not  things,  which  takes  a  matter-of-fact 
measurements  out  of  the  realm  of  every  day  life,  where  we 
thought  they  were  safely  enthroned  and  could  be  relied  upon, 
into  the  province  of  time  itself,  where  we  had  never  thought 
that  time  had  any  reason  to  interfere. 

It  reminds  us  of  Schopenhauer's  matter  is  actual',  though 
one  doubts  if  he  ever  really  intended  to  imply  quite  as  much  as 
this.  He  does  say,  "All  being  in  time  is  also  non-being,  for  time  is 
only  that  by  means  of  which  opposite  determinations,  can  belong 
to  the  same  thing.  Therefore  every  phenomenon,  which  is  in  time 
again  is  not.  For  what  separates  its  beginning  from  its  end  is  only 
time,  which  is  essentially  a  flitting,  inconstant  and  relative  thing." 

In  astronomy  time  takes  on  its  most  intriguing  aspect. 
We  think  that  when  we  look  through  our  telescopes  into  the 
measureless  distances  of  the  sky,  we  are  looking  at  something 
present  now.  Most  of  what  we  see  has  either  moved  millions  of 
miles  away  from  where  it  appears  to  be  or  has  even  ceased  to 
exist  altogether.  We  are,  in  fact,  looking  at  all  sorts  of  things 
which  are  not  there  at  all.  And  if  this  cannot  be  called  may  a 
then  the  term  has  no  meaning.  One  of  the  furthest  nhebulae 
our  present  telescopes  can  reach  is  150  million  light  years  away, 
an  unimaginable  mathematical  figure.  What  actually  does  this 
mean?  It  means  that  the  astronomer  now  is  looking  at  a  150 
million  year  past  event,  which  is  happening  for  him  in  the 
present.  At  best  he  is  only  looking  at  a  cosmic  memory.  The 
picture  does  not  actually  exist  at  all. 


194 


The  whole  pattern  of  the  heavens,  the  position  of  the  stars 
is  an  hallucination;  they  have  one  and  all  moved  away  from  the 
positions  in  which  we  see  them  now,  but  not  proportionately, 
so  that  the  actual  pattern  is  much  the  same.  But  some  have 
shifted  vast  distances  and  others  but  little  in  comparison.  We 
may  photograph  it,  plot  it  on  our  tracing  board,  all  to  no 
purpose.  It  is  all  a  myth.  Our  sight  and  even  our  machines  are 
grossly  deceived  as  we  can  never  know  what  the  picture  really 
is.  Even  the  apparent  stationary  position  of  the  stars  is  deceptive. 
They  are  one  and  all  rushing  about  at  incredible  speeds.  Time  is 
playing  a  game  with  us. 

Eddington  pointed  out  that  if  the  Universe  is  spherical 
whatever  direction  we  may  look,  provided  there  is  no 
obstruction,  we  would  be  able  to  see  the  back  of  our  own  heads. 
Well  not  exactly!  Because  time  has  taken  over  6,000  million 
years  to  go  round  and  our  heads  were  not  there  then,  we  ought 
to  be  able  to  see  what  stood  in  that  particular  place  then.  Now 
let  us  suppose  there  are  no  obstructions  and  we  do  see  some 
object  which  existed  in  that  spot  6,000  million  years  ago,  what 
actually  does  it  signify?  We  see  and  yet  we  don't  see.  We  really 
see  an  object  that  is  not  there  at  all.  Our  head  is  turned  by  such 
riddles  and  with  the  poet  Omar  Khayam,  who  was  himself  a 
great  astronomer,  we  may  truly  say, 

"Another  and  another  cup  to  drown 

The  memory  of  this  Impertinence." 

Perhaps  this  same  problem  was  too  much  for  him  also.  We 
can  hardly  be  surprised. 

So  it  would  seem  as  if  science  were  gradually  being  forced 
to  recognize  that  reality  can  alone  be  found  in  the  eternal  now', 
and  that  time  deceives  us  every  step  we  take.  Each  of  us  makes 
his  own  individual  picture  in  terms  of  time  and  space,  which 


195 


spring  up  together  with  the  uprising  ego  and  with  it,  sinks  back 
again.  As  Bhagavan  says: 

"The  ego  rising  all  else  will  arise. 

On  it  subsiding,  all  will  disappear." 

{Forty  Verses  on  Reality,  verse  26) 

Is  it  not  also  written  in  the  book  of  Revelation  X.  5.  6.? 
"And  the  angel  which  I  saw  stand  upon  the  sea  and  the  earth 
lifted  up  his  hand  to  heaven  and  swore  by  him  that  liveth  for 
ever  and  ever  ....  that  there  should  be  time  no  longer." 

As  a  method  of  meditation  trying  to  rest  in  the  now' 
irrespective  of  time  is  interesting  and  seems  to  me  a  productive 
sadhana.  When  all  is  at  rest  and  the  flow  of  outward  events  is 
allowed  to  go  on  itsway  unheeded,  or  taken  up  together  into 
the  whole,  a  peace  passing  all  understanding  rests  on  one  and 
one  draws  very  near  to  a  full  realization  of  the  Reality.  I  am  not 
speaking  here  of  nirvikalpa  samadhi  when  all  outward 
cognizance  has  disappeared,  but  rather  of  a  preliminary 
condition.  As  for  the  ultimate  state  it  matters  little  whether  we 
call  it  the  Self,  Eternal  Now,  or  pure  Being.  These  are  all  names 
only  given  in  objective  consciousness.  In  pure  introspection 
they  are  found  to  be  one  and  the  same. 

For  the  advatin  who  sees  and  knows  the  One  alone, 
such  discussion  may  seem  unproductive  and  for  some  not 
even  interesting,  But  for  those  who  are  not  so  established, 
there  still  remain  doubts  and  especially  on  the  question  of 
mortality.  They  fear  death.  They  look  on  it  as  extinction. 
And  the  dogmas  and  creeds  of  various  faith  give  them  no 
more  than  encouraging  words,  not  assurance,  but  in  the 
certainty  of  the  Eternal  Now,  all  such  doubts  should  be 
dispelled.  Here,  there  can  be  no  fear  of  death,  for  how  can 
we  ever  escape  from  the  present  that  is  now.  It  eternally  is. 


196 


And  it  is  summed  up  by,  I  AM.  Not  I  was  or  I  may  be  at 
some  future  date,  but  eternally  I  AM. 

Schopenhauer  endorses  this,  "any  form  of  life  or  reality  is 
really  only  the  present,  neither  the  future  nor  the  past.  These  are 
only  in  the  conception  ....  No  man  has  ever  lived  in  the  past, 
and  none  will  ever  live  in  the  future.  The  present  alone  is  the 
form  of  all  life,  and  is  its  sure  possession  which  can  never  be 
taken  from  it.  The  present  always  exists." 

But  I  begin  to  overstep  the  space  allowed  me.  So  I  will 
end  with  one  last  quotation  from  Plato: 

"Now  all  these  portions  of  time,  and  was  and  shall  be,  are 
forms  of  time  which  have  come  to  be,  although  we  wrongly 
ascribe  them  to  the  eternal  essence.  For  we  say  that  it  was  and  is 
and  shall  be,  but  in  reality  is  alone  belongs  to  it." 


eg  so 


197 


There  is  Nothing,  Be! 


Major  A.  W.  Chadwick  (Sadhu  Arunachala) 

THE  PHILOSOPHY  OF  Sri  Bhagavan,  the  greatest  of  sages, 
can  be  summed  up  in  just  three  words  "There  is  nothing." 
So  simple  and  yet  so  supremely  difficult.  "There  is  nothing". 
All  this  world  that  you  see,  this  mad  rush  of  people  after  money 
and  existence'  is  just  a  fabricless  thought.  "There  is  nothing." 
You,  as  a  personality,  as  a  petty  entity  striving  for  your  own 
selfish  ends,  ever  seeking  so-called  'Self-Realisation ,  are  nothing. 
You  are  like  the  shadow  of  a  leaf  cast  by  the  moonlight, 
intangible,  unsubstantial,  and  in  fact  non-existent.  And,  as  the 
shadow  is  a  purely  negative  phenomenon,  is  in  fact  nothing 
but  a  shutting  out  of  light,  so  is  the  ego  and  everything  else 
(because  everything  follows  in  the  train  of  the  ego  and  is  actually 
a  part  of  it)  only  a  shutting  out  of  the  light  of  the  Self. 

Sri  Bhagavan  tells  us  just  one  other  thing.  He  says:  "Be. 
Just  be  your  real  Self,  that's  all."  "Certainly,  it  sounds  all  right," 
you  say,  "but  when  one  tries  to  do  it,  it  does  not  seem  so  easy. 
Has  he  no  method?" 

Method!  Well,  what  exactly  do  you  mean  by  method? 
Sitting  on  the  floor  and  concentrating  on  the  navel?  Or  blowing 
the  wind  out  of  alternate  nostrils?  Or  repeating  some  incantation 
one  crore  and  eight  times?  No,  he  hasn't  got  any  method.  All 
these  things  are  no  doubt  good  in  their  way  and  help  to  prepare 
one,  but  Sri  Bhagavan  doesn't  happen  to  teach  them. 


198 


"Then  what  am  I  to  do?" 

You  must  just  BE,  he  says.  And  to  be  you  must  know  the  ' 
I  that  is.'  To  know  the  v  I  that  is',  just  go  on  enquiring  vWho 
am  I?'  Don't  take  any  notice  of  anything  except  the  N  I  throw 
everything  else  away  like  refuse.  And  when  you  have  at  last 
found  the  'I  BE.  All  talk,  all  empty  words.  'There  is  nothing 
'  and  that's  the  end  of  it.  No  method,  nothing  to  discard,  nothing 
to  find.  Nothing  at  all  is  except  the  I  Why  worry  about 
anything  else?  Just  BE,  now  and  always,  as  you  were,  as  you  are, 
and  as  you  ever  will  be. 

'There  is  nothing.'  You  may  justly  ask  '  Who  wants  this 
purely  negative  state?  ' 

To  which  I  can  only  reply:  '  It  is  just  a  question  of  taste.' 
Though,  note  you,  I  have  never  suggested  that  Sri  Bhagavan 
ever  says  that  the  ultimate  state  after  which,  it  is  presumed,  we 
are  all  striving  is  negative.  On  the  contrary,  when  he  says: 
There  is  nothing  it  is  obvious  that  he  is  speaking  about  our 
present  egoistic  existence,  which  for  us  is  everything.  But  this 
being  where  there  is  nothing  must  obviously  be  a  state  which  is 
something.  That  state  is  Self-realisation.  Not  only  is  it  something 
but  it  is  EVERYTHING,  and  being  everything  then  logically 
and  philosophically  it  must  be  PERFECT 

'  If  we  are  already  perfect  and  there  is  nothing  else,  what 
need  is  there  for  us  to  go  to  Bhagavan?  '  you  ask. 

And  this  reminds  me  of  a  story  against  myself. 

An  Australian  journalist  came  to  the  Ashram,  quite  why 
he  came  is  a  mystery,  I  doubt  if  he  would  be  able  to  tell  himself. 
Anyhow  he  did  come  and  in  the  course  of  his  visit  came  to  see 
me  in  my  room.  It  was  obvious  from  the  first  moment  that  I 
was  a  tremendous  problem  to  him.  Why  a  European  should 
shut  himself  away  in  a  place  like  this  was  beyond  his 


199 


comprehension.  He  asked  many  questions  but  none  of  my 
replies  satisfied  him. How  could  they?  Especially  as  he  had  not 
the  first  idea  of  what  the  Ashram  was,  or  what  people  were 
doing  here.  I  didn't  even  write,  then  what  on  earth  did  I  do?  At 
length  he  could  contain  himself  no  longer  and  bluntly  asked 
me  what  I  was  doing  here.  Now  here  was  a  problem  to  answer. 
If  I  had  tried  to  tell  him  the  truth  he  would  never  have 
understood,  that  I  realized,  so  making  the  best  of  it  I  just  said 
that  here  I  found  peace  of  mind.  I  knew  it  was  an  inadequate 
answer  but  hoped  it  would  stave  off  further  enquiries. 

He  looked  at  me  seriously  for  a  few  minutes  and  then  said 
pityingly:  'Oh  I  see,  I  have  never  been  troubled  in  that  way 
myself! 

All  I  had  succeeded  in  doing  was  in  confirming  him  in  the 
conviction  that  I  was  insane!  And  was  there  not,  after  all,  some 
ground  for  his  belief?  Here  have  I  been  spending  (wasting  ,  he 
would  say)  half  a  lifetime  searching  for  something  I  already 
possess.  I  know  that  I  possess  it  too,  which  makes  matters  appear 
worse. 

'Just  BE.'  It  sounds  so  easy.  Well,  Sri  Bhagavan  says  its  the 
easiest  thing  there  is.  I  really  don't  know.  I  suppose  it  all  really 
depends  on  how  much  refuse  there  is  inside.  We're  all  different 
anyway  and  perhaps  some  of  us  were  handicapped  at  the  start. 
It's  certain  that  the  rubbish  has  to  come  out  and  the  coming  out 
process  is  full  of  surprises.  All  kinds  of  hidden  vices  and  evil 
tendencies  start  to  pop  up  their  heads  which  one  never  suspected 
were  there  at  all.  But  it's  all  for  the  good.  Bhagavan  says  they 
have  to  come  out.  But  let  them  come  out,  not  take  charge. 
Don't  give  way  to  them. 

Those  who  expect  Sri  Bhagavan  to  hand  them 
Self-realisation,  as  if  it  were  some  tangible  thing,  are  surely  sadly 


200 


deluded.  How  can  anybody  give  one  what  one  has  already  got? 
All  he  can  do  is  help  one  to  remove  the  ignorance  that  hides  it. 
It  is  like  going  to  a  lake  with  a  cup  and  sitting  by  its  side  praying 
to  it  to  fill  the  cup  with  water.  You  may  sit  there  for  a  thousand 
years  but  it  is  certain  that  unless  you  lean  forward  and  dip  the 
cup  into  the  water  yourself  nothing  will  happen.  Even  then 
you  have  to  make  certain  that  the  cup  is  not  already  full  of  a  lot 
of  residue.  Most  cups  are! 

You  say:  cIf  there  is  nothing,  why  write?' 

Yes,  why?  The  whole  thing  can  be  summed  up  in  four 
words:  'There  is  nothing,  BE!  '  When  one  understands  those 
four  words  one  understands  everything  including  Bhagavan 
himself 

Then  there  is  no  more  to  say! 


201 


Uniqueness  of 
Bhagavan 

Dr.  T.M.P.  Mahadevan 

BHAGAVAN  WAS  UNIQUE.  He  was  unique  in  that  he 
was  not  unique.  What  struck  even  a  casual  visitor  to  the 
Ashrama  was  Bhagavan s  naturalness.  He  did  not  impress  any 
one  as  if  he  were  non-natural,  even  supra-natural.  There  was  no 
affectation  at  all  in  Sri  Ramana.  Let  me  illustrate  what  I,  mean. 
In  South  India  sadhus  refer  to  themselves,  while  speaking,  in  the 
third  person.  They  would  say  'this  was  walking  or  this  wants  to 
go  there  while  referring  to  themselves.They  would  not  use  the 
first  person  singular  T.  But  Bhagavan  quite  naturally  used  to  say 
'I  go',  'I  walk',  CI  sit'  and  so  on.  One  who  has  the  experience  of 
the  plenary  illumination  constantly,  naturally,  has  no  use  for  such 
affectations.  And  always  he  used  to  behave  in  the  most  natural 
manner.  There  was  nothing  which  would  make  others  think  that 
there  was  some  unnaturalness  about  Bhagavan. But  yet  once  in 
his  presence  there  was  no  need  for  prompting  from  outside.  One 
would  be  convinced  in  one's  own  heart  that  one  was  in  the 
presence  of  the  non-dual  Reality.  Now,  this  was  an  experience 
that  almost  everyone  had  in  the  presence  of  Bhagavan. 

He  was  an  open  book  for  all  at  all  times.  He  did  not  make 
any  distinction  between  what  is  private  and  what  is  public.  So 


202 


far  as  Bhagavan  was  concerned,  there  was  no  privacy.  In  those 
days,  devotees  used  to  be  with  him  in  the  small  meditation  hall 
all  day  and  night.  We  used  to  sleep  in  the  same  hall  where  we 
used  to  sit  during  daytime.  And  he  was  a  silent  witness  to  all 
that  happened  around  him.  Any  one  could  walk  in  at  any  time. 
He  was  easily  accessible  not  only  to  humans  but  also  to  animals. 
Squirrels  used  to  play  with  him.  The  cow  Lakshmi  used  to  walk 
in  at  her  own  pleasure.  The  monkeys  used  to  come  into  the 
Ashram  without  any  let  or  hindrance.  Bhagavan  remarked  about 
a  trespassing  cow,  "Who  is  to  be  taken  to  task?  If  you  had  no 
fence  and  the  cow  walked  in  through  your  garden,  who  was 
responsible  for  this,  you  or  the  cow?" 

Bhagavans  love  and  grace  knew  no  limits. In  his  presence 
there  was  no  high  and  no  low.All  were  the  same.  There  was  no 
distinction  between  a  Maharaja  of  old  days  who  visited  him 
and  the  rustics  who  wanted  to  have  his  darshan.  He  could 
understand  the  language  of  the  mute  creation.  In  earlier  days 
when  he  was  on  the  Hill  Arunachala,  the  monkeys  used  to  go 
to  him  for  arbitration.  This  shows  how  Bhagavan  taught  the 
plenary  experience  to  others  —  the  experience  which  makes  no 
distinction  between  one  level  of  creation  and  another. 

Others  might  think  that  Bhagavan  practised  austerities 
during  the  early  years  of  his  stay  in  Arunachala,  that  his  Mauna, 
silence,  was  deliberate,  that  his  sitting  posture  for  days  and  weeks 
in  the  sub-terranean  temple  was  sadhana,  but  some  of  us  have 
heard  him  say  that  all  this  was  not  tapasya,  although  it  seemed 
to  be  so.  The  time  factor  did  not  enter  into  the  realisation  of 
Bhagavan.  There  was  no  earlier  preparation;  there  was  no 
evolution  thereafter.  Of  what  is  referred  to  in  Advaita  as 
sadyomukti,  instantaneous  release,  we  had  a  glowing  example  in 
Bhagavan  Sri  Ramana.  One  does  not  know  what  led  to  this 


203 


instantaneous  illumination.  There  was  no  growth,  no  procedural 
technique,  no  yogic  meditation,  no  other  sadhana.  All  of  a 
sudden,  the  experience  came  without  his  inviting  it.  Now,  this 
is  unique;  the  entire  history  of  sagehood  holds  no  parallel.  A 
boy  at  school  who  had  no  particular  interest  in  spirituality,  who 
was  not  even  a  brilliant  boy  in  studies,  that  such  a  lad  should, 
all  of  a  sudden,  become  transformed  into  a  sage,  I  think,  is 
unique.And  what  was  the  nature  of  the  realisation?  It  admitted 
no  stages,  required  no  effort.  It  was  all  complete.  Completeness, 
fulness  was  there  when  Sri  Ram  ana  had  in  a  trice  solved  the 
mystery  of  death.  Nachiketas  had  to  go  to  Yama,  wait  at  his 
house  for  three-days  and  nights,  and  put  to  him  questions.  The 
fear  of  death  was  only  an  occasion  for  solving  the  mystery.  The 
non-dual  Self  which  knows  no  death  and  no  birth  came  to  Sri 
Ramana  in  a  flash;  but  that  did  not  vanish  like  a  flash,  it  remained 
as  His  sahajasthiti. 

I  am  not  saying  that  the  process  of  meditation  has  no  place 
in  sadhanUy  but  that  what  one  gains  through  the  method  of 
thought-control,  emptying  of  mind,  is  not  the  plenary 
experience  of  the  non-dual  Atman.  In  the  case  of  Bhagavan  this 
pinnacle-  was  gained  without  the  least  conscious  effort.  That  is 
his  uniqueness.  Ordinarily,  a  study  of  scripture  comes  first  and 
then  experience.  But  in  the  case  of  Bhagavan,  experience  came 
first  and  only  later  an  acquaintance  with  what  scriptures  teach. 
It  was  when  scholarly  devotees  came  to  him  and  wanted  some 
doubt  or  other  to  be  cleared  that  he  listened  to  the  readings 
from  scriptures  and  then  told  them  that  His  own  experience 
confirmed  what  the  texts  taught. 

The  great  scholars,  both  traditional  and  modern,  were 
astounded  at  the  simple  words  that  fell  from  the  lips  of  Bhagavan. 
Ganapati  Sastri  was  one  instance.  He  was  a  master  of  Sanskrit. 


204 


He  was  a  great  teacher.  He  practised  mantra-sadhana  all  through 
his  life.  He  was  accepted  as  a  Guru  by  a  large  number  of  disciples. 
But  he  was  tormented  and  went  to  Sri  Ram  ana.  It  was  Ganapati 
Muni  that  announced  to  the  world  the  greatness  of  Sri  Ramana, 
finding  the  culmination  of  his  earlier  sadhana  in  Bhagavan. 

Elsewhere,  I  have  tried  to  compare  these  three  great  teachers 
ofAdvaita:  Dakshinamurti,  Sankara  and  Ramana.  Dakshinamurti 
is  the  Adi  Guru,  the  first  preceptor.  He  sat  beneath  the  banyan 
tree,  a  youthful  figure  surrounded  by  elderly  disciples,  and 
instructed  them  in  the  language  of  silence.  Most  of  us  cannot 
understand  the  language  of  silence.  So,  Dakshinamurti  rose  from 
His  seat  beneath  the  banyan  tree  and  broke  His  silence.  He 
appeared  in  the  form  of  Sankaracarya.  He  is  constantly  going 
around  this  world,  rousing  it  from  its  slumber. 

All  the  great  ones  who  came  after  him,  whether  they  would 
acknowledge  it  openly  or  not,  are  but  reflections  of  this  form 
of  Sankara.  In  the  form  of  various  masters  it  is  Sankara  that  is 
moving  in  this  world.  It  is  the  same  Sankara  that  appeared  to  us 
as  Sri  Ramana. 

The  times  have  changed.  The  present  world  can  be  saved 
neither  by  the  Guru  who  is  seated  in  a  particular  place  nor  by 
the  one  who  is  perpetually  moving  about.  The  Guru  who  is 
required  for  our  times  is  neither  the  one  who  keeps  absolute 
silence,  nor  the  one  who,  speaks  profusely.  We  had  this  need 
satisfied  in  the  avatara  of  Sri  Ramana.  He  did  not  move  out  of 
the  limits  of  Arunachala.  He  did  not  talk  profusely  or  read 
extensively.  Day  in  and  day  out,  most  of  the  time,  he  was  in 
silence.  People  used  to  come  with  long  lists  of  perplexing 
questions  formulated  in  their  minds;  some  of  them,  lest  they 
might  forget,  used  to  write  out  those  questions.  But  what 
happened?  When  they  came  and  sat  before  Bhagavan  they  forgot 


205 


all  about  those  questions.  I  happened  to  be  present  when  Paul 
Brunton  came.  P.  B.  had  seen  other  saints  in  India.  He  had 
written  out  the  questions  which  he  wanted  to  ask.  He  sat  there 
for  a  long  time  without  opening  his  mouth.  The  friend  who 
had  come  with  him  had  to  prompt  him.  It  was  only  then  that 
he  read  out  his  questions.  This  was  not  an  isolated  instance. 
This  was  the  daily  experience.  The  questioning  mind  was  silenced 
in  his  presence. 

And  what  is  the  quantum  of  his  "writings"?  But  they  are  so 
potent  that  even  a  single  line  could  transform  the  lives  of  people. 
Here,  we  have  a  middle  course  between  silence  and  speech. 
Silently  but  surely  the  influence  of  Bhagavan  is  felt.  No  one 
could  have  thought  some  years  ago  that  the  influence  would  be 
felt  so  strongly  in  the  capital  of  our  country.  But  this  is  what  is 
now  happening  all  over  the  world.  In  Europe  and  America 
there  are  seekers,  who  when  they  get  even  a  glimpse  of  Bhagavans 
teachings  feel  that  they  have  turned  a  new  leaf  in  their  lives. 

What  is,  again,  significant  in  Bhagavans  teaching  is  that  it 
involves  no  mystification.  There  is  nothing  by  way  of  creed.  It 
is  an  open  book  of  wisdom  from  which  one  could  draw 
according  to  one's  capacity.  There  is  no  narrowness  or 
parochialism  of  any  sort  in  the  Master's  teachings. 

All  the  teachings  of  all  the  sages  are  put  in  a  capsule  form 
in  this  single  sloka,  Hridayakuhara-madhye  which  says  that  in 
the  cave  of  the  heart  Brahman  shines.  He  made  known  to 
sadhakas  the  bardavidya.  He  was  the  one  who  discovered  that 
the  spiritual  heart  is  the  Self  itself.  The  hridaya  is  the  non-dual 
spiritual  Self.  The  T  is  manifest  in  the  region  of  the  hear;  When 
a  person  refers  to  himself  he  points  to  the  right  side  of  the  chest. 
The  T  shines  in  the  heart;  the  Self  is  manifest  in  the  cave  of  the 
heart.  This  manifestation  of  the  Self  in  the  form  of  T  is  direct, 


206 


immediate  to  every  one.  It  does  not  require  any  belief,  or  faith 
or  creed.  One  need  not  read  Sastra  to  realise  it,  one  realises  it 
every  moment:  And  the  Upanishads  tell  us  that  in  deep  sleep 
one  goes  into  it.  Thus,  one  cannot  deny  oneself  however  much 
one  might  try.  In  a  famous  verse  Sankara  says  £It  is  this  T  which 
is  immediately,  directly  experienced  in  the  region  of  the  heart 
by  every  one;  but  this  Self  is  not  realised  to  be  the  non-dual 
Brahman  on  account  of  ignorance.  There  is  no  realising  the 
Self.  Because  the  Self  is  real,  you  cannot  realise  or  make  it  real. 
What  is  to  be  done  is  to  unrealise  the  unreal.  We  imagine  that 
this  world  is  real,  while  in  fact  it  is  not.  Today  the  scientists  are 
approaching  Vedanta  through  science.  Nuclear  physics  tells  us 
that  even  in  the  hardest  piece  of  matter  there  is  no  hardness.  If 
you  can  accept  the  evidence  of  the  physicist  that  what  you  regard 
as  a  concrete  piece  of  matter  is  not  concrete  after  all,  then  from 
a  higher  level  is  there  anything  which  is  unintelligible  or 
impossible  in  the  proclamation  of  the  Sage  that  the  entire  world 
is  Maya.*5  Maya  does  not  mean  that  there  is  no  reality.  In  fact, 
the  Self  is  the  real  and  the  world  is  only  an  appearance.  And  so, 
Bhagavan  tells  us  that  this  Aham-spburana,  the  T-manifestation, 
is  a  pointer  that,  if  we  are  judicious  enough  to  discern  the  truth, 
we  shall  realise  the  identity  of  the  Self  with  Brahman.  This  is 
what  we  have  to  experience.  Self-realisation  is  no  more  than 
this.  It  is  losing  the  individuality  in  the  non-dual  Reality.  How 
is  one  to  gain  this?  What  is  the  way?  Hrdi  visa.  Enter  into  the 
heart.  Use  the  mind,  but  there  is  a  stage  where  you  have  to 
transcend  the  mind  and  be  what  you  are  always.  You  can  throw 
off  your  body;  it  is  difficult  to  throw  off  your  mind.  It  is  with 
you  all  the  time  you  are  empirically  conscious.  You  have  to 
make  use  of  it.  It  is  in  jagrat  that  you  have  to  perform  the 
sadhana  not  in  deep  sleep.  We  have  to  work  this  out  during  our 


207 


conscious  moments,  moments  of  wakefulness.  And  what 
functions  in  wakefulness  is  the  mind,  which  is  to  be  made  use 
of.  Enter  into  the  heart  with  your  mind.  The  direct  road  is 
Self-enquiry.  It  is  by  Self-enquiry  that  you  have  to  reach  the 
heart.  But  if  that  becomes  impossible  for  the  moment,  then 
adopt  the  technique  of  surrender.  If  even  for  this  your  mind  is 
not  ready,  practise  pranayama.  You  begin  at  the  physical,  vital 
level.  Bhagavan  says  in  the  Upadesa  Saram  that  the  source  of 
both  the  vital  principle  and  the  mind  is  the  same.  By  controlling 
the  vital  principle  you  can  control  the  mind.  Begin  then  with 
the  practice  of  regulating  the  breath. 

You  will  find  the  mind  settling  down  through  the  practice 
of  pranayamdy  and  then  you  will  be  ready  for  the  right  royal 
road.  Very  often  people  consider  jnana-yoga  to  consist  in 
intellectual  analysis.  This  is  not  so.  It  is  not  intellectual 
speculation.  Up  to  a  point  the  mind  can  go;  but  there  it  stops. 
Bhagavan  has  taught  a  simple  mode  by  which  one  goes  beyond 
mind.  What  is  that  mode?  The  T-thought  is  the  first  of  all 
thoughts.  All  other  thoughts  arise  after  the  I-thought.  Only  later 
on  'this',  that'  and  'the  other'  arise  in  your  mind.  Trace  the 
source  of  the  I-thought  and  the  practice  will  reveal  to  you  that 
the  I-thought  arises  from  the  Self.  Because  we  may  not  have 
either  the  competence  or  the  time  to  go  through  the  Sastras 
and  discover  the  path  ourselves,  this  technique  is  taught  to  us  as 
it  can  be  pursued  by  one  and  all  at  any  time.  This  certainly  is 
not  an  easy  path.  We  must  not  delude  ourselves  by  imagining 
that  it  is  easy.  It  requires  preparation,  constant  practice;  it  requires 
all  the  other  sadhanas.  But  along  with  those  sadhanas  the  enquiry 
can  be  practised.  And  if  the  Grace  of  the  Guru  is  there,  we  will 
be  helped  on  this  road  faster  than  we  may  imagine. 


208 


The  Miraculous  and 
Supernatural 

Marie  B.  Byles 

TELEVISION  ONCE  SHOWED  a  picture  of  a  man  lying 
on  his  back  on  a  bed  of  nails  with  two  planks  across  him 
and  a  tractor  or  some-such  thing  being  driven  over  him  on  the 
two  planks;  at  one  time  a  wheel  slipped  off  the  plank  and  went 
over  his  body.  As  he  stood  up  the  interviewer  asked  him  how  he 
did  it  and  how  he  felt.  He  said  that  he  put  his  faith  in  Almighty 
God  and  that  he  felt  okay.  Another  film  showed  a  man  chewing 
up  wine-glasses  and  saying  he  enjoyed  eating  them. 

I  cannot  vouch  personally  for  these  two  happenings.  But 
it  does  seem  that  such  strange  and  seemingly  impossible  things 
do  occur  with  certain  unusually  gifted  people,  and  that  science 
is  beginning  to  take  notice  of  them  and  sometimestoivescientific 
explanations. 

There  are  also  the  strange  workings  of  astrology  and  psycho- 
kinesis —  as  when  a  tensed  hand  is  held  over  a  compass  and 
swings  the  needle  in  the  opposite  direction,  and  extra-sensory 
perceptions  —  as  when  the  details  of  the  sinking  of  S.S.  Titanic 
were  perceived  thousands  of  miles  away  at  the  same  time  that  it 
happened.  And  most  envied  of  all  are  the  miracles  of  healing 
both  physical  and  mental.  There  have  always  been  many  such 


209 


healers,  One  of  the  best  known  is  Agnes  Sanford  who  wrote  the 
well  known  Healing  Light.  And  a  less  known  mental  healer  was 
the  American  Buddhist  monk,  Sumangalo,  who  unexpectedly 
found  he  had  suddenly  acquired  the  ability  to  cure  mental 
disorders.  Among  these  apparent  miracle-workers  we  must  place 
those  gifted  preachers  who  have  the  power  to  convert  people 
from  delinquency  and  drug  addiction. 

Let  us  then  admit  that  these  supernormal  happenings  are 
factual,  and  also  that  science  is  becoming  increasingly  interested, 
so  that  we  may  well  expect  a  widening  of  our  knowledge. 

The  question  we  need  to  consider  is  whether  it  will  make 
any  difference  to  our  social  well-being  if  there  are  people  trained 
to  eat  glass  or  even  to  cure  people  of  drug  addiction  and 
delinquency.  No  supernormal  talent  in  itself  implies  simple 
goodness  and  compassion  which  alone  can  bring  about  more 
harmonious  relations  between  man  and  nature.  True,  some 
religious  books  assume  the  goodness  of  the  healer  and  other 
miracle-workers,  and  assume  that  no  one  can  be  a  saint  unless  he 
performs  miracles.  But  are  miracles  any  different  from  other 
supernormal  happenings?  Does  what  you  call  it  make  any 
difference?  Those  who  now  walk  on  fire  for  the  edification  of 
tourists,  admit  that  it  does  not  mean  the  same  for  them  as  it  did 
when  they  performed  the  same  act  for  the  glory  of  God.  But  the 
fact  remains  that  they  outwardly  achieve  the  same  result  as  when 
they  did  do  it  for  the  glory  of  God.  Those  who  examine  these 
supernormal  happenings  from  the  scientific  angle  assume  that 
the  moral  goodness  of  the  doer  has  nothing  to  do  with  the  matter. 

And  indeed  —  why  should  we  think  that  goodness  or 
badness  in  the  doer  is  important?  After  all  the  world  is  composed 
of  and  founded  upon  pairs  of  opposites.  Therefore  we  cannot 
have  white  magic  without  black  magic  too,  any  more  than  we 


210 


can  have  a  positive  without  a  negative.  It  is  therefore  obvious 
that  a  person  who  performs,  say,  a  miracle  of  healing  is  not 
necessarily  a  good  man  or  woman.  For  this  reason  it  may  or 
may  not  be  inspiring  to  read  about  miracles  or  other  abnormal 
happenings,  which  appear  to  be  supernatural. 

The  supernormal  happening  depends  upon  the  natural 
talent  of  the  individual  who  performs  it.  It  is  not  of  any 
importance.  The  only  thing  that  matters  is  whether  it  springs 
from  love  and  compassion  which  alone  can  draw  us  above  the 
pairs  of  opposites.  To  read  of  those  who  performed  no  miracles, 
but  who  did  achieve  this  love  and  compassion  is  far  more  likely 
to  be  helpful  and  inspiring  to  ordinary  people  like  ourselves. 

Foremost  among  such  ordinary  people  of  whose  thoughts 
we  have  a  written  record  is  the  saintly  Stoic  emperor  of  Rome 
in  the  second  century,  Marcus  Aurelius,  who  kept  a  record  of 
his  meditations.  And  that  simple  record  has  been  the  inspiration 
of  millions  all  over  the  world.  And  yet  he  had  no  outstanding 
talents:  He  had  only  simple  goodness  and  kindness,  springing 
from  compassionate  love  and  understanding  of  the  oneness  of 
all  creation. 

And  another  such  was  the  simple  Carmelite  monk,  Brother 
Lawrence  of  the  17th  century,  who  performed  no  miracles  except 
what  the  Buddha  would  call  the  only  real  miracle,  that  of  a 
transformed  life.  He  accomplished  this  merely  by  turning  his 
mind  to  God  and  doing  nothing  but  for  the  love  of  God.  His 
whole  being  radiated  serenity  and'  love,  and  without  any 
intellectual  explanations  his  example  transformed  the  lives  of 
many. 

Of  course  we  must  all  use  the  talents  we  have  been  given 
and  do  the  work  that  falls  to  our  lot  —  being  the  emperor  of  a 
mighty  empire,  a  cook  in  a  monastery-kitchen,  performer  of 


211 


miracles  or  healer  of  the  sick.  None  is  superior  or  inferior,  and 
talents  do  not  count  The  way  to  compassion  and  enlightenment 
is  the  same  for  all.  We  cannot  and  should  not  want  to  acquire 
supernatural  talents  we  do  not  already  possess,  nor  scientific 
knowledge  beyond  our  normal  capacity,  nor  even  an  inclination 
to  harness  these  supernatural  happenings  or  miracles.  There 
are  always  specialists  dealing  with  their  particular  fields.  But  we 
each  have  a  built-in  computer,  as  it  were,  which  collects  what  is 
necessary  for  each  of  us  according  to  our  talents,  if  only  we  will 
let  it  work  freely  unimpeded  by  our  predilections.  One  of  the 
best  ways  of  letting  it  work  freely  is  to  repeat  in  thought'  or  if 
possible  in  a  whisper,  what  the  Hindus  would  call  a  mantra, 
suited  to  one's  individuality.  Brother  Lawrence  s  practice  of  the 
presence  of  God  is  a  perfect  example,  for  he  would  do  nothing 
except  for  the  love  of  God.  By  this  means  our  whole  being 
tends  to  get  tuned-in  with  Cosmic  laws  and  the  harmony  of  the 
universe,  whether  we  know  them  clearly  or  not. 

Thus  our  individual  talents  get  utilized  by  the  internal 
computer  get  and  directed  as  migratory  birds  and  fishes  are. 
Then  whatever  our  talent,  whether  to  perform  operations 
without  anaesthetics  like  the  Philippine  healers,  or  merely  to 
wash  dishes,  our  work  will  be  well  done. 

Therefore  let  us  read  and  learn  whatever  is  helpful,  but  let 
us  not  be  bewildered  by  or  crave  for  supernormal  powers.  Let 
us  be  content  with  the  Inner  Light  that  has  been  given  to  us, 
remembering  that  the  greatest  of  Masters  like  Buddha, 
Ramakrishna  Paramahamsa  and  Ramana  have  decried  the 
craving  for  and  display  of  supernormal  powers  as  utterly 
detrimental  to  one's  spiritual  enlightenment. 


eg  so 


212 


An  Angry  Prayer 


lean  Butler 

In  this  moving  narrative  we  see  the  efficacy  of  an  intense 
prayer. 

SOME  YEARS  AGO  my  daughter  Martha  and  I  were  living 
on  the  island  of  St.  Croix  in  the  Caribbean.  At  that  time 
the  Virgin  Islands  (in  which  group  this  falls)  were  so  poverty- 
stricken  that  they  were  spoken  of  as  the  world  s  poorhouse. 

One  evening  I  went  into  the  local  drug  store  and  found 
the  chemist,  Mr.  Edwards,  arguing  in  English  with  a  little  Puerto 
Rican  peasant  who  was  pleading  volubly  with  him  in  Spanish. 

Mr.  Edwards  was  saying,  "I'm  sorry  I  cant  give  you  any 
credit.  I  don't  own  the  drug  store.  I  am  only  an  employee  and 
have  to  obey  orders." 

The  peasant  answered,  "It  is  only  until  my  tomatoes  are 
harvested.  Then  I  can  pay  you." 
Mr.  Edwards  was  unmoved. 

"But,"  cried  the  peasant  in  despair,  "what  will  my  son  do 
without  the  medicine?"At  that  point  I  said  rather  angrily,  "Give 
him  the  medicine,  Mr.  Edwards,  and  put  it  on  my  bill." 

I  turned  to  the  peasant  and  asked  what  was  the  matter 
with  his  son.  A  torrent  of  Spanish  poured  forth  as  he  explained. 
He  had  five  children  ranging  from  fourteen  years  to  three 


213 


months.  His  wife  had  died  giving  birth  to  the  baby.  The  oldest 
boy  had  epileptic  fits,  as  many  as  five  a  day.  By  law  the  children 
had  to  go  to  school,  but  when  the  eldest  boy  had  his  medicine 
he  could  stay  at  home  in  the  mornings  and  take  care  of  the 
baby  while  the  father  worked  his  land.  If  the  boy  did  not  have 
his  medicine  he  could  not  be  left  with  the  baby.  Nor  could  he 
go  to  school.  The  only  thing  the  father  could  do  was  to  tie  the 
baby  on  to  his  back  when  he  went  to  work  on  his  land  and 
leave  the  boy  unattended  in  the  house;  and  on  one  such  occasion 
the  boy  had  a  fit  during  which  he  broke  his  leg. 

A  wave  of  such  intense  fury,  pity  and  sheer  horror  came 
over  me  that  for  a  moment  I  turned  dizzy  —  not  only  on  account 
of  the  little  peasant  but  also  of  all  the  others  in  the  world  who 
were  equally  suffering  and  equally  hopeless  and  helpless. 

I  told  the  peasant  that  I  knew  a  great  specialist  in  New 
York  to  whom  I  would  write  for  a  new  medicine  I  had  been 
reading  about.  I  wrote  down  the  peasant's  name  and  the  age 
and  weight  of  his  son.  "The  medicine  should  come  in  about  ten 
days,"  I  said,  "and  I  will  have  it  sent  care  of  Edwards  for  you." 

I  rushed  out  into  the  night  blind  and  sick  with  rage  against 
God.  "D — n  you!" 

I  cried,  "What  are  you  doing?  Why  don  t  you  at  least  help 
the  poor  and  sick  who  can  do  nothing  to  help  themselves  and 
who  have  nothing?"  I  cried  and  cursed  all  the  way  up  the  long 
hill  to  my  house,  hating  the  world,  hating  God,  hating  the 
unspeakable  injustice  of  life.  All  night,  even  in  my  sleep  I 
alternated  prayers  with  curses  and  invectives  and  blind  anger. 
Day  and  night  for  a  week  I  had  no  peace.  I  directed  my  thoughts 
repeatedly  to  the  sick  boy,  saying  to  him,  "God  made  you  in 
His  image  and  likeness.  God  is  perfect,  without  flaw  or  sickness. 
Be  you  therefore  perfect,  as  your  Father  in  heaven  is  perfect. 


214 


That  is  what  Christ  said  to  you."  This  alternated  with  my 
repeating  that,  "not  even  a  sparrow  falls  to  the  ground  without 
His  knowing  it."  And  I  pointed  out  somewhat  bitterly  that  the 
Son  of  God  had  said,  "Inasmuch  as  you  do  it  to  one  of  the  least 
of  these  you  do  it  also  to  me." 

Gradually  the  anger  and  frenzy  died  down,  but 
remembrance  of  the  peasant  and  his  epileptic  son  continued 
day  and  night.  One  evening,  about  ten  days  after  my  first 
meeting  with  the  peasant,  I  was  just  going  into  the  drug-store 
when  a  bare-footed  man  in  worn  overalls  and  a  big  straw  hat 
came  out,  holding  a  package  in  one  hand.  On  seeing  me  he 
swept  off  his  hat,  waved  the  package  in  the  air  and  exclaimed 
excitedly,  "This  has  just  come,  the  medicine  for  my  son.  But  I 
no  longer  need  it.  Something  has  happened." 

It  was  the  same  peasant.  I  had  not  recognized  him  with  his 
hat  on.  I  knew  what  was  coming  and  felt  faint  because  of  it.  I 
said,  "Remember,  Senor,  the  Bible  says  that  the  Lord  giveth 
and  the  Lord  taketh  away.  What  He  does  is  a  mystery  to  us. 
Dont  ask  any  questions.  Just  go  to  the  church  and  give  thanks 
to  God." 

"But  Senora,"  he  said,  "I  must  tell  you  what  has  happened. 
Since  we  talked  the  other  night  my  son  has  had  no  more  fits. 
What  shall  I  do  with  this?"  And  he  held  out  the  box  of  medicine. 

I  had  known  what  was  coming.  "Dont  open  it,  Senor,"  I 
said,  "You  wont  need  it.  Just  go  to  the  church  and  give  thanks 
to  God."  And  I  turned  and  rushed  up  the  hill  to  my  house, 
thinking,  "Excuse  me,  God!  Forgive  me!",  consumed  with 
humility  and  shame  at  my  former  rage,  overflowing  with  love 
of  God. 

On  a  Sunday  morning  some  months  later,  when  I  had 
completely  forgotten  the  peasant  and  his  son,  I  was  leaving  my 


215 


house  with  Martha  to  go  to  the  beach  when  an  ancient  truck 
full  of  people  dressed  in  their  Sunday  best  came  roaring  up  the 
hill  and  stopped  outside  my  door.  One  by  one  they  scrambled 
out  and  came  on  to  the  terrace,  each  one  carrying  something  in 
his  hand.  They  made  quite  a  pile  there  —  fruit,  eggs,  chickens, 
fish,  freshly  baked  bread,  a  bottle  of  wine,  lobsters  —  and  then 
they  returned  to  the  truck,  while  I  kept  on  remonstrating,  "You 
have  made  a  mistake!  You  have  come  to  the  wrong  house!  I 
didn't  order  anything!" 

Just  then  my  little  Puerto  Rican  friend,  scarcely 
recognizable  in  his  Sunday  clothes,  came  up  to  me  shyly  and 
said,  "Senora,  these  are  my  relatives.  We  have  brought  you  these 
gifts  to  show  our  appreciation  for  what  you  did  for  my  son." 

"But  Senor",  I  protested,  "I  did  nothing,  nothing!  Please 
try  to  understand  me.  It  was  not  I  who  did  it!" 

Then  I  asked  him  about  his  son,  how  he  was  now.  He 
glowed  with  quiet  pride.  "He  has  gained  fifteen  pounds,"  he 
said,  "He  is  quite  well  now.  I  sent  him  to  the  island  of  St.  Thomas 
to  work  on  his  uncle's  farm  for  a  few  weeks  and  now  he  is  back 
here  with  me.  He  works  on  the  land  with  me  in  the  morning 
and  we  earn  enough  to  pay  a  girl  to  look  after  the  baby,  and  in 
the  afternoons  he  goes  to  school.  He  has  never  had  another  fit." 


eg  so 


216 


An  Incarnate 
Abbot  Explains 

Asked  about  reincarnation,  Sri  Bhagavan  remarked, 
"See  how  a  tree  grows  again  when  its  branches  are  cut  off  So 
long  as  the  life  source  is  not  destroyed  it  will  grow.  Similarly, 
latent  potentialities  withdraw  into  the  heart  at  death  but  do 
not  perish.  That  is  how  beings  are  reborn" 

Here  is  an  instance  taken  from  a  speech  by  Trungpa 
Trulku  Rinpoche  given  at  Roselaleham. 

A  FTER  THE  DEATH  of  the  previous  Abbot  of  Surmang, 
jljL  my  monastery,  the  monks  sent  a  deputation  to  His 
Holiness  Gyalwa  Karmapa,  the  head  of  our  particular  school  of 
Tibetan  Buddhism.  They  asked  him  whether  he  could  tell  them 
where  their  Abbot  had  taken  birth  again,  so  that  they  could 
bring  him  back  among  them.  Gyalwa  Karmapa  spent  several 
days  in  meditation,  and  finally  gave  them  the  answer  that  their 
Abbot  was  born  as  a  young  child  living  in  the  village  of  Geje,  in 
a  house  facing  south  and  that  the  family  had  two  children  and  a 
brown  dog.  After  some  difficulty  the  monks  found  the  house 
and  the  young  child,  who  was  myself. 

I  am  told  that  as  the  monks  came  in  and  presented  me 
with  the  traditional  white  scarf,  I  behaved  in  exactly  the  right 
manner,  although  I  had  never  been  taught  how.  Also  that  I 


217 


recognised  various  objects  that  had  been  the  possessions  of  my 
predecessor,  shown  to  me  among  others  of  the  same  kind. 
Eventually  they  were  convinced  that  I  was  the  eleventh  Abbot 
Trungpa  and  they  brought  me  back  to  Surmang. 

Shortly  after  that  I  was  formally  enthroned  as  Abbot, 
although  of  course,  all  my  duties  were  performed  by  an  elder 
monk  acting  as  regent.  I  was  put  into  the  charge  of  a  tutor,  and 
continued  to  see  my  parents  from  time  to  time.  I  began  learning 
about  religion  from  my  tutor,  who  told  me  about  the  life  of 
Gautama  the  Buddha  and  about  his  teachings.  At  the  age  of 
eight  I  began  my  first  simple  meditation. 

From  then  on  I  learned  more  and  more  about  the  various 
meditations  of  our  school.  I  received  instruction  from  two  of 
the  great  Gurus  or  Teachers  of  Eastern  Tibet.  One  of  them, 
Chentse  Rinpoche,  is  now  in  India  and  is  still  my  Guru. 
Sometimes  I  lived  in  the  monastery  and  sometimes  away  from 
it,  in  retreat.  Every  monk  of  our  school  spends  several  years  in 
solitary  meditation  during  that  time,  living,  sleeping  and  eating 
in  one  small  room.  Meditation  is  really  the  heart  of  a  monk's 
life,  for  in  it  he  discovers  and  experiences  the  actual  truth  of  the 
teachings  he  has  before  known  only  intellectually.  I  do  not  want 
to  speak  about  the  particular  techniques  of  meditation.  There 
are  many  and  they  are  adapted  to  suit  the  needs  of  all  kinds  of 
individuals.  I  want  rather  to  speak  about  the  reasons  for 
meditation  and  its  essence,  for  meditation  is  not  necessarily  a 
matter  of  sitting  cross-legged  and  motionless  for  long  periods 
of  time,  it  is  something  that  may  be  practised,  consciously  or 
unconsciously  by  anyone  at  any  time. 

You  will  be  able  to  draw  parallels  to  what  I  shall  say  both 
from  the  beliefs  and  practices  of  other  religions  and  from  your 
own  experiences.  We  are  all  human  beings  and  our  existence 


218 


presents  similar  problems  and  similar  possibilities.  As  Milarepa, 
the  great  sage  and  poet  of  Tibet,  sang  from  the  top  of  mountains, 
£I  am  the  goal  of  every  great  meditator,  I  am  the  meeting  place 
of  the  faithful,  I  am  the  coil  of  birth,  death  and  decay.' 

To  start  at  the  beginning  -  each  one  of  us  may  be  struck  at 
one  time  or  another  by  the  inadequacy  of  our  way  of  experiencing 
the  world.  We  feel  that  something  is  missing,  that  our  attempts  to 
explain  and  to  organise  our  lives  and  to  provide  ourselves  with 
an  emotional  security  are  doomed  to  failure  and  are  indeed  in 
themselves  contradictory  to  the  nature  of  things.  Also  that  in  our 
simply  fulfilling  our  own  desires  we  are  cheating  the  Universe. 

Meditation  is  the  attempt  to  remove  those  aspects  of  our 
natures  in  which  our  awareness  of  life  is  limited  and  confined, 
and  experience  a  new  depth.  Upon  what  does  our  everyday 
picture  of  the  world  depend?  It  depends  not  upon  things 
themselves  but  on  our  reactions  to  them.  We  project  outwards 
on  things  our  own  hopes  and  prejudices,  and  order  our  separate 
world  accordingly.  Meditation  is  a  gradual  loss  of  these  private 
worlds,  and  realisation  that  our  true  natures  lie  hidden  in  the 
heart  of  the  Universe. 

It  is  one  of  the  fundamental  teachings  of  Buddhism  that 
things  in  themselves  are  without  substance.  They  are  all,  like 
flowers,  springing  up  suddenly  out  of  nothingness  and  again 
withering.  The  world  of  things,  or  the  appearance  of  things,  is  a 
kind  of  puppet  show,  a  masquerade.  In  itself  it  possesses  a  kind 
of  demonic  energy,  but  it  can  give  no  lasting  satisfaction  to  the 
heart.  In  meditation  we  begin  to  cross  the  threshold  between 
appearance  and  reality. 

Many  of  us  will  have  thought  like  this,  but  will  also  have 
experienced  how  difficult  this  threshold  is  to  cross.  All 
unconsciously,  the  world  of  appearances  exercises  a  certain 


219 


fascination.  Everything  in  its  appearances  releases  a  small  charge 
of  energy,  and  our  ignorant  minds,  feeling  dissatisfaction  with 
their  existing  states,  leap  to  swallow  this  charge.  Thereafter,  the 
imprint  of  the  object  remains  fixed  in  the  memory.  If  the 
experience  is  in  some  way  pleasurable,  the  mind  desires  a 
repetition  of  it.  If  it  is  unpleasant,  the  mind  will  reject  any 
repetition  of  it,  and  a  negative  force  is  set  up. 

Meditation  consists  of  seeing  the  world  for  precisely  what  it  is. 
This  can  be  done  only  when  one  remains  quite  unaffected  by  hatred 
or  desire.  One  observes  dispassionately  ones  reactions  to  things,  and 
gradually  the  passions  of  greed  and  hatred  are  driven  out  of  ones 
system.  Instead  of  reaching  out  for  one  thing  after  another,  one 
becomes  calmer  and  more  self-possessed.  One  uses  the  strength  thus 
released  to  gradually  eliminate  distracted  and  discursive  thoughts  as 
they  arise,  and  brings  oneself  into  a  state  of  clear,  one-pointed 
awareness.  One  begins  to  experience  greater  freedom  and  room  to 
move  about.  One  no  longer  heeds  ones  hopes  and  fears,  and  lets  go 
the  burden  of  them.  Becoming  nothing,  one  becomes  everything 
and  suddenly  it  may  happen  that  one  is  left  for  a  moment  still.  There 
is  before  one,  through  one  and  around  one  infinite  space  -  the  reality 
flowing  unobstructed.  As  Milarepa  says: 

'As  happy  as  the  current  of  a  great  river, 

So  is  the  sage  who  enjoys  the  stream  of  thought.' 

This  is  possible  for  everyone,  but  clearly  it  requires  certain 
qualities  in  us,  and  it  requires  time  to  come  to  fruition. 

We  need  first  of  all  to  have  clearly  in  our  minds  what  we 
are  trying  to  do.  Our  basic  assumptions  influence  us  far  more 
than  we  realise  and  we  must  become  thoroughly  steeped  in  the 
ideas  and  the  attitudes  of  the  spiritual  life  before  we  can  begin.  I 
had  to  memorise  a  large  portion  of  our  scriptures  and  repeat 
them  by  heart  to  my  tutor. 


220 


As  well  as  study,  we  need  determination  and  integrity.  Each 
one  stands  before  the  threshold  of  eternity,  alone  with  himself. 
He  cannot  rely  on  any  created  thing.  Each  one  of  us  can  forge 
a  true  vessel  only  out  of  himself;  others  may  help  us  but  in  the 
end  it  is  we  alone  who  are  responsible.  Gradually  we  have  to 
realise  the  agony  of  our  mistakes,  our  failure  to  understand  and 
we  have  to  have  the  courage  to  come  out  of  prison. 

Beyond  this  solitude,  one  thing  else  is  needed.  Just  as 
everything  in  the  world  of  appearance  releases  a  charge  of  energy, 
so  also  does  everything  in  eternity.  That  energy,  indeed,  is  far 
stronger  because  it  has  been  purified  of  the  stain  of  greed,  hatred 
and  material  illusion.  The  thought  is  not  a  thought  of  anything, 
it  is  a  thought  which  in  itself  is  pure  energy,  passing  into  and 
through  everything  unobstructed.  So  when  we  purify  our  minds, 
a  force  is  built  up  from  which  each  one  of  us  can  draw  and  in 
the  light  of  which,  each  one  can  examine  himself.  In  the 
monasteries  and  hermitages  of  Tibet  I  could  feel  this  strength 
in  operation.  It  was  something  of  which  we  were  all  part.  If  I 
may  be  allowed  to  say  so,  I  feel  this  atmosphere  lacking  in  the 
cities  and  even  in  many  churches  of  this  country.  I  hope  very 
much  that  during  our  time  here  together,  we  may  join  in  making 
a  spirit  that  one  may  call  new  and  some  may  call  old  but  which 
in  itself  abides  forever. 


221 


Zen  Stories 


The  following  are  well-known  specimens  of  Zen  stories, 
much  condensed. 

TWO  MONKS,  one  older,  one  young,  came  to  a  muddy 
ford  where  a  pretty  girl  was  waiting  to  cross.  The  elder 
picked  her  up  and  carried  her  over  the  water.  As  they  went 
along,  the  younger,  horrified  at  the  act  of  his  brother  monk  in 
touching  a  woman,  kept  on  commenting  upon  it,  until  at  last 
the  elder  exclaimed:  "What!  Are  you  still  carrying  that  girl?  I 

put  her  down  as  soon  as  we  crossed  the  water!" 

*  *  * 

When  a  Master  was  troubled  by  a  monk  who  persisted  in 
saying  that  he  could  not  understand,  the  Master  said:  "Come 
nearer".  The  monk  came  nearer.  The  Master  again  said:  "Come 
nearer",  and  once  more  the  monk  did  so.  "How  well  you 

understand!"  remarked  the  Master! 

*  *  * 

A  boastful  monkey  went  to  heaven  and  there  met  the 
Buddha.  He  said:  "Buddha  is  a  small  thing,  but  I  can  jump 
many  leagues."  "If  you  are  so  clever,"  said  the  Buddha  "jump 
away  from  the  palm  of  my  hand."  The  monkey  thought  that 
would  be  easy  since  the  palm  seemed  to  him  only  inches  wide. 
So  he  leaped  far,  far  away.  He  found  himself  on  a  large  plain 


222 


bounded  by  five  great  pillars.  To  prove  he  had  been  there  he 
made  a  mark  at  the  base  of  one  of  these.  After  returning  to 
Buddha  he  boasted  of  what  he  had  done.  "But  look  at  my  hand," 
said  Buddha.  There  the  monkey  saw  the  mark  which  he  had 

made.  It  was  at  the  base  of  one  of  Buddha's  fingers! 

*  *  * 

A  Master  was  once  approached  by  a  boy  requesting 
instruction,  so  the  Master  gave  him  the  koam  "What  is  the  sound 
of  the  clapping  of  one  hand?"  The  boy  went  away  and  happened 
to  hear  some  Geishas  playing,  so  he  went  to  the  Master  and 
imitated  that.  On  being  told  that  was  not  it,  he  went  away  and 
heard  water  dripping,  again  the  water  flowing,  again  the  locust 
-  altogether  ten  times.  All  were  wrong.  Then  the  boy  could  find 
or  think  of  no  more,  and  lo!  he  discovered  the  soundlessness  of 

one  hand,  the  sound  of  sound! 

*  *  * 

A  man  chased  by  a  tiger  jumped  over  a  cliff  and  clung  to  a 
tree  growing  on  the  side.  Looking  down  he  saw  another  tiger 
waiting  for  him  to  fall.  Worse  and  worse,  he  saw  two  mice,  one 
white  and  one  black,  gnawing  at  the  branch  to  which  he  was 
clinging.  It  chanced  that  he  just  then  caught  sight  of  some 
strawberries  growing  within  reach.  With  one  hand  he  plucked 
a  strawberry  and  put  it  in  his  mouth.  "How  good  it  tastes!"  he 
thought. 

A  Zen  monk  named  Ryoken  lived  in  a  hut  alone  and 
without  any  possessions.  One  day  when  he  was  out,  a  thief 
entered  to  steal.  He  was  about  to  depart  when  the  monk 
returned.  The  monk  said:  "I  am  sorry  you  have  found  nothing; 
please  take  my  clothes."  After  the  thief  had  gone,  the  monk  sat 
naked  looking  at  the  moon.  "Alas!",  he  mused,  "What  a  pity 
that  I  could  not  give  him  that  beautiful  moon!" 


223 


The  Story  of  Lila 


An  elderly  gentlemany  formerly  a  co-worker  with  B.  V. 
Narasimhaswami  and  author  of  some  Visishtadvaita  work, 
visited  the  place  for  the  first  time.  He  asked  about  rebirths,  if 
it  is  possible  for  the  linga  sarira  (subtle  body)  to  get  dissolved 
and  be  reborn  two  years  after  death. 

M.:  Yes.  Surely.  Not  only  can  one  be  reborn,  one  may  be 
twenty  or  forty  or  even  seventy  years  old  in  the  new  body 
though  only  two  years  after  death. 

Sri  Bhagavan  cited  Lilas  story  from  Yoga  Vasishta. 
(Talk  No.  129) 

There  was  a  reference  to  reincarnation.  Reincarnation  of 
Shanti  Devi  tallies  with  the  human  standards  of  time  whereas 
the  latest  case  reported  of  a  boy  of  seven  is  different.  The  boy  is 
seven  years  now.  He  recalls  his  past  births.  Enquiries  go  to  show 
that  the  previous  body  was  given  up  10  months  ago. 

The  question  arises  how  the  matter  stood  for  six  years  and 
two  months  previous  to  the  death  of  the  former  body.  Did  the 
soul  occupy  two  bodies  at  the  same  time? 

Sri  Bhagavan  pointed  out  that  the  seven  years  is  according 
to  the  boy  and  the  ten  months  is  according  to  the  observer.  The 
difference  is  due  to  these  two  different  upadhis  (mental  states,). 
The  boy's  experience  extending  to  seven  years  has  been 
calculated  by  the  observer  to  cover  only  10  months  of  his  own 
time. 


224 


Sri  Bhagavan  again  referred  to  Lilas  story  inj/oga  Vasishta. 
(TalkNo.261) 

Once  there  was  a  king  by  the  name  of  Padma,  who  was 
wealthy  and  wise.  He  had  a  beautiful  wife  called  Lila  who  was 
devoted  to  her  husband.Once  she  thought,  "My  Husband  is 
dearer  to  me  than  my  life.  He  is  young  and  prosperous.  How 
to  make  him  remain  forever  young  and  deathless?" 

She  consulted  learned  pandits  of  the  court.  They  advised 
her,"All  successful  accomplishments  are  attained  by  religious 
austerity,  repetition  of  mantras  and  self-control,  but  immortality 
can  not  be  obtained  on  any  account." 

Having  heard  thus  from  the  learned  Brahmins,  she 
reflected,  "In  case  I  have  to  die  before  my  husband,  freed  from 
all  agony,  I  shall  happily  rest  in  the  Self  and  in  case  he  precedes 
me  then  his  soul  should  not  go  out  of  this  room.  I  shall  worship 
the  Goddess  Sarasvati  and  ask  for  boons." 

Having  resolved  thus  the  queen,  without  telling  her 
husband,  performed  severe  austerities  as  laid  down  in  the 
scriptures. 

Goddess  Sarasvati  was  pleased  by  the  queen's  austerities. 
She  appeared  and  said,  "Ask  for  any  boon  and  it  shall  be 
granted,  "Overjoyed  Lila  sang  hymns  of  praise  to  the  Goddess, 
and  asked  for  two  boons,"  When  my  husband  dies,  the  soul 
of  my  husband,  should  remain  here.  Whenever  I  pray  to  you, 
give  me  your  vision."  Accordingly,  the  Goddess  granted  both 
the  boons. 

After  several  years  Lilas  husband  passed  away.  The  bereaved 
queen  placed  her  husband  s  corpse  in  a  bed  of  flowers  as  instructed 
by  the  Goddess.  In  great  distress  she  asked  the  Goddess,"Where 
does  my  husband  reside?  What  does  he  do?  What  is  his  state  at 
present?  Lead  me  to  him.  I  cannot  live  without  him." 


225 


The  Goddess  taught  Lila  about  Brahman  (the  Supreme 
Spirit  or  Ultimate  Reality)  and  narrated  the  existence  of  various 
planes  penetrating  one  another  and  existing  quite  unperceived 
by  the  inhabitants  of  other  planes.  She  also  taught  her  the  method 
of  seeing  and  visiting  the  various  worlds  interpenetrating  one's 
own.  Lila  abandoned  her  own  body,  and  the  Goddess  took  her 
to  the  world  of  her  husband's  in  which  she  saw  him  in  an  assembly 
of  kings.  She  was  surprised  to  see  him  sitting  on  a  throne,  now 
looking  very  young.  Lila  asked  the  Goddess  for  an  explanation. 
She  was  told  about  the  delusion  of  creation.  The  Goddess 
spoke  as  follows: 

"Once  there  lived  a  virtuous  Brahmin  named  Vasishta. 
His  wife  was  Arundhati  who  equaled  him  in  all  respects.  Once 
he  saw  the  king  passing  by  with  his  retinue  and  thought, 
'Kingship  is  indeed  delightful,  blessed  with  all  good  fortune.  I 
wish  that  I  were  a  king.' 

"Vasishtha's  death  was  impending  and  knowing  this,  his 
wife  took  refuge  in  me.  Like  you,  she  prayed  to  me,  '  May  the 
soul  of  my  dead  husband  not  depart  from  this  place.'  I  granted 
her  prayer.  The  poor  Brahmin  died,  his  wife,  Arundhati,  being 
unable  to  bear  the  pangs  of  separation  from  her  husband,  burnt 
herself  along  with  the  body  of  her  husband."  Sarasvati  told  Lila 
that  all  that  had  happened  only  a  week  ago,  and  that  the  Brahmin 
pair  had  been  born  as  herself  (Lila)  and  her  husband,  King 
Padma,  in  the  world  where  he  had  just  died  after  having  lived  a 
long  life,  leaving  Lila  alone.  Lila  did  not  believe  this  story,  because 
the  couple  had  died  recently,  whereas  Lila  and  Padma  were  born 
years  before.  Lila  asked  the  Goddess  whether  one  soul  can 
occupy  two  bodies  simultaneously.  Saraswati  explained  that  the 
two  frames  of  reference  were  different  and  that  a  person's  strong 
sankalpa  (determination  or  aspiration^  can  manifest  as  humans. 


226 


The  Goddess  then  took  Lila  to  that  world,  and  made  her  verify 
the  story  from  a  son  of  the  deceased  pair.  Through  meditation, 
she  remembered  all  her  previous  births  since  her  origin  from 
the  Creator.  Lila  lamented,  "Alas!  Today  I  have  remembered 
hundreds  of  my  previous  births.  Indeed,  I  have  wandered  much 
in  various  kinds  of  wombs." 

Both  Lila  and  Sarasvati  returned  to  the  present  world  of 
the  king,  who  was  called  Viduratha,  and  found  him  in  his  70th 
year.  His  wife  was  also  named  Lila  (let  us  call  her  Lila  II).  Lila 
and  Saraswati  manifested  themselves  before  the  king  in  his  private 
apartment  and  mysteriously  reminded  him  of  his  previous 
existence  as  Padma.  He  entertained  a  desire  to  be  Padma  again. 
His  present  wife,  Lila  II,  propitiated  Sarasvati  to  confer  a  boon 
upon  her  to  be  the  wife  of  Vidurtha  even  in  his  next  life. 

After  a  short  time,  there  was  a  war  in  which  King  Viduratha 
was  killed.  His  soul,  which  was  present,  throughout,  in  the  room 
where  the  corpse  of  Padma  was  lying,  reentered  the  dead  body. 
And  lo!  The  soul  rose  again  as  King  Padma,  who  found  standing 
before  him  his  two  wives,  namely,  Lila  I  and  Lila  II.  "Let  all 
sorrows  end  and  let  there  be  endless  happiness."  So  saying  the 
Goddess  blessed  them  and  disappeared. 

Finally,  all  three  of  them-  Lila,  the  second  Lila  and  the 
King-  were  liberated  while  still  alive,  and  in  due  course,  became 
one  with  the  Absolute  by  the  grace  of  the  Goddess. 


eg  so 


227 


APPENDIX 

Important  Events  in  Sri  Bhagavan's  Life 

1879  December  30,  Monday  -  corresponding  to  16,  Margali  of 
Tamil  Year  Pramadi  —  Star  Punarvasu  —  Ardra  Darshan 
Day — Born  at  1  a.m.  at  Tiruchuli  ( 'Sri  Sundara  Mandiram) . 

1891  Moves  to  Dindigul,  after  completing  elementary 
education  at  Tiruchuli. 

1892  February  18:  Death  of  father,  Sundaram  Iyer.  Moves  to 
Madurai.  Studies  at  Scott's  Middle  School  and  American 
Mission  High  School. 

1895  November:  Hears  of  Arunachala  mentioned  to  him  by 
an  elderly  relative. 

1896  (about  middle  of  July):  'Death  Experience'  at  Madurai 
ending  in  complete  and  permanent  Realisation  of  the 
Self  (cSri  Ramana  Mandiram). 

August  29,  Saturday:  Leaves  Madurai  for  Arunachala. 
September  1  —  Tuesday:  Arrives  in  Arunachala  —  Stays  in 
the  Temple  premises  within  the  Thousand-pillared  Hall, 
beneath  the  Illupai  Tree,  in  Pathala  Linga  (underground 
cellar),  sometimes  in  the  Gopuram. 

1897  Moves  to  Gurumurtam  in  the  outskirts  of  the  town  (early 
in  the  year). 

Stays  in  the  shrine  and  the  adjoining  Mango  grove. 

1898  May:  Uncle  Nelliappa  Iyer  visits  Bhagavan  at  Mango  grove. 
September:  Moves  to  Pavalakkunru. 

December:  Mother  Alagammal  visits  Bhagavan  at 
Pavalakkunru. 

1899  February:  Moves  to  the  Hill,  Arunachala.  Stays  in  various 
caves  up  the  Hill,  but  mostly  in  Virupaksha  Cave,  using 
Mango  Tree  Cave  as  summer  residence. 


228 


1900  Replies  to  questions  put  by  Gambiram  Seshayya,  at 

Virupaksha  Cave. 
1902  (The  above  published  as  Self-enquiry) 
1902  Answers  to  questions  asked  by  Sivaprakasam  Pillai 

(Who  am  I?) 

1905  Moves  to  Pachaiamman  Koil  for  six  months  during  the 
plague  epidemic  —  returns  to  the  Hill. 

1907  November  18:  Momentous  meeting  between  Bhagavan 
and  Kavyakanta  Ganapati  Muni.  Bhagavan  imparts 
upadesa  to  Muni. 

1908  (January  to  March):  Stays  at  Pachaiamman  Koil  (with 
Ganapati  Muni  and  others)  and  again  goes  back  to 
Virupaksha  Cave. 

Translates  into  Tamil  prose  Adi  Sankaras  Viveka 
Chudamanai  and  Drik  Drisya  Viveka. 

1911  November:  EH.  Humphreys,  the  first  Westerner,  meets 
Bhagavan. 

1912  Second  death  experience  at  Tortoise  Rock  in  the  presence 
of  Vasudeva  Sastry  and  others. 

1914  Offers  prayers  (songs)  to  Arunachala  for  Mothers  recovery 
from  illness. 

1915  The  Song  of  the Pappadum  written  for  the  sake  of  mother. 
The  following  were  also  written  during  Virupaksha  days: 
Arunachala  Aksharamanamalai,  Arunachala  Padikam, 
Arunachala  Ashtakam,  Translation  of  Devi  Kalottara, 
Translation  of  Adi  Sankaras  Hymn  to  Dakshinamurti, 
Guru  Stuti  and  Hastamalaka  Stotra. 

1916  Moves  to  Skandashram. 

1917  Composes  Arunachala  Pancharatnam  in  Sanskrit. 
Mother  settles  at  Skandashram.  Sri  Ramana  Gita  in 
Sanskrit  written  by  Ganapati  Muni. 

1922  May  19,  Friday:  Mother's  Maha  Samadhi. 


229 


Middle  of  December:  Moves  to  the  present  site  of 
Sri  Raman asramam. 

1927  Composes  Upadesa  Sara  in  Tamil,  Telugu,  Sanskrit  and 
Malayalam. 

April  24:  Composes  Atma  Vidya  (Self  Knowledge). 

1928  Composes  Ulladu  Narpadu  (Forty  Verses  on  Reality)  in 
Tamil  and  Malayalam  {Sat  Darshanam) . 

1930  Sat  Darshanam  in  Sanskrit  (translated  from  Tamil  by 

Ganapati  Muni). 
1933  Translated  into  Tamil  the  Agama:  Sarvajnanotharam  — 

Atma  Sakshatkara. 

1939  September  1,  Thursday:  Foundation  laid  by  Bhagavan 
for  the  Matrubhuteswara  Temple. 

1940  Selects  42  verses  from  The  Bhagavad  Gita  (now  entitled 
The  Song  Celestial)  and  translates  them  into  Tamil  and 
Malayalam. 

1947  February:  Composes  Ekatma  Panchakam  (Five  Verses  on 
the  Self)  in  Telugu  and  Tamil. 

1948  June  18:  Cow  Lakhsmi  attains  Nirvana. 
Translates  into  Tamil  Atma  Bodha  of  Adi  Sankara. 

1949  March  17,  Thursday  —  Kumbabhishekam  of 
Matrubhuteswara  Temple  in  the  presence  of  Bhagavan. 

1950  April  14,  Friday:  Brahma  Nirvana  of  Bhagavan  at  8-47 
p.m.  At  that  moment  a  shooting  star,  vividly  luminous, 
coming  from  the  South  (the  present  Nirvana  Room)  and 
moving  slowly  northward  across  the  sky  and  disappearing 
behind  the  peak  of  Arunachala  was  observed  by  many  in 
various  parts  of  India. 

c%  so